Nissan Automobile 2010 Armada User Manual
®
2010 ARMADA  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOREWORD  
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY  
Before driving your vehicle, please read this  
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-  
iarity with controls and maintenance require-  
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your  
vehicle.  
For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive  
models, a mark is placed at the begin-  
ning of the applicable sections/items.  
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN  
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with  
confidence. It was produced using the latest  
techniques and strict quality control.  
As with other vehicles with features for  
off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel  
drive models correctly may result in loss of  
control or an accident. Be sure to read  
“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-  
ing and driving” section of this manual.  
This manual was prepared to help you under-  
stand the operation and maintenance of your  
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-  
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this  
manual before operating your vehicle.  
WARNING  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-  
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!  
Follow these important driving rules to  
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip  
for you and your passengers!  
A separate Warranty Information Booklet  
explains details about the warranties cov-  
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service  
and Maintenance Guide” explains details  
about maintaining and servicing your ve-  
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer  
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will  
explain how to resolve any concerns you  
may have with your vehicle, as well as  
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon  
law.  
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD  
DRIVING  
This vehicle will handle and maneuver  
differently from an ordinary passenger  
car because it has a higher center of  
gravity for off-road use. As with other  
vehicles with features of this type, fail-  
ure to operate this vehicle correctly may  
result in loss of control or an accident.  
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-  
cohol or drugs.  
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits  
and never drive too fast for conditions.  
●
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving  
and avoid using vehicle features or taking  
other actions that could distract you.  
Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-  
road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-  
ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving  
safety precautions”, in the “Starting and  
driving” section of this manual.  
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle  
best. When you require any service or have any  
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the  
extensive resources available to them.  
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-  
priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen  
children should be seated in the rear seat.  
● ALWAYS provide information about the  
proper use of vehicle safety features to  
all occupants of the vehicle.  
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual  
for important safety information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHEN READING THE MANUAL  
This manual includes information for all options  
available on this model. Therefore, you may find  
some information that does not apply to your  
vehicle.  
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE  
This vehicle should not be modified.  
Modification  
performance, safety or durability, and  
may even violate governmental  
could  
affect  
its  
All information, specifications and illustrations in  
this manual are those in effect at the time of  
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change  
specifications or design without notice and with-  
out obligation.  
regulations. In addition, damage or per-  
formance problems resulting from modi-  
fications may not be covered under  
NISSAN warranties.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT  
THIS MANUAL  
You will see various symbols in this manual. They  
are used in the following ways:  
APD1005  
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”  
or “Do not let this happen.”  
WARNING  
This is used to indicate the presence of a  
hazard that could cause death or serious  
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the  
risk, the procedures must be followed  
precisely.  
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-  
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the  
vehicle.  
CAUTION  
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these  
indicate movement or action.  
This is used to indicate the presence of a  
hazard that could cause minor or moder-  
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-  
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-  
cedures must be followed carefully.  
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these  
call attention to an item in the illustration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65  
WARNING  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed to  
Visteon and Xanavi  
Informatics  
XM Radio௡ requires  
subscription, sold  
separately after first 90  
days. Not available in  
Alaska, Hawaii or  
Guam. For more  
WARNING  
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,  
and certain vehicle components contain  
or emit chemicals known to the State of  
California to cause cancer and birth de-  
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-  
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles  
and certain products of component wear  
contain or emit chemicals known to the  
State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
Corporation.  
information, visit bxw-  
ww.xmradio.com.  
Gracenote௡ is a  
registered trademark of  
Gracenote, Inc. The  
Gracenote logo and  
logo type, and the  
“Powered by  
Gracenote” logo are  
trademarks of  
Gracenote.  
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE  
ADVISORY  
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-  
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The  
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate  
Material – special handling may apply, See  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”  
© 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.  
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s  
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval  
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any  
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,  
recording or otherwise, without the prior written  
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM  
NISSAN CARES . . .  
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are  
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.  
However, if there is something that your NISSAN  
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to  
provide NISSAN directly with comments or  
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-  
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free  
number:  
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the  
following information:  
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:  
For U.S. customers  
– Your name, address, and telephone number  
Nissan North America, Inc.  
Consumer Affairs Department  
P.O. Box 685003  
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the  
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s  
side)  
Franklin, TN 37068-5003  
For U.S. customers  
1-800-NISSAN-1  
(1-800-647-7261)  
For Canadian customers  
Nissan Canada Inc.  
5290 Orbitor Drive  
– Date of purchase  
– Current odometer reading  
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name  
– Your comments or questions  
OR  
For Canadian customers  
1-800-387-0122  
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5  
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of  
Contents  
Illustrated table of contents  
0
1
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Instruments and controls  
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Starting and driving  
3
4
5
In case of emergency  
6
Appearance and care  
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Technical and consumer information  
8
9
Index  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0 Illustrated table of contents  
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2  
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3  
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4  
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5  
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6  
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8  
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD  
RESTRAINTS  
1. 3rd row bench seat belts (P. 1-21)  
2. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-21)  
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and  
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)  
4. Front seat belts (P. 1-21)  
5. Head Restraints (P.1-8 )  
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags  
(P.1-53)  
7. Seats (P. 1-2)  
8. Occupant classification sensor  
(pressure sensor) (P.1-61)  
9. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-66)  
10. Front seat-mounted side-impact  
supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)  
11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
CHildren) (P. 1-34)  
12. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor  
(P. 1-48)  
13. 3rd row bench seat top tether strap  
anchor (P. 1-49)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WII0154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-2 Illustrated table of contents  
 
EXTERIOR FRONT  
1. Engine hood (P. 3-23)  
2. Windshield wiper and washer switch  
(P. 2-28)  
3. Windshield (P. 8-19)  
4. Power windows (P. 2-50)  
5. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key™,  
keys (P. 3-5, 3-12, 3-2)  
6. Mirrors (P. 3-32)  
7. Tire pressure (P. 9-12)  
8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)  
9. Tire chains (P. 8-41)  
10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)  
11. Headlight and turn signal switch  
(P. 2-30)  
12. Fog light switch (P. 2-33)  
13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-13)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WII0123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Illustrated table of contents 0-3  
 
EXTERIOR REAR  
1. Roof rack (P. 2-49)  
2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)  
3. Glass hatch (P. 3-28)  
4. Rear window washer (P.2-29)  
5. Glass hatch release (P.3-28)  
6. Lift gate release (P. 3-27)  
7. Rearview monitor (if so equipped)  
(P.4-33)  
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)  
9. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation  
(P. 3-28, P. 9-3, 9-4)  
10. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-28)  
11. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-7)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WII0111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-4 Illustrated table of contents  
 
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT  
1. Rear ventilators (P. 4-35)  
2. Storage (P. 2-40)  
3. DVD entertainment system  
(if so equipped) (P. 4-76)  
4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-54)  
5. Map lights (P. 2-57)  
6. Sun visors (P. 3-31)  
7. HomeLinkா (P. 2-58)  
8. Glove box (P. 2-41)  
9. Seats (P. 1-2)  
10. Cup holders (P. 2-44)  
11. Luggage storage (P. 2-47)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
LII0022  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Illustrated table of contents 0-5  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
1.  
2.  
Vents (P. 4-35)  
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn  
signal switch (P. 2-30)  
3.  
4.  
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-33)  
Steering wheel switch for audio  
control/hands-free Bluetoothா phone  
(if so equipped) (P. 4-73)  
Driver supplemental air bag/horn  
(P. 1-53, P. 2-34)  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Meters, gauges and warning/indicator  
lights (P. 2-4, 2-13)  
Cruise control main/set switches  
(P. 5-18)  
Windshield wiper/washer switch and  
rear window wiper/washer switch  
(P. 2-28, P. 2-29)  
9.  
Ignition switch (P. 5-9)  
10. Display screen/Display screen with  
navigation system* (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-2, P. 4-17)  
11. Navigation system* controls  
(if so equipped) (P. 4-17)  
12. Audio system controls (P. 4-39)  
13. Front passenger supplemental air bag  
(P. 1-53)  
14. Glove box (P. 2-41)  
15. Hazard lights (P. 2-34)  
WIC1378  
0-6 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual (if so equipped).  
16. Climate controls (P. 4-36)  
17. Power outlet (P. 2-38)  
18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-35)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
19. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF  
switch (P. 2-36)  
20. Tow mode switch (P. 2-38)  
21. Shift selector (P. 5-13)  
22. Heated steering wheel (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-35)  
23. Center stack storage (P. 2-40)  
24. Power outlet (P. 2-38)  
25. Front passenger air bag status light  
(P. 1-62)  
26. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-53)  
27. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)  
(P. 5-21)  
28. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-30)  
29. Rear or front and rear sonar system off  
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)  
30. Pedal position adjustment switch  
(P. 3-30)  
31. Power vent window (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-53)  
32. Lift gate open/close switch  
(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)  
Illustrated table of contents 0-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK  
LOCATIONS  
1. Battery (P. 8-13)  
2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)  
3. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11)  
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)  
5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)  
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
(P. 8-13)  
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)  
8. Drive belt location (P.8-16)  
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)  
10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)  
11. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)  
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WDI0630  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-8 Illustrated table of contents  
 
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS  
Warning  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-14  
Warning  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-15  
Indicator  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-18  
2-19  
2-19  
2-19  
2-20  
2-20  
2-20  
Anti-lock Braking  
System (ABS) warn-  
ing light  
Engine oil pressure  
low/engine coolant  
temperature high  
warning light  
Front passenger air  
bag status light  
or  
High beam indicator  
light (Blue)  
4WD warning light  
2-16  
2-16  
2-16  
2-18  
2-18  
2-18  
Automatic transmis-  
sion check warning  
light  
2-14  
2-14  
Malfunction indica-  
tor light (MIL)  
(
model)  
Low fuel warning  
light  
Security indicator  
light  
Automatic transmis-  
sion park warning  
light (  
Low tire pressure  
warning light  
Slip indicator light  
model)  
Master warning light  
Brake warning light  
2-14  
Turn signal/hazard  
indicator lights  
or  
Seat belt warning  
light and chime  
Vehicle Dynamic  
Control (VDC) off  
indicator light  
Supplemental air  
bag warning light  
Charge warning  
light  
2-15  
2-15  
Check suspension  
warning light (if so  
equipped)  
Illustrated table of contents 0-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Front manual seat adjustment  
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31  
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31  
Small children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31  
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32  
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32  
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32  
(if so equipped for passenger’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Front power seat adjustment (for driver’s  
seat and if so equipped for passenger’s  
seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
2nd row captain’s chair adjustment  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
2nd row bench seat adjustment  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34  
Rear-facing child restraint installation using  
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38  
Rear-facing child restraint installation using  
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40  
Forward-facing child restraint installation  
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43  
Forward-facing child restraint installation  
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45  
Installing top tether strap  
(2nd row captain’s chairs or 2nd row bench  
seat [if so equipped] ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48  
Installing top tether strap  
(3rd row bench seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49  
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
Adjustable headrest (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12  
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15  
3rd row power folding seats (if so equipped) . . . . .1-20  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21  
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21  
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24  
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24  
Three-point type seat belt with retractor. . . . . . . . . .1-24  
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30  
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67  
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEATS  
● The seatback should not be reclined  
any more than needed for comfort. Seat  
belts are most effective when the pas-  
senger sits well back and straight up in  
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the  
risk of sliding under the lap belt and  
being injured is increased.  
CAUTION  
When adjusting the seat positions, be  
sure not to contact any moving parts to  
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.  
FRONT MANUAL SEAT  
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for  
passenger’s seat)  
ARS1152  
● For the most effective protection when  
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should  
be upright. Always sit well back in the  
seat with both feet on the floor and  
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-  
tions on seat belt usage” later in this  
section.  
WARNING  
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when  
the seatback is reclined. This can be  
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not  
be against your body. In an accident,  
you could be thrown into it and receive  
neck or other serious injuries. You  
could also slide under the lap belt and  
receive serious internal injuries.  
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat  
to make sure it is securely locked.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LRS0244  
LRS0245  
Forward and backward  
Reclining  
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the  
seat forward or backward to the desired position.  
Release the lever to lock the seat in position.  
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean  
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever  
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever  
to lock the seatback in position.  
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the  
seatback for occupants of different sizes for  
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat  
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later  
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined  
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is  
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)  
position.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the  
seatback for occupants of different sizes for  
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat  
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later  
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-  
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-  
hicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P  
(Park).  
LRS0633  
See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”  
in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”for auto-  
matic drive positioner operation.  
FRONT POWER SEAT  
ADJUSTMENT (for driver’s seat and if  
so equipped for passenger’s seat)  
Forward and backward  
Operating tips  
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide  
the seat forward or backward to the desired  
position.  
●
The power seat motor has an auto-reset  
overload protection circuit. If the motor  
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,  
then reactivate the switch.  
Reclining  
●
Do not operate the power seat switch for a  
long period of time when the engine is off.  
This will discharge the battery.  
Move the recline switch backward until the de-  
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback  
forward again, move the switch forward and  
move your body forward. The seatback will move  
forward.  
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LRS0634  
LRS0635  
WRS0369  
Seat lifter (driver’s seat)  
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)  
2ND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIR  
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)  
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or  
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat  
cushion.  
The lumbar support feature provides lower back  
support to the driver. Move the lever up or down  
to adjust the seat lumbar area.  
Reclining  
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever and  
lean back.  
The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-  
back for occupants of different sizes for added  
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit  
(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this  
section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to  
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is  
stopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0369  
WRS0415  
LRS0372  
Outboard seats  
2ND ROW BENCH SEAT  
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)  
2
Then  
lift up on the lower corner of the seat  
Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row  
᭺
base and tip the 2nd row captain’s chair forward.  
To exit the 3rd row bench seat, lift up on the same  
seatback latch and fold the seatback forward  
onto the seat base. Then lift up on the seat base  
and tip it forward.  
The 2nd row captain’s chairs can be tipped for-  
ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench  
1
seat. To enter the 3rd row , raise the armrest so  
᭺
Reclining  
it is parallel to the seatback and in the stowed  
position, then lift up on the seatback latch located  
on the upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd  
row captain’s chair and fold the seatback forward  
at an angle over the seat base. This will release  
the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.  
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever and  
lean back.  
The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-  
back for occupants of different sizes for added  
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit  
(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this  
section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to  
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is  
stopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).  
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat  
to make sure it is securely locked.  
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when  
the seatback is reclined. This can be  
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not  
be against your body. In an accident,  
you could be thrown into it and receive  
neck or other serious injuries. You  
could also slide under the lap belt and  
receive serious internal injuries.  
● For the most effective protection when  
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should  
be upright. Always sit well back in the  
seat and adjust the seat belt properly.  
See “Precautions on seat belt usage”  
later in this section.  
WRS0414  
LRS0331  
2
Then  
lift up on the lower corner of the seat  
Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row  
᭺
base and tip the outboard seating position of the  
2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd row  
bench seat, lift up on the same seatback latch  
and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base.  
Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward.  
The outboard seating positions on the 2nd row  
bench seat can be tipped forward for easy entry  
or exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the  
1
3rd row , lift up on the seatback latch located  
᭺
on the upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd  
row bench seat and fold the seatback forward at  
an angle over the seat base. This will release the  
back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HEAD RESTRAINTS  
WARNING  
Head restraints supplement the other ve-  
hicle safety systems. They may provide  
additional protection against injury in cer-  
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head  
restraints properly, as specified in this  
section. Check the adjustment after  
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach  
anything to the head restraint stalks or  
remove the head restraint. Do not use the  
seat if the head restraint has been re-  
moved. Failure to follow these instruc-  
tions can reduce the effectiveness of the  
head restraints. This may increase the risk  
of serious injury or death in a collision.  
WRS0368  
ARMRESTS  
To use the armrests, pull them down to the rest-  
ing position.  
A
Stowed position  
᭺
B
Resting position  
᭺
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LRS0886  
LRS0887  
The illustration shows the seating positions  
equipped with head restraints. All of the head  
restraints are adjustable.  
Components  
1. Head restraint  
2. Adjustment notches  
3. Lock knob  
᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with  
a head restraint.  
4. Stalks  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0134  
LRS0888  
LRS0889  
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.  
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push  
the head restraint down.  
Adjustment  
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level  
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.  
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0890  
LRS0891  
SPA1025  
Removal  
Install  
Front-seat Active Head Restraints  
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-  
justable head restraints.  
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes  
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is  
facing the correct direction. The stalk with  
1
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-  
ing the force that the seatback receives from the  
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement  
of the head restraint helps support the occu-  
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement  
and helping absorb some of the forces that may  
lead to whiplash-type injuries.  
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest  
position.  
the adjustment notches  
must be installed  
᭺
2
in the hole with the lock button  
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob.  
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the  
head restraint down.  
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.  
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions  
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that  
whiplash injury occurs most.  
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an  
occupant uses the seating position.  
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not  
loose in the vehicle.  
5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint  
before an occupant uses the seating posi-  
tion.  
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain  
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head  
restraints return to their original position.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as  
described in this section.  
ADJUSTABLE HEADREST (if so  
equipped)  
WARNING  
The adjustable headrests supplement the  
other vehicle safety systems. They may  
provide additional protection against in-  
jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust  
the headrests properly, as specified in this  
section. Check the adjustment after  
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach  
anything to the adjustable headrest stalks  
or remove the adjustable headrests. Do  
not use the seat if the adjustable head-  
rests have been removed. Failure to fol-  
low these instructions can reduce the ef-  
fectiveness of the adjustable headrests.  
This may increase the risk of serious injury  
or death in a collision.  
LRS0892  
The illustration shows the seating positions  
equipped with adjustable headrests. All of the  
headrests are adjustable.  
Ⅲ Indicates the seating position is equipped with  
an adjustable headrest.  
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped  
with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.  
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LRS0887  
WRS0134  
LRS0888  
To raise the headrest, pull it up.  
Components  
1. Adjustable headrest  
2. Adjustment notches  
3. Lock knob  
Adjustment  
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the  
center of the seat occupant’s ears.  
4. Stalks  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0889  
LRS0890  
LRS0891  
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push  
the headrest down.  
Removal  
Install  
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-  
justable headrests.  
1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in  
the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing  
the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-  
1
1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.  
2. Push and hold the lock knob.  
justment notches  
must be installed in the  
᭺
2
hole with the lock button  
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the  
headrest down.  
3. Remove the headrest from the seat.  
4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose  
in the vehicle.  
3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-  
cupant uses the seating position.  
5. Install and properly adjust the headrest be-  
fore an occupant uses the seating position.  
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FLEXIBLE SEATING  
● If the head restraints are removed for  
any reason, they should be securely  
stored to prevent them from causing  
injury to passengers or damage to the  
vehicle in case of sudden braking or an  
accident.  
WARNING  
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo  
area or on the rear seats when they are  
in the fold-down position. In a collision,  
people riding in these areas without  
proper restraints are more likely to be  
seriously injured or killed.  
● When returning the seatbacks to the  
upright position, be certain they are  
completely secured in the latched posi-  
tion. If they are not completely secured,  
passengers may be injured in an acci-  
dent or sudden stop.  
● Do not allow people to ride in any area  
of your vehicle that is not equipped with  
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone  
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a  
seat belt properly.  
● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-  
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not  
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.  
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured  
cargo could cause personal injury.  
LRS0341  
Folding the front passenger’s seatback  
● Do not fold down the rear seats when  
occupants are in the rear seat area or  
any luggage is on the rear seats.  
To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for  
extra storage length when transporting long  
items:  
● Head restraints should be adjusted  
properly as they may provide significant  
protection against injury in an accident.  
Always replace and adjust them prop-  
erly if they have been removed for any  
reason.  
1
Move the seat to the rearmost position by  
᭺
pushing the switch backward until the seat  
comes to a stop. Then recline the seatback  
as far forward as possible using the recline  
switch. Lift up on the latch located on the  
upper corner of the seatback to release the  
back of the seat.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-  
back flat forward to carry longer ob-  
jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-  
cured and not near an air bag. In a  
crash, an inflating air bag might force  
that object toward a person. This could  
cause severe injury or even death. Se-  
cure objects away from the area in  
which an air bag would inflate. See  
“Precautions on supplemental restraint  
system” later in this section.  
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo  
area or on the front passenger’s seat  
when it is in the fold-down position. Use  
of these areas by passengers could re-  
sult in serious injury in an accident or  
sudden stop.  
LRS0342  
LRS0332  
2
Once the seatback is released it will enable  
you to fold the front passenger seatback flat  
over the seat cushion.  
Folding the 2nd row captain’s chairs (if  
so equipped)  
᭺
To fold the 2nd row captain’s chairs flat for maxi-  
mum cargo hauling:  
3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a  
seating position, lift up on the seatback and  
push it up to an upright position. Move the  
recline switch backward until the desired  
angle is obtained.  
1
Raise the armrest to the stowed position.  
᭺
Remove the 2nd row center console, see  
“2nd row center console”in the “Instruments  
and controls” section of this Owner’s  
Manual.  
2
Pull the strap forward, located in the center  
of the seat cushion, and fold the seat cush-  
ion toward the front of the vehicle.  
᭺
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0333  
LRS0334  
LRS0641  
3
4
5
Then lift up on the recline lever to fold the  
seatback flat forward.  
There is a carpet panel flap that can be  
folded toward the back of the vehicle.  
The carpet panel flaps provide a level cargo  
floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded  
flat. Reverse this process to return the 2nd  
row captain’s chairs to a seating position.  
Make sure to properly raise the seat-  
back to an upright position and push  
the seat cushion down into place.  
᭺
᭺
᭺
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0336  
LRS0337  
LRS0338  
2
3
Then lift up on the recline lever on the side of  
the outboard seats to fold the outboard seat-  
backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat,  
pull up on the strap on the edge of the center  
seat cushion and fold the seatback toward  
the front of the vehicle.  
There is a carpet panel flap on the back of  
each seat that can be folded toward the  
back of the vehicle.  
Folding the 2nd row bench seat (if so  
equipped)  
᭺
᭺
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum  
cargo hauling:  
1
Pull the strap forward, located in the center  
of each seat cushion, and fold each seat  
cushion toward the front of the vehicle.  
᭺
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To return the 3rd row split bench seat to a seating  
position, unfold the seatback and push it back  
until it latches into position.  
WARNING  
● When returning the seatbacks, be sure  
to attach the rear center seat belt  
connector.  
● Do not unfasten the rear center seat  
belt connector except when folding  
down the rear seat.  
● When attaching the rear center seat  
belt connector, be certain that the seat-  
backs are completely secured in the  
latched position and the rear center  
seat belt connector is completely  
secured.  
LRS0636  
LRS0637  
4
The carpet panel flap provides a level cargo  
floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded  
flat.  
᭺
Folding the 3rd row split bench seat (if  
so equipped)  
To fold the 3rd row split bench seat flat for  
maximum cargo capacity:  
5. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seats  
to a seating position, reverse the process for  
the outboard seats.  
● If the rear center seat belt connector  
and the seatbacks are not secured in  
the correct position, serious personal  
injury may result in an accident or sud-  
den stop.  
1. Disconnect and secure the center seat belt  
and tongues into the retractor base. See  
“Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt” later  
in this section.  
6. To return the center seat to a seating posi-  
tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back of  
the seat base while lifting on the seatback.  
Then push the seat cushion back into place.  
Make sure to hold the seat belts above  
the seat cushion and properly raise the  
seatback to an upright position. Then  
push the seat cushion down into place.  
2. Lower the head restraints to the full down  
position.  
3. Then pull up on the latch located on the  
outside corner of each seatback and fold the  
seatback forward over the seat base.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Disconnect and secure the center seat belt  
and tongues into the retractor base. See  
“Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt” later  
in this section.  
– Always reconnect the center seat belt  
when the seat is returned to the upright  
position  
●
Make sure that there are no objects on the  
seatback cushion.  
CAUTION  
Make sure the seat(s) is returned to the  
full upright position before a passenger  
sits in the seat(s).  
LRS0792  
LRS0793  
To fold down the 3rd row seats, push and hold  
the bottom portion of the switch.  
3RD ROW POWER FOLDING  
SEATS (if so equipped)  
When folding or returning the seat(s) to  
the upright position, to avoid injury to  
yourself and others:  
To raise the 3rd row seats, push and hold the top  
portion of the switch.  
The 3rd row power folding seat controls are  
located behind the 2nd row seat (passenger’s  
● Make sure that the seat path is clear  
before moving the seat.  
1
side) on the 3rd row cup holder console  
.
A chime will sound three times to indicate the  
start of the operation.  
᭺
There are also controls located on the rear quar-  
● Be careful not to allow hands or feet to  
get caught or pinched in the seat.  
ter trim panel behind the 3rd row seats (passen-  
A warning beep will sound 5 times if the seat isn’t  
in the full upright or folded position when the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON position. If the  
warning beep is still present after one complete  
cycle and if the seats are in the full upright or  
folded position, bring your vehicle in for service.  
2
ger’s side)  
.
᭺
Before operating the 3rd row seats:  
●
Make sure the 2nd row seatback isn’t re-  
clined.  
●
Lower the 3rd row headrest to the full down  
position.  
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SEAT BELTS  
If the ignition switch is off, the power folding  
seats are always operational.  
If the ignition switch is on, the power folding seats  
are only operational when the shift selector is in P  
(Park) or N (Neutral).  
If the engine is started during operation, the  
seat(s) will temporarily pause.  
NOTE:  
Operating the power folding seats can dis-  
charge the vehicle battery if the vehicle is  
not running.  
SSS0136  
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT  
USAGE  
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-  
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in  
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances  
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the  
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.  
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your  
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,  
even if your seating position includes a supple-  
mental air bag.  
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces  
or territories specify that seat belts be worn  
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSS0134  
SSS0016  
WARNING  
WARNING  
● Every person who drives or rides in this  
vehicle should use a seat belt at all  
times. Children should be properly re-  
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-  
priate, in a child restraint.  
● The seat belt should be properly ad-  
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may  
reduce the effectiveness of the entire  
restraint system and increase the  
chance or severity of injury in an acci-  
dent. Serious injury or death can occur  
if the seat belt is not worn properly.  
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely  
fastened to the proper buckle.  
● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-  
vated, it cannot be reused and must be  
replaced together with the retractor.  
See your NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or  
twisted. Doing so may reduce its  
effectiveness.  
● Removal and installation of preten-  
sioner system components should be  
done by a NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not allow more than one person to  
use the same seat belt.  
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-  
tractors and attaching hardware,  
should be inspected after any collision  
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-  
mends that all seat belt assemblies in  
use during a collision be replaced un-  
less the collision was minor and the  
belts show no damage and continue to  
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies  
not in use during a collision should also  
be inspected and replaced if either  
damage or improper operation is noted.  
● Never carry more people in the vehicle  
than there are seat belts.  
● If the seat belt warning light glows con-  
tinuously while the ignition is turned  
ON with all doors closed and all seat  
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-  
function in the system. Have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
SSS0014  
WARNING  
● Always route the shoulder belt over  
your shoulder and across your chest.  
Never put the belt behind your back,  
under your arm or across your neck. The  
belt should be away from your face and  
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.  
● No changes should be made to the seat  
belt system. For example, do not modify  
the seat belt, add material, or install  
devices that may change the seat belt  
routing or tension. Doing so may affect  
the operation of the seat belt system.  
Modifying or tampering with the seat  
belt system may result in serious per-  
sonal injury.  
● All child restraints and attaching hard-  
ware should be inspected after any col-  
lision. Always follow the restraint  
manufacturer’s inspection instructions  
and replacement recommendations.  
The child restraints should be replaced  
if they are damaged.  
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as  
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE  
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could  
increase the risk of internal injuries in  
an accident.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREGNANT WOMEN  
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when  
the seatback is reclined. This can be  
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not  
be against your body. In an accident,  
you could be thrown into it and receive  
neck or other serious injuries. You  
could also slide under the lap belt and  
receive serious internal injuries.  
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use  
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and  
always position the lap belt as low as possible  
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder  
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.  
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-  
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific  
recommendations.  
● For the most effective protection when  
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should  
be upright. Always sit well back in the  
seat with both feet on the floor and  
adjust the seat belt properly.  
INJURED PERSONS  
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use  
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific  
recommendations.  
WRS0174  
Manual seat shown  
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT  
WITH RETRACTOR  
Fastening the seat belts  
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this  
section.  
WARNING  
● Every person who drives or rides in this  
vehicle should use a seat belt at all  
times.  
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow  
the driver and passengers some freedom of  
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt  
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during  
certain impacts.  
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode  
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child  
restraint installation.  
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt  
cannot be extended again until the seat belt  
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully  
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode  
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-  
straints” later in this section for more information.  
WRS0137  
WRS0138  
2
3
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor  
and insert the tongue into the buckle until  
you hear and feel the latch engage.  
Position the lap belt portion low and snug  
᭺
᭺
on the hips as shown.  
The ALR mode should be used only for  
child restraint installation. During normal  
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode  
should not be activated. If it is activated, it  
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-  
sion. It can also change the operation of  
the front passenger air bag. See “Front  
passenger air bag and status light” later in  
this section.  
4
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the  
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the  
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder  
and across your chest.  
᭺
●
●
The retractor is designed to lock during  
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow  
pulling motion permits the seat belt to  
move and allows you some freedom of  
movement in the seat.  
The front passenger seat and the rear seating  
positions three-point seat belts have two modes  
of operation:  
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from  
its fully retracted position, firmly pull  
the belt and release it. Then smoothly  
pull the belt out of the retractor.  
●
●
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,  
check the operation as follows:  
WARNING  
When fastening the seat belts, be certain  
that the seatbacks are completely se-  
cured in the latched position. If they are  
not completely secured, passengers may  
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.  
●
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward  
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-  
strict further belt movement.  
If the retractor does not lock during this check or  
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-  
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.  
WRS0139  
Unfastening the seat belts  
1
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on  
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-  
tracts.  
᭺
Checking seat belt operation  
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt  
movement by two separate methods:  
●
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the  
retractor.  
●
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.  
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0240  
SSS0241  
Center of the 3rd row bench seat  
WARNING  
The 3rd row center seat belt has a connector  
● Always fasten the connector tongue  
and the seat belt in the order shown.  
1
2
tongue  
and a seat belt tongue  
. Both the  
᭺
᭺
connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must  
be securely latched for proper seat belt opera-  
tion.  
● Always make sure both the connector  
tongue and the seat belt tongue are  
secured when using the seat belt or  
installing a child restraint. Do not use  
the seat belt or child restraint with only  
the seat belt tongue attached. This  
could result in serious personal injury in  
case of an accident or a sudden stop.  
LRS0432  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt  
● If the rear center seat belt connector  
and the seatbacks are not secured in  
the correct position, serious personal  
injury may result in an accident or sud-  
den stop.  
When folding down the 3rd row seat, the 3rd row  
center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed  
position as follows:  
1
Hold the connector tongue so that the seat  
᭺
belt does not retract suddenly when the  
tongue is released from the connector  
buckle. Release the connector tongue by  
inserting a suitable tool such as a key into the  
A
connector buckle  
.
᭺
2
Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.  
᭺
3
Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabric  
sleeve so it will lay flat. Then secure the  
connector tongue into the retractor base.  
᭺
WARNING  
● Do not unfasten the rear center seat  
belt connector except when folding  
down the rear seat.  
● When attaching the rear center seat  
belt connector, be certain that the seat-  
backs are completely secured in the  
latched position and the rear center  
seat belt connector is completely  
secured.  
LRS0433  
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt  
WARNING  
Always be sure the 3rd row center seat belt  
connector tongue and connector buckle are at-  
tached. Disconnect only when folding down the  
rear seat.  
● Do not unfasten the rear center seat  
belt connector except when folding  
down the rear seat.  
● When attaching the rear center seat  
belt connector, be certain that the seat-  
backs are completely secured in the  
latched position and the rear center  
seat belt connector is completely  
secured.  
To connect the buckle:  
1
Pull out the connector tongue from the re-  
tractor base.  
᭺
2
Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabric  
sleeve.  
᭺
● If the rear center seat belt connector  
and the seatbacks are not secured in  
the correct position, serious personal  
injury may result in an accident or sud-  
den stop.  
3
Pull the seat belt and secure the receiver  
buckle until it clicks.  
᭺
LRS0242  
The center seat belt connector tongue and re-  
ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < mark.  
Front and 2nd row outboard seats  
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front  
and 2nd row outboard seats)  
The center seat belt connector tongue can be  
attached only into the rear center seat belt con-  
nector buckle.  
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-  
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-  
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)  
1
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat  
belts” earlier in this section.  
To adjust, pull out  
move the shoulder belt anchor  
the adjustment button and  
᭺
2
to the desired  
᭺
position, so the belt passes over the center of the  
shoulder. The belt should be away from your face  
and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-  
lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder  
belt anchor into position.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt  
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat  
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder  
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
● After adjustment, release the adjust-  
ment button and try to move the shoul-  
der belt anchor up and down to make  
sure it is securely fixed in position.  
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made  
by the same company which made the  
original equipment seat belts, should  
be used with NISSAN seat belts.  
Periodically check to see that the seat  
belt and the metal components, such as  
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires  
and anchors work properly. If loose parts,  
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the  
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-  
sembly should be replaced.  
● The shoulder belt anchor height should  
be adjusted to the position best for you.  
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-  
tiveness of the entire restraint system  
and increase the chance or severity of  
injury in an accident.  
● Adults and children who can use the  
standard seat belt should not use an  
extender. Such unnecessary use could  
result in serious personal injury in the  
event of an accident.  
● Never use seat belt extenders to install  
child restraints. If the child restraint is  
not secured properly, the child could be  
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-  
den stop.  
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS  
If, because of body size or driving position, it is  
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt  
and fasten it, an extender is available which is  
compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-  
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of  
length and may be used for either the driver or  
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN  
dealer for assistance if an extender is required.  
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE  
●
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a  
mild soap solution or any solution recom-  
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.  
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat  
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the  
seat belts to retract until they are completely  
dry.  
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHILD SAFETY  
Children need adults to help protect them.  
They need to be properly restrained.  
This is especially important because your  
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-  
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-  
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”  
later in this section.  
WARNING  
Infants and children need special protec-  
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit  
them properly. The shoulder belt may  
come too close to the face or neck. The  
lap belt may not fit over their small hip  
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-  
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal  
injury. Always use appropriate child  
restraints.  
In addition to the general information in this  
manual, child safety information is available from  
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,  
government traffic safety offices, and community  
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure  
to learn the best way to transport your child.  
INFANTS  
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed  
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-  
mends that infants be placed in child restraints  
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards. You should choose a child restraint  
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-  
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.  
There are three basic types of child restraint  
systems:  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-  
tories require the use of approved child restraints  
for infants and small children. See “Child Re-  
straints” later in this section.  
●
●
●
Rear-facing child restraint  
Forward-facing child restraint  
Booster seat  
SMALL CHILDREN  
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by  
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-  
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat  
belt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-  
formation.  
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.  
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less  
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing  
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints  
are available for children who outgrow rear-  
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.  
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle  
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer  
use a forward-facing child restraint.  
Children that are over one year old and weigh at  
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-  
facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s  
instructions for minimum and maximum weight  
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-  
mends that small children be placed in child  
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards. You should choose a child  
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow  
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation  
and use.  
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens  
and children be restrained in the rear seat.  
Studies show that children are safer when  
properly restrained in the rear seat than in  
the front seat.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHILD RESTRAINTS  
LARGER CHILDREN  
WARNING  
Children who are too large for child restraints  
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts  
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit  
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5  
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and  
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to  
obtain proper seat belt fit.  
Never let a child stand or kneel on any  
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo  
area. The child could be seriously injured  
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.  
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a  
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-  
der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap  
portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-  
men. The booster seat should raise the child so  
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned  
across the top, middle portion of the shoulder  
and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat  
can only be used in seating positions that have a  
three-point type seat belt. The booster seat  
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-  
fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so  
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face  
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the  
booster seat.  
ARS1098  
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD  
RESTRAINTS  
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Infants and children should never be  
held on anyone’s lap. In a collision or  
sudden braking, the child could be  
crushed between the adult and the  
vehicle. Even the strongest adult  
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint  
that will fit the child and vehicle.  
Some child restraints may not fit  
properly in your vehicle.  
– Child restraint anchor points are de-  
signed to withstand loads from child  
restraints that are properly fitted.  
cannot resist the forces of  
collision.  
a
– Do not put a seat belt around both a  
child and another passenger.  
– Never use the anchor points for adult  
seat belts or harnesses.  
– NISSAN recommends that all child  
restraints be installed in the rear  
seat. Studies show that children are  
safer when properly restrained in the  
rear seat than in the front seat. If you  
must install a forward-facing child  
restraint in the front seat, see “Child  
restraint installation using the seat  
belts” later in this section.  
– A child restraint with a top tether  
strap should not be used in the front  
passenger seat.  
WRS0256  
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-  
sible after fitting the child restraint.  
WARNING  
– Infants and children should always  
be placed in an appropriate child re-  
straint while in the vehicle.  
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-  
structions for proper use and installa-  
tion of child restraints could result in  
serious injury or death of a child or  
other passengers in a sudden stop or  
collision:  
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-  
facing child restraint in the front  
seat. An inflating air bag could seri-  
ously injure or kill a child. A rear-  
facing child restraint must only be  
used in the rear seat.  
● When the child restraint is not in use,  
keep it secured with the LATCH system  
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-  
sion, loose objects can injure occu-  
pants or damage the vehicle.  
– The child restraint must be used and  
installed properly. Always follow all  
of the child restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions for installation and use.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
If the child restraint is compatible with your  
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint  
and check the various adjustments to be  
sure the child restraint is compatible with  
your child. Choose a child restraint that is  
designed for your child’s height and weight.  
Always follow all recommended procedures.  
CAUTION  
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can  
become very hot. Check the seating sur-  
face and buckles before placing a child in  
the child restraint.  
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child  
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH  
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-  
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or  
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-  
nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH  
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-  
tem” later in this section.  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child  
restraint at all times while the vehicle is  
being operated. Canadian law requires the  
top tether strap on forward-facing child  
restraints be secured to the designated an-  
chor point on the vehicle.  
WRS0364  
LATCH system lower anchor locations -  
captain’s chairs  
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child  
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers  
for CHildren) SYSTEM  
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for  
infants and children of various sizes. When se-  
lecting any child restraint, keep the following  
points in mind:  
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor  
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors  
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible  
child restraints. This system may also be referred  
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.  
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle  
seat belt to secure the child restraint.  
●
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying  
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
●
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be  
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat  
and seat belt system.  
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install  
child restraints in the following positions only:  
●
2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)  
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LATCH lower anchor  
WARNING  
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-  
tions for proper use and installation of  
child restraints could result in serious in-  
jury or death of a child or other passen-  
gers in a sudden stop or collision:  
– Attach LATCH system compatible  
child restraints only at the locations  
shown in the illustration.  
– Do not secure a child restraint in the  
center rear seating position using  
the LATCH lower anchors. The child  
restraint will not be secured properly.  
WRS0416  
LRS0748  
LATCH system lower anchor locations -  
bench seat  
LATCH lower anchor location  
LATCH lower anchor location  
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-  
ing your fingers into the lower anchor  
area. Feel to make sure there are no  
obstructions over the anchors such  
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion  
material. The child restraint will not  
be secured properly if the lower an-  
chors are obstructed.  
●
2nd row bench seat outboard positions only  
(if so equipped)  
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear  
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is  
attached to the seatback to help you locate the  
LATCH lower anchors.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0344  
LRS0382  
LRS0661  
LATCH label locations 2nd row captain’s  
chairs (if so equipped)  
LATCH label locations 2nd row bench (if so  
equipped)  
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment  
Installing child restraint LATCH lower  
anchor attachments  
LATCH compatible child restraints include two  
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can  
be connected to two anchors located at certain  
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-  
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to  
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-  
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with  
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-  
structions provided by the child restraint manu-  
facturer.  
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Top tether anchor  
WARNING  
● If the cargo cover (if so equipped) con-  
tacts the top tether strap when it is  
attached to the top tether anchor, re-  
move the cargo cover from the vehicle  
or secure it on the cargo floor below its  
attachment location. If the cargo cover  
is not removed, it may damage the top  
tether strap during a collision. A child  
could be seriously injured or killed in a  
collision if the child restraint top tether  
strap is damaged.  
LRS0662  
LRS0340  
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment  
● Do not allow cargo to contact the top  
tether strap when it is attached to the  
top tether anchor. Properly secure the  
cargo so it does not contact the top  
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly  
secured or cargo that contacts the top  
tether strap may damage it during a  
collision. A child could be seriously in-  
jured or killed in a collision if the top  
tether strap is damaged.  
2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)  
The child restraint top tether strap must be used  
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH  
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Top  
tether anchor” for installation instructions.  
Top tether anchor point locations  
Anchor points are located in the following loca-  
tions:  
●
2nd row bench (if so equipped) on the floor  
behind the outboard seating positions as  
shown.  
When installing a child restraint, carefully read  
and follow the instructions in this manual and  
those supplied with the child restraint.  
●
●
2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped) on  
the floor behind the seats as shown.  
3rd row bench seat on the floor of the cargo  
area behind the center seat position as  
shown.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0361  
LRS0640  
WRS0801  
2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)  
3rd row bench seat  
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2  
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-  
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check  
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-  
erly attached to the lower anchors.  
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  
INSTALLATION USING LATCH  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-  
stalling a child restraint.  
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child  
restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH  
system:  
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions.  
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0802  
LRS0673  
LRS0674  
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2  
Rear-facing – step 3  
Rear-facing – step 4  
3. For child restraints that are equipped with  
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any  
additional slack from the anchor attach-  
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly  
in the center of the child restraint with your  
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while tightening the webbing  
of the anchor attachments.  
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the child restraint near  
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-  
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25  
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward  
and check to see if the LATCH attachment  
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is  
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment  
as necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint or try installing by  
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).  
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-  
hicles.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2  
through 4.  
WARNING  
● The three-point seat belt with Auto-  
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be  
used when installing a child restraint.  
Failure to use the ALR mode will result  
in the child restraint not being properly  
secured. The restraint could tip over or  
be loose and cause injury to a child in a  
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can  
change the operation of the front pas-  
senger air bag. See “Front passenger  
air bag and status light” later in this  
section.  
WRS0256  
● When installing a child restraint system  
in the rear center position, both the  
center seat belt connector tongue and  
buckle tongue must be secured. See  
“Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt”  
in this section.  
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT  
BELTS  
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0256  
WRS0761  
LRS0669  
Rear-facing – step 1  
Rear-facing – step 2  
Rear-facing – step 3  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-  
stalling a child restraint.  
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child  
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you  
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to  
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-  
structions for belt routing.  
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully  
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor  
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
when the seat belt is fully retracted.  
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child  
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear  
seats:  
1. Child restraints for infants must be  
used in the rear-facing direction and  
therefore must not be used in the front  
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.  
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0670  
WRS0762  
WRS0763  
Rear-facing – step 4  
Rear-facing – step 5  
Rear-facing – step 6  
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the  
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.  
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat  
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in  
the center of the child restraint to compress  
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while  
pulling up on the seat belt.  
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the child restraint near  
the seat belt path. The child restraint should  
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from  
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check  
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.  
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat  
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in  
another seat and test it again. You may need  
to try a different child restraint. Not all child  
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.  
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3  
through 6.  
After the child restraint is removed and the seat  
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint  
mode) is canceled.  
FORWARD-FACING CHILD  
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING  
LATCH  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-  
stalling a child restraint.  
WRS0799  
WRS0800  
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2  
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2  
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing  
child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the  
LATCH system:  
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-  
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check  
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-  
erly attached to the lower anchors.  
If the seating position does not have an adjust-  
able head restraint and it is interfering with the  
proper child restraint fit, try another seating posi-  
tion or a different child restraint.  
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions.  
3. The back of the child restraint should be  
secured against the vehicle seatback.  
If necessary, adjust the head restraint to obtain  
the correct child restraint fit. See “Head restraint  
adjustment” in this section for head restraint ad-  
justment information.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top  
tether strap, route the top tether strap and  
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this  
section. Do not install child restraints that  
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-  
ing positions that do not have a top tether  
anchor.  
LRS0671  
WRS0697  
Forward-facing – step 4  
Forward-facing – step 6  
4. For child restraints that are equipped with  
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any  
additional slack from the anchor attach-  
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly  
in the center of the child restraint with your  
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while tightening the webbing  
of the anchor attachments.  
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the child restraint near  
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-  
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25  
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward  
and check to see if the LATCH attachment  
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is  
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment  
as necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3  
through 6.  
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions.  
The back of the child restraint should be secured  
against the vehicle seatback.  
FORWARD-FACING CHILD  
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING  
THE SEAT BELTS  
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint  
to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head  
restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be  
sure to reinstall the head restraint when the  
child restraint is removed. See “Head re-  
straint adjustment” in this section for head re-  
straint adjustment, removal and installation infor-  
mation.  
WARNING  
The three-point seat belt with Automatic  
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used  
when installing a child restraint. Failure to  
use the ALR mode will result in the child  
restraint not being properly secured. The  
restraint could tip over or be loose and  
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or  
collision. Also, it can change the opera-  
tion of the front passenger air bag. See  
“Front passenger air bag and status light”  
later in this section.  
WRS0699  
If the seating position does not have an adjust-  
able head restraint and it is interfering with the  
proper child restraint fit, try another seating posi-  
tion or a different child restraint.  
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –  
step 1  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-  
stalling a child restraint.  
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing  
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the  
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:  
When installing a child restraint system in  
the rear center position, both the center  
seat belt connector tongue and buckle  
tongue must be secured. See “Attaching  
the 3rd row center seat belt” in this  
section.  
1. If you must install a child restraint in  
the front seat, it should be placed in a  
forward-facing direction only. Move  
the seat to the rearmost position. Child  
restraints for infants must be used in  
the rear-facing direction and, there-  
fore, must not be used in the front seat.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0680  
LRS0667  
LRS0668  
Forward-facing – step 3  
Forward-facing – step 4  
Forward-facing – step 5  
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child  
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you  
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to  
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-  
structions for belt routing.  
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully  
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor  
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
when the seat belt is fully retracted.  
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the  
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.  
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3  
through 8.  
WRS0681  
WRS0698  
Forward-facing – step 8  
Forward-facing – step 6  
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the child restraint near  
the seat belt path. The child restraint should  
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from  
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check  
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.  
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat  
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in  
another seat and test it again. You may need  
to try a different child restraint. Not all child  
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.  
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat  
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in  
the center of the child restraint with your  
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while pulling up on the seat  
belt.  
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top  
tether strap, route the top tether strap and  
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-  
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do  
not install child restraints that require the use  
of a top tether strap in seating positions that  
do not have a top tether anchor.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0475  
LRS0340  
LRS0361  
Forward-facing – step 10  
2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)  
2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)  
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front  
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in  
the ON position. The front passenger air bag  
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP  
(2nd row captain’s chairs or 2nd row  
bench seat [if so equipped] )  
status light  
should illuminate. If this  
light is not illuminated see, ЉFront passenger  
air bag and status lightЉ in this section.  
Move the child restraint to another  
seating position. Have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH  
lower anchors (2nd row captain’s or bench out-  
board seating positions only) or the seat belt, as  
applicable.  
After the child restraint is removed and the seat  
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-  
straint mode) is canceled.  
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head re-  
The center position of the 3rd row bench seat is  
the seating position that can use a top tether  
strap.  
1
straint to position the top tether strap  
᭺
over the top of the seatback. If the head  
restraint is removed, store it in a secure  
place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint  
when the child restraint is removed. See  
“Head restraint adjustment” in this  
section for head restraint adjustment,  
removal and installation information.  
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt,  
as applicable.  
1
1. Position the top tether strap  
over the top  
᭺
of the center seating position seatback.  
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
2
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point  
on the floor behind the child re-  
᭺
2
point  
on the floor behind the child re-  
straint.  
᭺
straint.  
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any  
slack.  
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any  
slack. Make sure the head restraint does not  
contact the top tether strap.  
LRS0640  
3rd row bench seat  
If you have any questions when installing a  
top tether strap child restraint on the rear  
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-  
tails.  
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP  
(3rd row bench seat)  
If you have any questions when installing a  
top tether strap on the rear seat, consult  
your NISSAN dealer for details.  
WARNING  
In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint  
with a top tether strap can only be used in  
the center position. Do not place in an  
outboard seating position and attempt to  
angle the tether strap to the center  
position.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BOOSTER SEATS  
Precautions on booster seats  
WARNING  
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used  
properly, the risk of a child being injured  
in a sudden stop or collision greatly  
increases:  
– Make sure the shoulder portion of  
the belt is away from the child’s face  
and neck and the lap portion of the  
belt does not cross the stomach.  
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not  
behind the child or under the child’s  
arm.  
LRS0455  
LRS0453  
●
Make sure the child’s head will be properly  
supported by the booster seat or vehicle  
seat. The seatback must be at or above the  
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a  
1
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by  
several manufacturers. When selecting any  
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:  
– A booster seat must only be installed  
in a seating position that has a  
lap/shoulder belt.  
●
Choose only a booster seat with a label  
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
low back booster seat  
is chosen, the  
᭺
vehicle seatback must be at or above the  
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is  
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a  
2
high back booster seat  
should be used.  
●
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be  
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat  
and seat belt system.  
᭺
●
If the booster seat is compatible with your  
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat  
and check the various adjustments to be  
sure the booster seat is compatible with the  
child. Always follow all recommended pro-  
cedures.  
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Booster seat installation  
CAUTION  
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the  
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when  
using a booster seat with the seat belts.  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”  
sections before installing a child restraint.  
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the  
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:  
LRS0464  
WRS0699  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child  
restraint at all times while the vehicle is  
being operated.  
1. If you must install a booster seat in the  
front seat, move the seat to the rear-  
most position.  
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only  
place it in a front-facing direction. Always  
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-  
structions.  
The instructions in this section apply to booster  
seat installation in the rear seats or the front  
passenger seat.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the seating position does not have an  
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering  
with the proper booster seat fit, try another  
seating position or a different booster seat.  
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low  
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to  
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-  
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.  
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt  
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.  
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned  
across the top, middle portion of the child’s  
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat  
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the  
seat belt routing.  
LRS0454  
WRS0475  
Front passenger position  
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front  
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in  
the ON position. The front passenger air bag  
3. The booster seat should be positioned on  
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.  
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-  
tions for properly fastening a seat belt  
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with  
retractor” earlier in this section.  
status light  
may or may not illuminate,  
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-  
straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If  
the head restraint is removed, store it in a  
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the  
head restraint when the booster seat is  
removed. See “Head restraint adjustment”  
in this section for head restraint adjustment,  
removal and installation information.  
depending on the size of the child and the  
type of booster seat being used. See “Front  
passenger air bag and status light” later in  
this section.  
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM  
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and  
rollover supplemental air bag system: This  
system can help cushion the impact force to the  
head of occupants in front and rear outboard  
seating positions in certain side impact or rollover  
collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags  
are designed to inflate on the side where the  
vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, both curtain and  
rollover air bags are designed to inflate and re-  
main inflated for a short time.  
PRECAUTIONS ON  
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM  
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-  
tion contains important information concerning  
the following systems:  
●
Driver and passenger supplemental front-  
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag  
System)  
These supplemental restraint systems are de-  
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-  
vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute  
for them. Seat belts should always be correctly  
worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-  
tance away from the steering wheel, instrument  
panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier  
in this section for instructions and precautions on  
seat belt usage.  
●
●
●
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag  
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-  
over supplemental air bag  
Seat belt with pretensioner  
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:  
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help  
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of  
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal  
collisions.  
The supplemental air bags operate only  
when the ignition switch is placed in the  
ON or START position.  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bags: This system can help cushion  
the impact force to the chest area of the driver  
and front passenger in certain side impact colli-  
sions. The supplemental side air bag is designed  
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-  
pacted.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● The driver and front passenger seat belt  
buckles are equipped with sensors that  
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The  
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the  
severity of a collision and seat belt us-  
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to  
properly wear seat belts can increase  
the risk or severity of injury in an  
accident.  
● The front passenger seat is equipped  
with an occupant classification sensor  
(pressure sensor) that turns the front  
passenger air bag OFF under some  
conditions. This sensor is only used in  
this seat. Failure to be properly seated  
and wearing the seat belt can increase  
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-  
dent. See “Front passenger air bag and  
status light” later in this section.  
WRS0031  
● The seat belts and the front air bags are  
most effective when you are sitting well  
back and upright in the seat. The front  
air bags inflate with great force. Even  
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-  
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning  
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-  
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of  
injury or death in a crash. You may also  
receive serious or fatal injuries from the  
front air bag if you are up against it  
when it inflates. Always sit back against  
the seatback and as far away as practi-  
cal from the steering wheel or instru-  
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.  
WARNING  
● The front air bags ordinarily will not  
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear  
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-  
tal collision. Always wear your seat  
belts to help reduce the risk or severity  
of injury in various kinds of accidents.  
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-  
ing wheel. Placing them inside the  
steering wheel rim could increase the  
risk that they are injured when the front  
air bag inflates.  
● The front passenger air bag will not  
inflate if the passenger air bag status  
light is lit or if the front passenger seat  
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air  
bag and status light” later in this  
section.  
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARS1133  
ARS1041  
WARNING  
● Never let children ride unrestrained or  
extend their hands or face out of the  
window. Do not attempt to hold them in  
your lap or arms. Some examples of  
dangerous riding positions are shown  
in the illustrations.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARS1042  
ARS1043  
ARS1044  
WARNING  
● Children may be severely injured or  
killed when the front air bags, side air  
bags or curtain and rollover air bags  
inflate if they are not properly re-  
strained. Pre-teens and children should  
be properly restrained in the rear seat, if  
possible.  
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0431  
ARS1045  
WRS0256  
Do not lean against the door.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-facing  
child restraint in the front seat. An in-  
flating front air bag could seriously in-  
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-  
straints” earlier in this section for  
details.  
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain  
side-impact and rollover supplemental air  
bags:  
● The side air bags and curtain and roll-  
over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in  
the event of a frontal impact, rear im-  
pact, or lower severity side collision.  
Always wear your seat belts to help  
reduce the risk or severity of injury in  
various kinds of accidents.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
● The seat belts, the side air bags and  
curtain and rollover air bags are most  
effective when you are sitting well back  
and upright in the seat. The side air bag  
and curtain and rollover air bag inflate  
with great force. Do not allow anyone to  
place their hand, leg or face near the  
side air bag on the side of the seatback  
of the front seat or near the side roof  
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the  
front seats or rear outboard seats to  
extend their hand out of the window or  
lean against the door. Some examples  
of dangerous riding positions are  
shown in the previous illustrations.  
WRS0365  
SSS0162  
Do not lean against doors or windows.  
Do not lean against doors or windows.  
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0363  
SSS0159  
WARNING  
● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do  
not hold onto the seatback of the front  
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may  
be seriously injured. Be especially care-  
ful with children, who should always be  
properly restrained. Some examples of  
dangerous riding positions are shown  
in the illustrations.  
● Do not use seat covers on the front  
seatbacks. They may interfere with side  
air bag inflation.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag inflators  
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and  
rollover supplemental air bags  
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)  
4. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-  
ules  
5. Crash zone sensor  
6. Occupant classification system control  
unit  
7. Occupant classification sensor (pres-  
sure sensor)  
8. Seat belt buckle switches  
9. Seat belt with pretensioner  
10. Satellite sensors  
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact  
supplemental air bag modules  
WRS0366  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it  
additionally monitors the weight of an occupant  
or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based  
on information from the sensors, only one front air  
bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the  
crash severity and whether the front occupants  
are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front  
passenger air bag may be automatically turned  
OFF under some conditions, depending on the  
weight detected on the passenger seat and how  
the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag  
is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be  
illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will  
not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See  
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in  
this section for further details. One front air bag  
inflating does not indicate improper performance  
of the system.  
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history  
of a breathing condition should get fresh air  
promptly.  
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System  
(front seats)  
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-  
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front  
passenger seats. This system is designed to  
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-  
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,  
all of the information, cautions and warn-  
ings in this manual still apply and must be  
followed.  
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,  
help to cushion the impact force on the face and  
chest of the front occupants. They can help save  
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an  
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions  
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide  
restraint to the lower body.  
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts  
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-  
senger seated upright as far as practical away  
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The  
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help pro-  
tect the front occupants. Because of this, the  
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the  
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is  
against, the front air bag module during inflation.  
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is  
located in the center of the steering wheel. The  
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is  
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.  
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher  
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-  
flate if the forces in another type of collision are  
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.  
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.  
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an  
indication of proper front air bag system opera-  
tion.  
If you have any questions about your air bag  
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN  
dealer. If you are considering modification of your  
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact  
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the  
front of this Owner’s Manual.  
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.  
The front air bags operate only when the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON or  
START position.  
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual  
stage inflators. It also monitors information from  
the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit  
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-  
sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-  
ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is  
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise  
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.  
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a  
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status light  
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such  
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-  
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used  
to meet the requirements.  
The front passenger air bag status light  
located under the climate controls. The light op-  
erates as follows:  
is  
One sensor used is the occupant classification  
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the  
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to  
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by  
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors  
described later. For example, if a child is in the  
front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-  
tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag  
OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a  
child restraint of the type specified in the regula-  
tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s  
weight can be detected and cause the air bag to  
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-  
tion can vary depending on the front passenger  
seat belt sensors.  
●
●
Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The  
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF  
and will not inflate in a crash.  
is  
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,  
child or child restraint as outlined in this  
section: The  
illuminates to indicate  
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and  
will not inflate in a crash.  
WRS0475  
●
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-  
ger meets the conditions outlined in this  
Front passenger air bag and status light  
section: The light  
is OFF to indicate  
WARNING  
that the front passenger air bag is opera-  
tional.  
The front passenger air bag is designed to  
automatically turn OFF under some con-  
ditions. Read this section carefully to  
learn how it operates. Proper use of the  
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-  
essary for most effective protection. Fail-  
ure to follow all instructions in this  
manual concerning the use of seats, seat  
belts and child restraints can increase the  
risk or severity of injury in an accident.  
Front passenger air bag  
The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-  
signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the  
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when  
it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). Based on the  
weight on the seat detected by the occupant  
classification sensor and the belt tension de-  
tected on the seat belt, the advanced air bag  
system determines whether the front passenger  
air bag should be automatically turned OFF as  
required by the regulations.  
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-  
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated  
under some conditions as described below in  
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front  
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a  
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your  
vehicle are not part of this system.  
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce  
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag  
1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are  
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-  
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-  
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For  
small adults it may be turned OFF; however, if the  
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-  
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting  
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out  
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn  
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant  
improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode  
(child restraint mode), this could cause the air  
bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be  
seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the  
most effective protection by the seat belt and  
supplemental air bag.  
OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section  
for proper use and installation.  
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is  
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly  
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air  
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the  
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.  
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the  
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a  
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the  
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of  
the object’s weight detected by the occupant  
classification sensor. Other conditions could also  
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is  
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the  
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.  
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants  
are seated and restrained properly.  
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-  
minate even though you believe that the child  
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are  
properly positioned, the system may be sensing  
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is  
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the  
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,  
until you have confirmed with your dealer that  
your air bag is working properly, reposition the  
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.  
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can  
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-  
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.  
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-  
senger seat is unoccupied.  
The air bag system and passenger air bag status  
light will take a few seconds to register a change  
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a  
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger  
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag  
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few  
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system  
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.  
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-  
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.  
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child  
restraints and booster seats be properly installed  
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant  
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are  
designed to operate as described above to turn  
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified  
child restraints as required by the regulations.  
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to  
use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may  
allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or  
sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-  
ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being  
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-  
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating  
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the  
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat  
properly or not using the seat belt properly.  
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,  
the passenger air bag status light may or may not  
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child  
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air  
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that  
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be  
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being  
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air  
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning  
, located in the meter and gauges area  
light  
on the driver’s side of the instrument panel, will  
blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other supplemental front-impact air bag  
precautions  
● Tampering with the front air bag system  
may result in serious personal injury.  
Tampering includes changes to the  
steering wheel and the instrument  
panel assembly by placing material  
over the steering wheel pad and above  
the instrument panel or by installing  
additional trim material around the air  
bag system.  
● Work on and around the front air bag  
system should be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-  
ment should also be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint  
System (SRS) wiring should not be  
modified or disconnected. Unautho-  
rized electrical test equipment and  
probing devices should not be used on  
the air bag system.  
WARNING  
● Do not place any objects on the steer-  
ing wheel pad or on the instrument  
panel. Also, do not place any objects  
between any occupant and the steering  
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-  
jects may become dangerous projec-  
tiles and cause injury if the front air  
bags inflate.  
● Modifying or tampering with the front  
passenger seat may result in serious  
personal injury. For example, do not  
change the front seats by placing mate-  
rial on the seat cushion or by installing  
additional trim material, such as seat  
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-  
cally designed to assure proper air bag  
operation. Additionally, do not stow any  
objects under the front passenger seat  
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such  
objects may interfere with the proper  
operation of the occupant classifica-  
tion sensor (pressure sensor).  
● A cracked windshield should be re-  
placed immediately by a qualified re-  
pair facility. A cracked windshield could  
affect the function of the supplemental  
air bag system.  
● Immediately after inflation, several  
front air bag system components will be  
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-  
verely burn yourself.  
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are  
yellow and orange for easy identification.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the supplemental air bag system. This is  
to prevent accidental inflation of the  
supplemental air bag or damage to the  
supplemental air bag system.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the front air bag system  
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections  
in this Owner’s Manual.  
● Do not make unauthorized changes to  
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-  
pension system or front end structure.  
This could affect proper operation of  
the front air bag system.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the seat belt system. This may affect the  
front air bag system. Tampering with  
the seat belt system may result in seri-  
ous personal injury.  
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
severity side collisions, although they may inflate  
if the forces in another type of collision are similar  
to those of a higher severity side impact. They are  
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle  
is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side  
collisions.  
cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags  
and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide  
restraint to the lower body.  
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the  
driver and passenger seated upright as far as  
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat  
passengers should be seated as far away as  
practical from the door finishers and side roof  
rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air  
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the  
occupants. Because of this, the force of the side  
air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflating  
can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is  
too close to, or is against, these air bag modules  
during inflation. The side air bag will deflate  
quickly after the collision is over.  
Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to  
inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near  
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements  
(for example, during severe off roading) may  
cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.  
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an  
indication of proper side air bag and curtain and  
rollover air bag operation.  
WRS0381  
Front seat-mounted side-impact  
When the side air bags and curtain and rollover  
air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,  
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not  
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should  
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation  
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing  
condition should get fresh air promptly.  
supplemental air bag and roof-  
mounted curtain side-impact and  
rollover supplemental air bag systems  
The curtain and rollover air bag will remain in-  
flated for a short time.  
The side air bags and curtain and rollover  
air bags operate only when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON or START posi-  
tion.  
The side air bags are located in the outside of the  
seatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-  
over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all  
3 rows. These systems are designed to meet  
voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of  
injury to out-of-position occupants. However,  
all of the information, cautions and warn-  
ings in this manual still apply and must be  
followed. The side air bags and curtain and  
rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher  
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,  
help to cushion the impact force on the chest of  
the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags  
help to cushion the impact force to the head of  
occupants in the front and rear outboard seating  
positions in all rows. They can help save lives and  
reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating  
side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat belts with pretensioners (Front  
seats)  
● Tampering with the side air bag system  
may result in serious personal injury.  
For example, do not change the front  
seats by placing material near the seat-  
backs or by installing additional trim  
material, such as seat covers, around  
the side air bag.  
WARNING  
● Do not place any objects near the seat-  
back of the front seats. Also, do not  
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,  
etc.) between the front door finisher  
and the front seat. Such objects may  
become dangerous projectiles and  
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.  
WARNING  
● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-  
ter activation. They must be replaced  
together with the retractor and buckle  
as a unit.  
● Work around and on the side air bag  
and curtain and rollover air bag systems  
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.  
Installation of electrical equipment  
should also be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*  
should not be modified or discon-  
nected. Unauthorized electrical test  
equipment and probing devices should  
not be used on the side air bag or cur-  
tain and rollover air bag systems.  
● Right after inflation, several side air bag  
and curtain and rollover air bag system  
components will be hot. Do not touch  
them; you may severely burn yourself.  
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a  
frontal collision but a pretensioner is  
not activated, be sure to have the pre-  
tensioner system checked and, if nec-  
essary, replaced by your NISSAN  
dealer.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the side air bag and curtain and rollover  
air bag systems. This is to prevent dam-  
age to or accidental inflation of the side  
air bag and curtain and rollover air bag  
systems.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-  
vent damage to or accidental activation  
of the pretensioners. Tampering with  
the pretensioner system may result in  
serious personal injury.  
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are  
yellow or orange for easy identification.  
● Do not make unauthorized changes to  
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-  
pension system or side panel. This  
could affect proper operation of the  
curtain and rollover air bag systems.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the side air bags and  
curtain and rollover air bag system and guide the  
buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s  
Manual.  
● Work around and on the pretensioner  
system should be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-  
ment should also be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test  
equipment and probing devices should  
not be used on the pretensioner system.  
1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-  
tem, the supplemental air bag warning  
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner  
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN  
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures  
could cause personal injury.  
light  
will not come on, will flash intermit-  
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on  
after the ignition switch has been placed in the  
ON or START position. In this case, the preten-  
sioner system may not function properly. They  
must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle  
to the nearest NISSAN dealer.  
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction  
with the front air bag system. The pretensioner  
system also activates with the curtain and rollover  
air bags in certain types of rollover collisions or  
near rollovers. Working with the seat belt retrac-  
tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle  
becomes involved in certain types of collisions,  
helping to restrain front seat occupants.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system  
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections  
in this Owner’s Manual.  
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt  
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way  
as conventional seat belts.  
WRS0885  
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels  
The warning labels are located on the sur-  
face of the sun visor.  
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-  
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This  
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.  
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may  
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history  
of a breathing condition should get fresh air  
promptly.  
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG  
WARNING LABELS  
Warning labels about the supplemental front-  
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as  
shown in the illustration.  
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow  
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to  
reduce forces against the chest.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or  
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-  
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then  
turns off. This means the system is operational.  
WARNING  
If the supplemental air bag warning light  
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,  
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag  
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-  
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury  
to yourself or others, have your vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible.  
If any of the following conditions occur, the front  
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag  
and pretensioner systems need servicing:  
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-  
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.  
Repair and replacement procedure  
The supplemental air bag warning light  
flashes intermittently.  
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and  
rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed  
to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,  
unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag  
warning light remains illuminated after inflation  
has occurred. Repair and replacement of these  
supplemental air bag systems should be done  
only by a NISSAN dealer.  
The supplemental air bag warning light does  
not come on at all.  
LRS0100  
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG  
WARNING LIGHT  
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air  
bag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner  
systems may not operate properly. They must be  
checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the  
nearest NISSAN dealer.  
The supplemental air bag warning light,  
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-  
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact  
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
and rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt  
pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits in-  
clude the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone  
sensor, satellite sensors, rollover sensor, occu-  
pant classification sensor, front air bag modules,  
side air bag modules, curtain and rollover air bag  
modules, pretensioners and all related wiring.  
When maintenance work is required on the ve-  
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain and  
rollover air bags, pretensioners and related parts  
should be pointed out to the person performing  
the maintenance. The ignition switch should al-  
ways be in the LOCK position when working  
under the hood or inside the vehicle.  
1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or  
curtain and rollover air bag has inflated,  
the air bag module will not function  
again and must be replaced. Addition-  
ally, if any of the front air bags inflate,  
the activated pretensioners must also  
be replaced. The air bag module and  
pretensioner should be replaced by a  
NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and  
pretensioner cannot be repaired.  
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain  
and rollover air bag systems and the  
pretensioner system should be in-  
spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is  
any damage to the front end or side  
portion of the vehicle.  
● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-  
tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the  
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-  
rect disposal procedures could cause  
personal injury.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Instruments and controls  
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Automatic transmission fluid temperature  
gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Zone variation change procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . .2-13  
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14  
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18  
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20  
Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21  
How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . .2-21  
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28  
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28  
Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . .2-30  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . .2-32  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . .2-36  
Front and rear sonar system off switch  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Sunglasses holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Map pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
2nd row center console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .2-46  
Cargo area storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47  
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47  
Roof rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Power vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Manual vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54  
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55  
Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56  
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57  
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57  
HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . .2-58  
Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58  
Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian  
customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59  
Operating the HomeLinkா universal  
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60  
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60  
Clearing the programmed information. . . . . . . . . . . .2-60  
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . .2-60  
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
1.  
2.  
Vents (P. 4-35)  
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn  
signal switch (P. 2-30)  
3.  
4.  
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-33)  
Steering wheel switch for audio  
control/hands-free Bluetoothா phone  
(if so equipped) (P. 4-73)  
Driver supplemental air bag/horn  
(P. 1-53, P. 2-34)  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Meters, gauges and warning/indicator  
lights (P. 2-4, 2-13)  
Cruise control main/set switches  
(P. 5-18)  
Windshield wiper/washer switch and  
rear window wiper/washer switch  
(P. 2-28, P. 2-29)  
9.  
Ignition switch (P. 5-9)  
10. Display screen/Display screen with  
navigation system* (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-2, P. 4-17)  
11. Navigation system* controls  
(if so equipped) (P. 4-17)  
12. Audio system controls (P. 4-39)  
13. Front passenger supplemental air bag  
(P. 1-53)  
14. Glove box (P. 2-41)  
15. Hazard lights (P. 2-34)  
WIC1378  
2-2 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual (if so equipped).  
16. Climate controls (P. 4-36)  
17. Power outlet (P. 2-38)  
18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-35)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
19. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF  
switch (P. 2-36)  
20. Tow mode switch (P. 2-38)  
21. Shift selector (P. 5-13)  
22. Heated steering wheel (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-35)  
23. Center stack storage (P. 2-40)  
24. Power outlet (P. 2-38)  
25. Front passenger air bag status light  
(P. 1-62)  
26. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-53)  
27. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)  
(P. 5-21)  
28. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-30)  
29. Rear or front and rear sonar system off  
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)  
30. Pedal position adjustment switch  
(P. 3-30)  
31. Power vent window (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-53)  
32. Lift gate open/close switch  
(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)  
Instruments and controls 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
METERS AND GAUGES  
WIC1243  
1. Warning/indicator lights  
2. Tachometer  
7. Automatic transmission fluid tempera-  
ture gauge  
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge  
4. Voltmeter  
8. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Vehicle  
Information Display  
5. Fuel gauge  
9. Engine oil pressure gauge  
6. Speedometer  
2-4 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1502  
WIC1245  
The twin trip odometer records the distance of  
individual trips.  
1. Speedometer  
2. Odometer/twin trip display  
3. Change button  
Changing the display:  
Pushing the change button changes the display  
as follows:  
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER  
Trip  
→ Trip  
→ Odometer only  
Speedometer  
Elapsed time , driving distance and average  
speed information is also available for vehicles  
with navigation system. Refer to “Control panel  
buttons”in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and  
voice recognition system.  
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.  
Odometer/Twin trip odometer  
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed  
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position.  
Elapsed time, driving distance and average  
speed information is also available for vehicles  
with navigation system (if so equipped). Refer to  
The odometer records the total distance the ve-  
hicle has been driven.  
Instruments and controls 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
“Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen,  
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-  
tion later in this manual.  
WIC1246  
LIC1135  
TACHOMETER  
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE  
GAUGE  
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-  
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine  
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-  
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the  
1
into the red zone  
.
᭺
1
normal range  
when the gauge needle points  
᭺
CAUTION  
within the zone shown in the illustration.  
When engine speed approaches the red  
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-  
gine speed. Operating the engine in the  
red zone may cause serious engine  
damage.  
The engine coolant temperature varies with the  
outside air temperature and driving conditions.  
2-6 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The  
indicates that the fuel-filler door is  
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.  
CAUTION  
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-  
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal  
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease  
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-  
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as  
safely possible. If the engine is over-  
heated, continued operation of the ve-  
hicle may seriously damage the engine.  
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In  
case of emergency”section for immediate  
action required.  
CAUTION  
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,  
the  
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as  
possible. After few driving trips,  
the light should turn off. If the  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
a
light remains on after a few driving  
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
LIC1199  
● For additional information, see “Mal-  
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in  
this section.  
FUEL GAUGE  
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level  
in the tank.  
The gauge may move slightly during braking,  
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.  
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.  
The low fuel warning light comes on when the  
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.  
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-  
ters E (Empty).  
Instruments and controls 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● This gauge is not designed to indicate  
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to  
check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in  
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section.)  
● If the gauge needle does not move with  
the proper amount of engine oil, have  
the vehicle checked by  
a
NISSAN  
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in  
such a condition could cause serious  
damage to the engine.  
LIC1198  
LIC1136  
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE  
VOLTMETER  
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-  
tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The  
needle should be in the middle of the gauge when  
the engine is running.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt-  
age. When the engine is running, it indicates the  
generator voltage.  
While cranking the engine, the volts drop below  
the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal  
1
range (11 – 15 volts)  
while the engine is  
᭺
running, it may indicate that the charging system  
is not functioning properly. Have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
2-8 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)  
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-  
dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.  
CAUTION  
● This gauge is not designed to indicate  
low automatic transmission fluid level.  
Use the dipstick to check the fluid level.  
(See “5-speed automatic transmission  
fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section.)  
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press  
the  
or  
button as described in the  
charts below to activate various features of the  
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.  
Type A  
● If the gauge indicates automatic trans-  
mission fluid temperature over the nor-  
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as  
safely possible. Have the vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin-  
ued operation of the vehicle may seri-  
ously damage the transmission.  
Push and hold  
Feature:  
(Push button again for about 1 sec-  
ond to change settings)  
the  
button for about:  
1 second  
Compass display toggles on/off  
Automatic anti-glare/indicator light  
toggles on/off  
8 seconds  
WIC1247  
Compass zone can be changed to  
correct false compass readings  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID  
TEMPERATURE GAUGE  
11 seconds  
13 seconds  
Compass enters calibration mode  
This gauge indicates the temperature of the au-  
tomatic transmission fluid. The automatic trans-  
mission fluid temperature is in the normal range  
Type B  
Push and hold  
Feature:  
1
when the gauge needle points within the zone  
᭺
(Push button again for about 1 sec-  
ond to change settings)  
the  
shown in the illustration.  
button for about:  
1 second  
Compass display toggles on/off  
Compass zone can be changed to  
correct false compass readings  
8 seconds  
10 seconds  
Compass enters calibration mode  
Instruments and controls 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information about the automatic anti-glare  
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview  
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-  
ments” section.  
WIC0904  
LIC0583  
Type A  
Type B  
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by  
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at  
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).  
COMPASS DISPLAY  
Push the  
or  
button for about 1 sec-  
ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position to toggle the outside temperature and  
You can also calibrate the compass by driving  
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-  
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three  
complete circles.  
1
compass direction display  
on or off. The dis-  
᭺
play will indicate the direction that the vehicle is  
heading.  
N: North  
E: East  
S: South  
W: West  
2-10 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ZONE VARIATION CHANGE  
PROCEDURE  
The difference between magnetic north and geo-  
graphical north is known as variance. In some  
areas, this difference can sometimes be great  
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow  
these instructions to set the variance for your  
particular location if this happens:  
1. Press and hold the  
button for about 5  
seconds. The current zone number will ap-  
pear in the display. Release the button.  
2. Find your current location on the zone map.  
Refer to the illustration.  
3. Press the  
button repeatedly to toggle  
through the zone numbers until the desired  
number appears in the display. Once you  
have selected a zone number, the display  
will show a compass direction within a few  
seconds.  
NOTE:  
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.  
Inaccurate compass direction  
The compass display is equipped with automatic  
correction function. If the correct direction is not  
shown, follow this procedure.  
WIC0355  
Instruments and controls 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. With the display turned on, press and hold  
the button for about 10 seconds. The  
CAUTION  
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,  
which are attached to the vehicle by  
means of a magnet. They affect the op-  
eration of the compass.  
“CAL” icon in the compass display will illu-  
minate.  
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle  
one and a half circles at a maximum speed of  
6 MPH (10 km/h).  
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper  
towel or similar material dampened  
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass  
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may  
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the  
mirror housing.  
3. After completing the circles, the display  
should return to normal.  
●
If the compass deviates from the correct  
indication soon after repeated adjustment,  
have the compass checked at an authorized  
NISSAN dealer.  
●
The compass may not indicate the correct  
compass point in tunnels or while driving up  
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns  
to the correct compass point when the ve-  
hicle moves to an area where the geomag-  
netism is stabilized.)  
●
If a magnet is located in or near the overhead  
console in the front of the vehicle or the  
vehicle is driven where the terrestrial mag-  
netism is disturbed, the compass display  
may not indicate the correct direction.  
2-12 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND  
AUDIBLE REMINDERS  
4WD warning light (  
model)  
High beam indicator light (Blue)  
or  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)  
warning light  
Automatic transmission check warning light  
Low fuel warning light  
Malfunction indicator light (MIL)  
Security indicator light  
Automatic transmission park warning light  
Low tire pressure warning light  
(
model)  
Master warning light  
Slip indicator light  
or  
Brake warning light  
Charge warning light  
Seat belt warning light and chime  
Supplemental air bag warning light  
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights  
Check suspension warning light (if so  
equipped)  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator  
light  
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant tem-  
perature high warning light  
Front passenger air bag status light  
The following lights come on briefly and then go  
off (if so equipped):  
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate  
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the  
electrical system. Have the system repaired  
promptly.  
CHECKING BULBS  
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake  
and place the ignition switch in the ON position  
without starting the engine. The following lights  
will come on (if so equipped):  
or  
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
or  
,
,
,
,
Instruments and controls 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING LIGHTS  
● The warning light may come on when  
the ignition switch is ON and the shift  
selector is placed in the P position  
while shifting the transfer case be-  
tween 4H and 4LO. Shift the 4WD shift  
switch to the 2WD, AUTO, 4H, or 4LO  
position again to turn off the ATP warn-  
ing light when the warning light comes  
on. Before shifting the 4WD switch into  
the 4LO position or out of 4LO in the 4H  
position, move the shift selector into  
the N position. Shift the shift selector  
into the P position and make sure that  
the 4WD shift indicator light is ON and  
the ATP warning light is OFF.  
Automatic transmission check  
warning light  
For additional information on warnings and indi-  
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in  
this section.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.  
If the light comes on at any other time, it may  
indicate the automatic transmission system is not  
functioning properly. Have the system checked  
by a NISSAN dealer.  
or  
Anti-lock Braking  
System (ABS)  
warning light  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)  
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This  
indicates the ABS is operational.  
Automatic transmission park  
warning light (  
model)  
WARNING  
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the  
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate  
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the  
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that  
the automatic transmission P (Park) po-  
sition will not function and the transfer  
case is in neutral.  
This light indicates that the automatic transmis-  
sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-  
fer control is not secured in any drive position  
while the shift selector is in the P (Park) position,  
the transmission will disengage and the drive  
wheels will not lock.  
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-  
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates  
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See  
ЉBrake systemЉ in the ЉStarting and drivingЉ sec-  
tion.  
● When parking, always make sure that  
the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates  
and the parking brake is set. Failure to  
engage the transfer position in 2WD,  
AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in the  
vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting  
in serious personal injury or property  
damage.  
or  
Brake warning light  
This light functions for both the parking brake and  
the foot brake systems.  
2-14 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parking brake indicator  
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-  
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid  
level may increase your stopping dis-  
tance and braking will require greater  
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.  
● Do not continue driving if the generator  
belt is loose, broken or missing.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light comes on when the parking  
brake is applied.  
Check suspension warning  
light (if so equipped)  
Low brake fluid warning light  
● If the brake fluid level is below the  
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake  
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the  
brake system has been checked at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
This light may indicate a malfunction in the auto-  
leveling suspension.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.  
If the light comes on while the engine is running  
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-  
hicle and perform the following:  
For additional information, refer to “Jacking up  
vehicle and removing the damaged tire” in the “In  
case of emergency” section of this manual.  
Charge warning light  
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid  
as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
Engine oil pressure low/  
Engine coolant temperature  
high warning light  
If this light comes on while the engine is running,  
it may indicate the charging system is not func-  
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check  
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,  
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN  
dealer immediately.  
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the  
warning system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
This light warns of low engine oil pressure or high  
engine coolant temperature.  
If the light flickers or comes on during normal  
driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the  
engine and allow it to cool. If the light remains on  
after checking the oil and coolant, stop the en-  
gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or  
other authorized repair shop.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
● Do not ground electrical accessories  
directly to the battery terminal. Doing  
so will bypass the variable control sys-  
tem and the vehicle battery may not  
charge completely. Refer to “Variable  
voltage control system” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section later  
in this manual.  
● Your brake system may not be working  
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-  
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it  
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest  
service station for repairs. Otherwise,  
have your vehicle towed because driv-  
ing it could be dangerous.  
This light is not designed to indicate a low  
oil or low coolant level. Check the oil level  
with the dipstick and check the coolant level on  
the reservoir. See “Engine oil” and “Checking  
engine coolant level” in the “Maintenance and  
Instruments and controls 2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Also see “If  
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-  
gency” section of this manual.  
If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,  
the warning light will either remain illuminated or  
blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting  
and driving” section.  
Low fuel warning light  
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel  
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-  
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E  
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel  
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle  
reaches E (Empty).  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
● Running the engine with the engine oil  
pressure warning light on could cause  
serious damage to the engine almost  
immediately. Such damage is not cov-  
ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as  
soon as it is safe to do so.  
● If the warning light comes on or blinks  
during operation, have your vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Low tire pressure warning light  
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads  
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD  
warning light turns on when you are  
driving on dry hard surface roads:  
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire  
pressure of all tires except the spare.  
● If the gauge indicates engine coolant  
temperature over the normal range,  
stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos-  
sible. If the engine is overheated, con-  
tinued operation of the vehicle may se-  
riously damage the engine. See “If your  
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of  
emergency” section for immediate ac-  
tion required.  
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low  
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not  
functioning properly.  
– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the  
4WD shift switch to 2WD.  
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,  
move the shift selector to the N posi-  
tion and shift the 4WD shift switch to  
2WD.  
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second  
and turns off.  
4WD warning light  
● If the warning light is still on after the  
above operation, have your vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Low tire pressure warning:  
(
model)  
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire  
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.  
If you select the tire pressure information  
in the display (if so equipped), the LOW  
PRESSURE warning message will be dis-  
played. The tire pressure for each tire will  
also be displayed.  
The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-  
tion switch is placed in the ON position. It turns  
off soon after the engine is started.  
2-16 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the  
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-  
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the  
Tire and Loading Information label located  
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire  
pressure warning light does not automati-  
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-  
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-  
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)  
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low  
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-  
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.  
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and  
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section in this  
manual.  
warning light OFF. If the light still  
comes on while driving after adjusting  
the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If  
you have a flat tire, replace it with a  
spare tire as soon as possible.  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, tire pressure will not be  
indicated, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
WARNING  
● If the light does not illuminate with the  
ignition switch in the ON position, have  
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer  
as soon as possible.  
●
If the light illuminates while driving,  
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or  
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,  
pull off the road to a safe location and  
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.  
Driving with under-inflated tires may per-  
manently damage the tires and increase  
the likelihood of tire failure. Serious ve-  
hicle damage could occur and may lead  
to an accident and could result in serious  
personal injury. Check the tire pressure  
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure  
to the recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label located in the driver’s door  
opening to turn the low tire pressure  
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and  
driving”section and in the “In case of emergency”  
section.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
TPMS malfunction:  
CAUTION  
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low  
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on  
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the  
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to  
check the tire pressure regularly.  
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds  
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the  
TPMS may not operate correctly.  
● Be sure to install the specified size of  
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.  
Instruments and controls 2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Master warning light  
Supplemental air bag warning  
light  
WARNING  
If the supplemental air bag warning light  
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,  
side air bag, curtain air bag systems  
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-  
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury  
to yourself or others, have your vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible.  
This light comes on when various vehicle infor-  
mation display warnings appear.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or  
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-  
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then  
turns off. This means the system is operational.  
Seat belt warning light and  
chime  
If any of the following conditions occur, the front  
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact air bag ,  
roof-mounted curtain and rollover air bag and  
pretensioner systems need servicing and your  
vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:  
The light and chime remind you to fasten your  
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START  
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s  
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime  
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s  
seat belt is securely fastened.  
INDICATOR LIGHTS  
For additional information on warnings and indi-  
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in  
this section.  
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-  
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.  
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if  
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened  
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For  
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in  
the ON position, the system does not activate the  
warning light for the front passenger.  
Front passenger air bag status  
light  
The supplemental air bag warning light  
flashes intermittently.  
The supplemental air bag warning light does  
not come on at all.  
The front passenger air bag status light (  
)
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be  
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat  
is being used.  
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental  
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-  
tensioners may not function properly. For addi-  
tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-  
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system” section of this  
manual.  
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat  
belts and supplemental restraint system” section  
for precautions on seat belt usage.  
For front passenger air bag status light operation,  
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in  
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental  
restraint system” section of this manual.  
2-18 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-  
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the  
“Technical and consumer information” section of  
this manual.  
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo  
being hauled or towed.  
High beam indicator light  
(blue)  
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking  
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected  
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have  
your vehicle towed to the dealer.  
This blue light comes on when the headlight high  
beams are on and goes out when the low beams  
are selected.  
Operation  
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in  
one of two ways:  
The high beam indicator light also comes on  
when the passing signal is activated.  
CAUTION  
●
Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An  
emission control system malfunction has  
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If  
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten  
or install the cap and continue to drive the  
Continued vehicle operation without hav-  
ing the emission control system checked  
and repaired as necessary could lead to  
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,  
and possible damage to the emission con-  
trol system.  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
(MIL)  
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks  
while the engine is running, it may indicate a  
potential emission control malfunction.  
vehicle. The  
light should turn off after  
a few driving trips. If the  
light does not  
Security indicator light  
turn off after a few driving trips, have the  
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You  
do not need to have your vehicle towed to  
the dealer.  
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come  
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,  
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make  
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed  
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons  
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.  
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in  
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function  
indicates the security system equipped on the  
vehicle is operational.  
●
Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An  
engine misfire has been detected which may  
damage the emission control system. To re-  
duce or avoid emission control system dam-  
age:  
For additional information, see “Security sys-  
tems” later in this section.  
After a few driving trips, the  
light should  
turn off if no other potential emission control  
system malfunction exists.  
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH  
(72 km/h).  
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20  
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when  
the engine is not running, it indicates that the  
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-  
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.  
– avoid steep uphill grades.  
Instruments and controls 2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
system is not functioning properly. This indicates  
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper-  
ating.  
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as  
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.  
Slip indicator light  
Key reminder chime  
This indicator light will blink when the traction  
control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery  
road conditions may exist if the slip indicator  
blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving  
accordingly.  
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch  
again or restart the engine and the system will  
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control  
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened  
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove  
the key and take it with you when leaving the  
vehicle.  
The slip indicator light also comes on when you  
place the ignition switch in the ON position. The  
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the  
system is operational. If the light does not come  
on or does not go off, have the traction control  
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
Light reminder chime  
The Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF light also  
comes on when you place the ignition switch in  
the ON position. The light will turn off after about  
2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light  
stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-  
tor light while you are driving, have the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-  
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is  
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.  
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-  
ing the vehicle.  
Turn signal/hazard indicator  
lights  
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear  
the system working when starting the vehicle or  
accelerating, but this is normal.  
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal  
switch is activated.  
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned  
on.  
AUDIBLE REMINDERS  
Brake pad wear warning  
Vehicle Dynamic Control  
(VDC) OFF indicator light  
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.  
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it  
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the  
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake  
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, the  
transfer case is in the 4LO position (  
model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control  
2-20 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY  
The icons at the bottom of the display screen  
show the options available:  
ENTER — Press the INFO button to select  
a highlighted option.  
NEXT — Rotate the INFO button to high-  
light an option.  
WIC1248  
WIC1249  
1
The vehicle information display  
is located to  
᭺
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE  
INFORMATION DISPLAY  
the left of the speedometer. It displays such items  
as:  
Press the vehicle information display INFO but-  
●
●
●
automatic transmission position indicator  
cruise control system information  
1
ton  
located on the instrument panel to toggle  
᭺
through the following modes.  
MPG → Range → Warning  
Intelligent Key operation information (if so  
equipped)  
2
Rotate the INFO button  
᭺
to highlight the de-  
sired menu option within the selected mode.  
●
●
some indicators and warnings  
other information  
1
Press the INFO button  
lighted menu.  
to enter the high-  
᭺
For details about the Intelligent Key, see  
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving  
checks and adjustments” section.  
Instruments and controls 2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1166  
Warning mode  
The warning mode can be selected to view any  
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is  
selected you have the option of skipping the  
warning or viewing it in detail.  
Warnings can be present for issues such as an  
open door or low fuel. For more information about  
potential warnings see “Vehicle Information Dis-  
play indicator lights and warnings” later in this  
section.  
2-22 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WIC1185  
3. Low fuel warning  
7. Shift P warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™  
model)  
Vehicle information display warnings  
and indicators  
4. Low windshield washer fluid warning  
8. Cruise main switch indicator  
9. Cruise set switch indicator  
1. Door and liftgate open warning  
5. No key warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™  
model)  
2. Lock warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™  
model)  
6. Parking brake warning  
Instruments and controls 2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge  
indicator (NISSAN Intelligent Key™ model)  
Low windshield washer fluid warning  
Parking brake warning  
This warning illuminates when the windshield  
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield  
washer fluid as necessary. See “Window washer  
fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section of this manual.  
This warning illuminates when the parking brake  
is set and the vehicle is driven.  
11. Transfer 4LO position indicator (  
model)  
SHIFT P warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™  
model)  
12. 4WD shift indicator (  
model)  
13. Shift selector position indicator  
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch  
is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift  
selector is in any position other than (Park) posi-  
tion. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition  
switch is in the OFF position.  
No key warning (Intelligent Key model)  
Door and liftgate open warning  
This warning illuminates following two conditions:  
This warning illuminates when a door, the liftgate  
or the liftgate glass has been opened when the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.  
1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the  
Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the  
system. If this warning illuminates, you can-  
not start the engine.  
If this warning illuminates, move the shift selector  
to the P (Park) position or start the engine.  
Lock warning (Intelligent Key model)  
This warning illuminates and a chime sounds if  
the ignition switch has been in the ACC or ON  
position and then placed in the OFF position.  
Check for the following causes and perform  
the assigned remedies:  
If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)  
position, the lock warning will appear. Refer to  
“Lock warning” in this section.  
– The battery of the Intelligent Key carried  
with you is discharged completely. Re-  
place the battery with a new one.  
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position  
and the warning and chime will turn off.  
For additional information about Intelligent Key,  
see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™”in the “Pre-driving  
checks and adjustments” section.  
Refer to “Shift P warning” in this section for  
additional information.  
– The Intelligent Key carried with you is not  
registered to the system. Use the regis-  
tered Intelligent Key.  
Cruise main switch indicator  
Low fuel warning  
This indicator illuminates when the cruise control  
main switch is pushed. The indicator turns off  
when the main switch is pushed again. When the  
cruise main switch indicator illuminates, the  
cruise control system is operational.  
– You do not have an Intelligent Key with  
you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.  
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the  
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is  
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge  
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-  
serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel  
gauge needle reaches E (Empty).  
2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent  
Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition  
switch is in the ACC or ON position. A  
chime will also sound.  
2-24 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECURITY SYSTEMS  
Cruise set switch indicator light  
The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the  
switch while driving.  
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is  
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light  
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate  
the cruise control system is not functioning prop-  
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch  
between 4H and 4LO unless you have first  
stopped the vehicle and moved the shift selector  
to N (Neutral). Make sure the transfer 4LO posi-  
tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WD  
shift switch to 4LO.  
Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator  
(NISSAN Intelligent Key™ model)  
The indicator may blink while shifting from  
one drive mode to the other.  
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key  
battery is running out of power.  
4WD shift indicator (  
model)  
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-  
cator will illuminate the position selected by the  
4WD shift switch.  
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery  
with a new one. See “Battery replacement” in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.  
LIC0559  
Your vehicle has two types of security systems:  
The 4WD shift indicator may blink while  
shifting from one drive mode to the other.  
●
●
Vehicle security system  
Transfer 4LO position indicator (  
model)  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System  
Automatic transmission position indicator  
This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shift  
switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition  
switch placed in the ON position.  
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this indicator shows the selector posi-  
tion. See “Driving the vehicle”in the “Starting and  
driving” section of this manual.  
The vehicle security system provides visual and  
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors  
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a  
motion detection type system that activates when  
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.  
If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position  
and the indicator blinks, stop the vehicle, drive  
slowly forward and the indicator will turn on.  
When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the  
vehicle, move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)  
position, then depress and turn the 4WD shift  
switch to 4LO or 4H.  
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot  
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or  
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-  
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a  
Instruments and controls 2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,  
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be  
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,  
well-lit areas whenever possible.  
Keyfob and NISSAN Intelligent Key™ opera-  
tion:  
●
If the key is turned slowly when locking  
the driver’s door, the system may not  
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned  
beyond the vertical position toward the  
unlock position to remove the key, the  
system may be disarmed when the key  
is removed. If the indicator light fails to  
glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door  
once and lock it again.  
● Push the  
button. All doors lock.  
The hazard lights flash twice and the horn  
beeps once to indicate all doors are  
locked.  
Many devices offering additional protection, such  
as component locks, identification markers, and  
tracking systems, are available at auto supply  
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer  
may also offer such equipment. Check with your  
insurance company to see if you may be eligible  
for discounts for various theft protection features.  
● When the  
button is pushed with  
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash  
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-  
minder that the doors are already locked.  
●
Even when the driver and/or passen-  
gers are in the vehicle, the system will  
arm with all doors closed and locked  
with the ignition switch placed in the  
OFF position.  
The horn may or may not beep. Refer to  
“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the Pre-  
driving checks and adjustments” section or  
“Comfort & Convenience settings” in the  
“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice  
recognition systems” section.  
How to arm the vehicle security  
system  
Vehicle security system activation  
1. Close all windows. (The system can be  
armed even if the windows are open.)  
The vehicle security system will give the following  
alarm:  
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion and remove the key.  
4. Confirm that the  
on. The  
indicator light comes  
light stays on for about 30  
●
The headlights blink and the horn sounds  
intermittently.  
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors  
can be locked with:  
seconds. The vehicle security system is now  
pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-  
hicle security system automatically shifts  
●
The alarm automatically turns off after ap-  
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm  
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with  
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking  
the driver’s door with the key, a request  
● the power door lock switch (if the door is  
opened, locked and then closed).  
into the armed phase. The  
light begins  
● the key — master or mechanical (NISSAN  
Intelligent Key™ models).  
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the  
30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s  
door is unlocked by the key, a request  
switch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if the  
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON  
position, the system will not arm.  
switch or by pressing the  
the keyfob or Intelligent Key.  
button on  
● any request switch (NISSAN Intelligent  
Key™ models).  
● the keyfob or NISSAN Intelligent Key™.  
2-26 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The alarm is activated by:  
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or  
LOCK position and wait approximately 10  
seconds.  
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-  
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-  
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD  
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-  
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.  
●
opening a door without using the key, a  
request switch, keyfob or Intelligent Key  
(even if the door is unlocked by using the  
inside lock knob or the power door lock  
switch).  
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.  
4. Restart the engine while holding the device  
(which may have caused the interference)  
separate from the registered key.  
How to stop an activated alarm  
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-  
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-  
rate key ring to avoid interference from other  
devices.  
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s  
door with the key, pressing the  
the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all  
doors with any request switch (Intelligent Key  
models).  
button on  
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC  
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-  
tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT  
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)  
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER  
SYSTEM  
This device complies with part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-  
ing two conditions;  
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not  
allow the engine to start without the use of a  
registered key.  
If the engine fails to start using a registered key  
(for example, when interference is caused by  
another registered key, an automated toll road  
device or automatic payment device on the key  
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-  
cedures:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-  
terference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including inter-  
ference that may cause undesired opera-  
tion of the device.  
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON  
position for approximately 5 seconds.  
Instruments and controls 2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER  
SWITCH  
NOTE:  
You can turn on or turn off the driving  
speed dependent intermittent wiper func-  
tion. Refer to “Comfort & convenience set-  
tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,  
phone and voice recognition systems” sec-  
tion later in this manual.  
2
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation  
᭺
3
High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-  
tion  
᭺
4
Push the lever up  
to have one sweep opera-  
᭺
tion (MIST) of the wiper.  
LIC0474  
LIC0965  
5
Pull the lever toward you  
to operate the  
᭺
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.  
Security indicator light  
SWITCH OPERATION  
The security indicator light blinks whenever the  
ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC  
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-  
hicle Immobilizer System is operational.  
The windshield wiper and washer operates when  
the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
WARNING  
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-  
tion may freeze on the windshield and  
obscure your vision which may lead to an  
accident. Warm the windshield with the  
defroster before you wash the windshield.  
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the  
following speed:  
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-  
functioning, the light will remain on while the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.  
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation  
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward  
᭺
A
B
(Slower) or  
(Faster). Also, the inter-  
᭺
᭺
If the light still remains on and/or the en-  
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-  
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all  
registered keys that you have when visiting  
your NISSAN dealer for service.  
mittent operation speed varies in accor-  
dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,  
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-  
tent operation speed will be faster.)  
2-28 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND  
WASHER SWITCH  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
● Do not operate the washer continu-  
ously for more than 30 seconds.  
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-  
tion may freeze on the window and ob-  
scure your vision. Warm the rear window  
with the defroster before you wash the  
rear window.  
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-  
voir tank is empty.  
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir  
tank with washer fluid concentrates at  
full strength. Some methyl alcohol  
based washer fluid concentrates may  
permanently stain the grille if spilled  
while filling the window washer reser-  
voir tank.  
CAUTION  
● Do not operate the washer continu-  
ously for more than 30 seconds.  
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-  
voir tank is empty.  
LIC0966  
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with  
water to the manufacturer’s recom-  
mended levels before pouring the fluid  
into the window washer reservoir tank.  
Do not use the window washer reservoir  
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-  
trate and water.  
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir  
tank with washer fluid concentrates at  
full strength. Some methyl alcohol  
based washer fluid concentrates may  
permanently stain the grille if spilled  
while filling the window washer reser-  
voir tank.  
The rear window wiper and washer operate when  
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.  
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position  
to operate the wiper.  
1
Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation  
᭺
(not adjustable)  
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with  
water to the manufacturer’s recom-  
mended levels before pouring the fluid  
into the window washer reservoir tank.  
Do not use the window washer reservoir  
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-  
trate and water.  
2
ON – continuous low speed operation  
᭺
3
Push the switch forward  
to operate the  
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.  
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE  
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH  
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL  
SWITCH  
WIC1250  
WIC1186  
LIC1173  
Type B  
Type A  
To defrost the rear window glass and outside  
mirrors:  
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH  
CAUTION  
Start the engine and push the rear window de-  
froster switch. The rear window defroster indica-  
tor light on the display screen comes on. Push the  
switch again to turn the defroster off.  
Use the headlights with the engine run-  
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle  
battery.  
Lighting  
1
When turning the switch to the  
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and  
instrument panel lights come on.  
posi-  
᭺
The rear window defroster automatically turns off  
after approximately 15 minutes.  
2
When turning the switch to the  
tion, the headlights come on and all the other  
lights remain on.  
posi-  
᭺
CAUTION  
When cleaning the inner side of the rear  
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-  
age the rear window defroster.  
2-30 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
Autolight activation sensitivity and the  
time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-  
justed. See “Comfort & convenience set-  
tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,  
phone and voice recognition systems؆sec-  
tion later in this manual.  
To turn on the autolight system:  
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-  
1
tion  
.
᭺
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.  
3. The autolight system automatically turns the  
headlights on and off.  
WIC1251  
LIC0836  
Be sure you do not put anything on top of  
1
Autolight system  
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a  
door is opened and left open, the headlights  
remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is  
opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute  
timer is reset.  
the autolight sensor  
located in the top  
᭺
The autolight system allows the headlights to be  
set so they turn on and off automatically. The  
autolight system can:  
side of the instrument panel. The autolight  
sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-  
ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is  
dark out and the headlights will illuminate.  
If this occurs while parked with the engine  
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON  
position, your vehicle’s battery could be-  
come discharged.  
●
Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,  
license plate and instrument panel lights au-  
tomatically when it is dark.  
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to  
the OFF,  
, or  
position.  
●
●
Turn off all the lights when it is light.  
Keep all the lights on for up to 180 seconds  
after you place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position and all doors are closed.  
Instruments and controls 2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After the headlights automatically turn off with the  
headlight switch in the or position,  
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch  
is placed in the OFF position.  
the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if  
the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position  
WARNING  
When the daytime running light system is  
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not  
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your  
headlights. Failure to do so could cause  
an accident injuring yourself and others.  
and then turned to the  
or  
position.  
CAUTION  
Even though the battery saver feature au-  
tomatically turns off the headlights after a  
period of time, you should turn the head-  
light switch to the OFF position when the  
engine is not running to avoid discharging  
the vehicle battery.  
WIC1252  
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM  
(Canada only)  
Headlight beam select  
1
To select the high beam function, push the  
lever forward. The high beam lights come on  
᭺
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-  
duced intensity when the engine is started with  
the parking brake released. The daytime running  
lights operate with the headlight switch in the  
and the  
light illuminates.  
2
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.  
᭺
OFF position or in the  
headlight switch to the  
position. Turn the  
position for full  
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the  
headlight high beams on and off.  
᭺
illumination when driving at night.  
Battery saver system  
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is  
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-  
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when  
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-  
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position  
while the headlight switch is in the  
or  
position, the headlights will turn off after  
5 minutes.  
2-32 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1506  
WIC1253  
WIC1254  
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)  
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch  
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS  
CONTROL  
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH  
Turn signal  
The instrument brightness control operates when  
to the  
switch to the  
position, then turn the fog light  
position.  
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the  
turning direction. When the turn is com-  
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.  
᭺
the  
headlight  
control  
switch  
is  
in  
the  
,
or AUTO position (with auto-  
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch  
in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on,  
lights activated).  
Lane change signal  
Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-  
ment panel lights when driving at night.  
then turn the fog light switch to the  
position.  
2
To signal a lane change, move the lever up or  
down to the point where the indicator light  
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.  
᭺
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch  
to the OFF position.  
The headlights must be on and the low beams  
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog  
lights automatically turn off when the high beam  
headlights are selected.  
Instruments and controls 2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER  
SWITCH  
HORN  
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch  
placed in any position.  
Some state laws may prohibit the use of  
the hazard warning flasher switch while  
driving.  
LIC0394  
LIC0604  
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when  
you must stop or park under emergency condi-  
tions. All turn signal lights flash.  
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of  
the steering wheel.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so  
could affect proper operation of the  
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-  
pering with the supplemental front air bag  
system may result in serious personal  
injury.  
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to  
move the vehicle well off the road.  
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers  
while moving on the highway unless  
unusual circumstances force you to  
drive so slowly that your vehicle might  
become a hazard to other traffic.  
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-  
ard warning flasher lights are on.  
2-34 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)  
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so  
equipped)  
CAUTION  
● Do not use the seat heater for extended  
periods or when no one is using the  
seat.  
● Do not put anything on the seat which  
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-  
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat  
may become overheated.  
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on  
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar  
object. This may result in damage to the  
heater.  
WIC1441  
LIC0421  
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat  
should be removed immediately with a  
dry cloth.  
The heated steering wheel system is designed to  
operate only when the surface temperature of the  
steering wheel is below approximately 68°F  
(20°C).  
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if  
so equipped).  
● When cleaning the seat, never use  
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-  
lar materials.  
1. Start the engine.  
The heated steering wheel switch is located on  
the front of the center console box.  
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as  
desired, depending on the temperature. The  
indicator light in the switch will illuminate.  
● If any abnormalities are found or the  
heated seat does not operate, turn the  
switch off and have the system checked  
by your NISSAN dealer.  
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm  
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The  
indicator light will come on.  
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,  
automatically turning the heater on and off.  
The indicator light will remain on as long as  
the switch is on.  
● The battery could run down if the seat  
heater is operated while the engine is  
not running.  
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is  
below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the  
steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C),  
then turn off automatically.  
3. When the seat is warmed or before you  
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch  
off.  
Instruments and controls 2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)  
OFF SWITCH  
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH  
(if so equipped)  
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering  
wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.  
NOTE:  
The heated steering wheel switch is  
equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the  
switch has been activate for 30 minutes,  
the system will automatically turn off.If the  
surface temperature of the steering wheel  
is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is  
turned on, the system will not heat the  
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.  
WIC0534  
LIC0471  
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-  
ing conditions.  
WARNING  
The rear sonar system is a convenience  
but it is not a substitute for proper back-  
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to  
do so before backing up. Always back up  
slowly.  
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC  
system reduces the engine output to reduce  
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced  
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If  
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck  
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.  
The rear sonar system is active when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position and the shift  
selector is in R (Reverse).  
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF  
When sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8  
m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.  
switch. The  
indicator will come on.  
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine  
to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control  
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.  
2-36 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM  
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)  
The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-  
ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,  
the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.  
The front sonar system:  
●
is active when the ignition is in the ON  
position and the shift selector is in a forward  
gear position.  
The system will automatically reset the next time  
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.  
●
a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors  
detect obstacles within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the  
front bumper.  
See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting and  
driving” section.  
The rear sonar system:  
●
is active when the ignition is in the ON  
position and the shift selector is in R (Re-  
verse).  
●
a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors  
detect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8 m) of the  
rear bumper.  
LIC1182  
WARNING  
The front and rear sonar system can be disabled  
by pushing the OFF switch. When the system is  
disabled, the indicator light on the switch will  
illuminate. Push the switch again to enable the  
system. The indicator light will go off.  
● The front sonar system is a convenience  
but it is not a substitute for proper  
driving.  
● The rear sonar system is a convenience  
but it is not a substitute for proper back-  
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe  
to do so before backing up. Always  
back up slowly.  
The system will automatically reset the next time  
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.  
See “Front sonar system” in the “Starting and  
driving” section.  
Instruments and controls 2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOW MODE SWITCH  
POWER OUTLET  
For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” in  
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-  
tion later in this manual.  
LIC1193  
LIC0594  
Front row  
Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy  
trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle  
in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light  
trailer/light load will not cause any damage. How-  
ever, fuel economy may be reduced, and the  
transmission/engine driving characteristics may  
feel unusual.  
The power outlets are for powering electrical  
accessories such as cellular telephones.  
The power outlets located on the driver’s side of  
the instrument panel and in the luggage area are  
powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.  
The power outlets located on the passenger’s  
side of the instrument panel and in the 2nd row  
are powered only when the ignition switch is in  
the ACC or ON position.  
Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode.  
The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi-  
nates when tow mode is selected. Press the tow  
mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.  
Open the cap to use a power outlet.  
Tow mode is automatically canceled when the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.  
2-38 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If  
good contact is not made, the plug may  
overheat or the internal temperature  
fuse may open.  
● When not in use, be sure to close the  
cap. Do not allow water to contact the  
outlet.  
LIC0550  
LIC0551  
2nd row  
Luggage area  
● Use power outlets with the engine run-  
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle  
battery.  
CAUTION  
● The outlet and plug may be hot during  
or immediately after use.  
● Avoid using power outlets when the air  
conditioner, headlights or rear window  
defroster is on.  
● Only certain power outlets are designed  
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do  
not use any other power outlet for an  
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN  
dealer for additional information.  
● Before inserting or disconnecting a  
plug, be sure the electrical accessory  
being used is turned OFF.  
● Do not use with accessories that ex-  
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.  
Do not use double adapters or more  
than one electrical accessory.  
Instruments and controls 2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STORAGE  
LIC1183  
LIC1369  
LIC1370  
Center stack storage  
CONSOLE BOX  
Console box storage  
INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE  
TRAYS  
1
Pull up on the lever  
2
.
to open the console box lid  
᭺
Console box storage trays  
᭺
WARNING  
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to  
help prevent injury in an accident or sud-  
den stop.  
2-40 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1371  
LIC1176  
WIC0673  
Console box lock  
GLOVE BOX  
SUNGLASSES HOLDER  
1
2
Use the master key to lock  
console box.  
or unlock  
the  
᭺
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the  
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.  
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.  
᭺
1
2
master key when locking  
glove box.  
or unlocking  
the  
᭺
᭺
WARNING  
WARNING  
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while  
driving to prevent an accident.  
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to  
help prevent injury in an accident or a  
sudden stop.  
Instruments and controls 2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● Do not use for anything other than  
sunglasses.  
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-  
glasses holder while parking in direct  
sunlight. The heat may damage the  
sunglasses.  
LIC1195  
LIC0575  
MAP POCKETS  
SEATBACK POCKET  
The seatback pocket is located on the back of the  
driver seat. The pocket can be used to store  
maps.  
2-42 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC0568  
LIC0569  
LIC0570  
Small bin  
Medium bin (if so equipped)  
Large bin  
OVERHEAD CONSOLE  
Storage bins  
WARNING  
Keep storage bins closed while driving to  
help prevent injury in an accident or a  
sudden stop.  
Push the button to open a storage bin.  
Push the lid up to close.  
Instruments and controls 2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1507  
LIC1373  
LIC0554  
Adjustable  
2nd row (rear of front console)  
Front  
Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder so  
that the cup is held securely.  
To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front  
console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.  
CUP HOLDERS  
CAUTION  
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when  
the cup holder is being used to prevent  
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it  
can scald you or your passenger.  
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.  
Hard objects can injure you in an  
accident.  
2-44 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC0555  
LIC0556  
LIC0557  
2nd row center console (if so equipped)  
2nd row bench (if so equipped)  
3rd row  
Instruments and controls 2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WIC1197  
LIC0576  
LIC0577  
Bottle holder  
CAUTION  
2ND ROW CENTER CONSOLE (if so Removing the 2nd row center console  
equipped)  
box  
● Do not use bottle holder for any other  
objects that could be thrown about in  
the vehicle and possibly injure people  
during sudden braking or an accident.  
Pull up on the lever to open the console box lid.  
To remove the 2nd row center console box:  
1
Lift out the cup holder tray.  
᭺
2
Pull up on the handle to tilt the console box  
up.  
᭺
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid  
containers.  
3
Move the console box toward the front of the  
vehicle and lift it out.  
᭺
2-46 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To reinstall the 2nd row center console box:  
1. Slide the console box over the base toward  
the rear of the vehicle.  
2. Push down to lock the console box in place.  
3. Replace the cup holder tray.  
LIC0571  
LIC0572  
1
To access the floor storage area, push down  
to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle  
to lift the luggage board.  
CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN  
᭺
2
᭺
To open the cargo area storage bin, pull down on  
the tab and pull the lid off.  
LUGGAGE HOOKS  
The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo  
with ropes or other types of straps.  
Instruments and controls 2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or  
straps to help prevent it from sliding or  
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than  
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-  
lision, unsecured cargo could cause  
personal injury.  
● Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure  
cargo.  
● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-  
gage area. It is extremely dangerous to  
ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.  
In a collision, people riding in these  
areas are more likely to be seriously  
injured or killed.  
LTI0089  
LTI0090  
Side finisher  
Floor hooks  
When hooking on ropes, do not apply a load of  
Do not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)  
to a single hook.  
●
Do not allow people to ride in any area  
of your vehicle that is not equipped with  
seats and seat belts.  
A
more than 55 lb (245 N) to a single  
hook or 44  
᭺
B
lb (196 N) to a single  
hook.  
᭺
● The child restraint top tether strap may  
be damaged by contact with items in  
the cargo area. Secure any items in the  
cargo area. Your child could be seri-  
ously injured or killed in a collision if  
the top tether strap is damaged.  
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a  
seat and using a seat belt properly.  
2-48 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is  
loaded at or near the cargo carrying  
capacity, especially if the significant  
portion of that load is carried on the  
roof rack.  
● Heavy loading of the roof rack has the  
potential to affect the vehicle stability  
and handling during sudden or abnor-  
mal handling maneuvers.  
● Roof rack load should be evenly  
distributed.  
● Do not exceed maximum roof rack load  
weight capacity.  
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or  
straps to help prevent it from sliding or  
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,  
unsecured cargo could cause personal  
injury.  
CAUTION  
LIC1177  
Use care when placing or removing items  
from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-  
ably lift the items onto the roof rack from  
the ground, use a ladder or stool.  
ROOF RACK  
Instruments and controls 2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDOWS  
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof  
rack. Do not load more than 200 lbs (91 kg) on  
entire roof rack. Be sure load is evenly distributed  
across both crossbars. Be careful that your ve-  
hicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating  
(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR  
are located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located on  
the driver’s door pillar). For more information  
regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle  
loading information” in the “Technical and con-  
sumer information” section later in this manual.  
POWER WINDOWS  
WARNING  
● Make sure that all passengers have  
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while  
it is in motion and before closing the  
windows. Use the window lock switch  
to prevent unexpected use of the power  
windows.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls and become  
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-  
dren could become involved in serious  
accidents.  
LIC1200  
The crossbars can be adjusted forward and  
1
backward. Loosen the thumbwheel  
and ad-  
᭺
The power windows operate when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about  
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in  
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s  
door is opened during this period of about 45  
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.  
just the crossbar to the desired position. Tighten  
the thumbwheel. Place your luggage on the bars  
and secure the luggage with rope to the utility  
2
loops . Do not place luggage on the side rails  
᭺
or tie rope directly to the side rails. Always be  
sure the thumbwheels are fully tightened to keep  
the crossbar in place. Do not use utility loops for  
any purpose other than securing luggage.  
2-50 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver’s side power window switch  
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with  
switches to open or close the front and rear  
passenger windows.  
To open a window, push the switch and hold it  
down. To close a window, pull the switch and  
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function  
at any time, simply release the switch.  
LIC1181  
WIC1237  
1. Window lock button  
2. Power door lock switch  
3. Front passenger side automatic switch  
4. Right rear passenger window switch  
5. Left rear passenger window switch  
6. Driver side automatic switch  
Front passenger’s power window  
switch  
The passenger’s window switch operates only  
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open  
1
the window, push the switch and hold it down  
.
᭺
2
To close the window, pull the switch up  
.
᭺
Locking passengers’ windows  
When the window lock button is depressed, only  
the driver’s side window can be opened or  
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock  
function.  
Instruments and controls 2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto-reverse function  
The auto-reverse function can be activated when  
a window is closed by automatic operation.  
Depending on the environment or driving  
conditions, the auto-reverse function may  
be activated if an impact or load similar to  
something being caught in the window oc-  
curs.  
WARNING  
There are some small distances immedi-  
ately before the closed position which  
cannot be detected. Make sure that all  
passengers have their hands, etc., inside  
the vehicle before closing the window.  
WIC1255  
LIC0410  
Rear power window switch  
Automatic operation  
The rear power window switches open or close  
only the corresponding windows. To open the  
To fully open a window equipped with automatic  
operation, press the window switch down (only  
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and  
release it; it need not be held. The window auto-  
matically opens all the way. To stop the window,  
lift the switch up while the window is opening.  
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,  
or jump started, the power window auto-reverse  
function may not operate properly. If this occurs,  
please contact the dealer to re-initialize the  
power window auto-reverse system.  
1
window, push the switch and hold it down . To  
᭺
2
close the window, pull the switch up  
.
᭺
If the control unit detects something caught in a  
window equipped with automatic operation as it  
is closing, the window will be immediately low-  
ered.  
To fully close a window equipped with automatic  
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent  
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the  
window, press the switch down while the window  
is closing.  
2-52 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The power vent windows operate when the igni-  
tion switch is placed in the ON position, or for  
about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or  
passenger’s door is opened during this 45 sec-  
ond period, power to the vent windows is can-  
celled.  
LIC1417  
LIC0524  
POWER VENT WINDOWS (if so  
equipped)  
MANUAL VENT WINDOWS (if so  
equipped)  
Use the vent window switch located on the driv-  
er’s side of the instrument panel to open and  
close the power vent windows. The windows  
cannot be operated separately.  
To open a manual vent window, pull the latch  
handle toward you until it releases.  
To lock the window in the open position, push the  
latch handle rearward until it locks.  
To open the power vent windows press and hold  
the switch.  
To close a manual vent window, pull the latch  
handle toward you and push the rear portion of  
the latch toward the rear of the vehicle until it  
locks.  
To close the windows pull up and hold the switch.  
Instruments and controls 2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MOONROOF (if so equipped)  
To fully close the moonroof, push the switch  
Auto reverse function (when closing or  
tilting down the moonroof)  
4
toward the close position  
.
᭺
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the  
The auto reverse function can be activated when  
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-  
matic operation when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-  
onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position.  
5
switch in any direction  
sliding open or closed to stop it in the desired  
position.  
while the moonroof is  
᭺
Tilting the moonroof  
To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to-  
Depending on the environment or driving  
conditions, the auto reverse function may  
be activated if an impact or load similar to  
something being caught in the moonroof  
occurs.  
1
ward the up position  
open, it will automatically close and then tilt up.  
. When the moonroof is  
᭺
To tilt the moonroof down, push the tilt switch  
2
toward the down position  
.
᭺
WIC0812  
WARNING  
Restarting the moonroof sliding switch  
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF  
There are some small distances immedi-  
ately before the closed position which  
cannot be detected. Make sure that all  
passengers have their hands, etc., inside  
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.  
The sliding switch will become inoperable after  
the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-  
cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality  
detected. Use the following reset procedure to  
return moonroof operation to normal.  
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-  
matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec-  
onds, even if the ignition switch is placed in the  
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the  
front passenger’s door is opened during this  
period of about 45 seconds, power to the moon-  
roof is canceled.  
When closing:  
1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tilting  
switch repeatedly toward the down position  
If the control unit detects something caught in the  
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof  
will immediately open backward.  
2
to fully close the lid.  
᭺
Sliding the moonroof  
2. Push and hold the tilting switch for more  
than 2 seconds toward the down position  
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to-  
2
to reestablish the lid’s home position.  
3
᭺
ward the open position  
.
᭺
The moonroof should now operate normally.  
2-54 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INTERIOR LIGHT  
When tilting down:  
Sunshade  
If the control unit detects something caught in the  
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-  
mediately tilt up.  
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-  
ward or backward.  
If the moonroof does not close  
If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-  
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep  
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds  
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close  
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the  
moonroof.  
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the  
moonroof.  
WARNING  
● In an accident you could be thrown from  
the vehicle through an open moonroof.  
Always use seat belts and child  
restraints.  
LIC0585  
The interior light has a three-position switch and  
operates regardless of ignition switch position.  
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or  
extend any portion of their body out of  
the moonroof opening while the vehicle  
is in motion or while the moonroof is  
closing.  
1
When the switch is in the ON position  
, the  
᭺
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-  
tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes  
unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
CAUTION  
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand  
from the moonroof before opening.  
● Do not place heavy objects on the  
moonroof or surrounding area.  
Instruments and controls 2-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
When the switch is in the DOOR position , the  
᭺
NOTE:  
interior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped)  
will stay on for about 30 seconds when:  
The footwell lights (if so equipped) and  
door step lights illuminate when the driver  
and passenger doors are open regardless  
of the interior light switch position. These  
lights will turn off automatically after about  
30 minutes while doors are open to prevent  
the battery from becoming discharged.  
●
The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key  
or the power door lock switch while all doors  
are closed and the ignition switch is in the  
OFF position.  
●
●
The driver’s door is opened and then closed  
while the key is removed from the ignition  
switch.  
CAUTION  
Do not use for extended periods of time  
with the engine stopped. This could result  
in a discharged battery.  
The key is removed from the ignition switch  
while all doors are closed.  
LIC0587  
The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is  
activated when:  
CONSOLE LIGHT  
1
The console light  
᭺
will turn on whenever the  
parking lights or headlights are illuminated.  
●
The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a  
key, or the power door lock switch.  
The console light brightness can be adjusted  
with the illumination brightness control.  
●
The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-  
sition.  
3
When the switch is in the OFF position  
, the  
᭺
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door  
position. The puddle lights (if so equipped) come  
on when any front or rear passenger door is  
opened.  
The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-  
utes while doors are open to prevent the battery  
from becoming discharged.  
2-56 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PERSONAL LIGHTS  
MAP LIGHTS  
CARGO LIGHT  
LIC0588  
LIC0586  
LIC0590  
The personal lights on the overhead console can  
be swiveled 360 degrees. To turn on the light,  
press the button. Press the button again to turn  
off the light.  
To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To  
turn them off, press the switches again.  
The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-  
position switch. To operate, push the switch to  
the desired position.  
CAUTION  
ON: The light is illuminated.  
Do not use for extended periods of time  
with the engine stopped. This could result  
in a discharged battery.  
Normal (center) position: The light illuminates  
when the lift gate or glass hatch is opened. The  
light turns off when the lift gate or glass hatch is  
closed.  
OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of  
lift gate position or lock status.  
Instruments and controls 2-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL  
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a  
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up  
to three individual hand-held transmitters into  
one built-in device.  
WARNING  
● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver with any garage door  
opener that lacks safety stop and re-  
verse features as required by federal  
safety standards. (These standards be-  
came effective for opener models  
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-  
rage door opener which cannot detect  
an object in the path of a closing garage  
door and then automatically stop and  
reverse, does not meet current federal  
safety standards. Using a garage door  
opener without these features in-  
creases the risk of serious injury or  
death.  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver:  
●
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)  
devices such as garage doors, gates, home  
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-  
curity systems.  
●
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No  
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-  
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-  
nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program-  
ming.  
WIC0986  
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா  
Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
is programmed, retain the original trans-  
mitter for future programming procedures  
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon  
sale of the vehicle, the programmed  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons  
should be erased for security purposes. For  
additional information, refer to “Program-  
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section.  
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer  
● During the programming procedure  
your garage door or security gate will  
open and close (if the transmitter is  
within range). Make sure that people or  
objects are clear of the garage door,  
gate, etc. that you are programming.  
HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory)  
1
until the indicator light  
blinks (after 20  
᭺
seconds). Release both buttons.  
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter  
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the  
HomeLinkா surface.  
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned  
off while programming the HomeLinkா  
Universal Transceiver.  
2-58 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
grammed device, press and hold the pro-  
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing  
when the device begins to activate.  
ton, quickly and firmly press and release the  
HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed.  
Press and release the HomeLinkா button up  
to 3 times to complete the training.  
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks  
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,  
HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code”  
garage door opener signal. You will need to  
proceed with the next steps to train the  
HomeLinkா to complete the programming  
which may require a ladder and another per-  
son for convenience.  
8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro-  
grammed. (To program the remaining  
HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or  
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)  
NOTE:  
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to  
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-  
gram button located on the garage door  
opener’s motor to activate the “training  
mode”. This button is usually located near  
the antenna wire that hangs down from the  
motor. If the wire originates from under a  
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to  
access the program button.  
“clear”  
HomeLinkா buttons.  
all  
previously  
programmed  
WIC0987  
If you have any questions or are having difficulty  
programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to  
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com  
or call 1-800-355-3515.  
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and  
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to  
program and the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton.  
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR  
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS  
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has  
been completed.  
NOTE:  
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-  
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-  
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to  
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the  
HomeLinkா button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-  
gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-  
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every  
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly  
(indicating successful programming).  
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator  
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing  
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing  
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.  
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both  
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-  
ing light indicates successful programming.  
To activate the garage door or other pro-  
Once you have pressed and released the  
program button on the garage door open-  
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you  
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.  
Use the help of a second person for conve-  
nience to assist when performing this step.  
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-  
ing the garage door opener’s program but-  
Instruments and controls 2-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
●
position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3  
inches (26 76 mm) away from the  
2. When the indicator light begins to flash  
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the  
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76  
mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.  
-
When programming a garage door opener,  
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-  
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-  
sible damage to the garage door opener  
components.  
HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in  
that position for up to 15 seconds. If  
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that  
time, try holding the transmitter in another  
position – keeping the indicator light in view  
at all times.  
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter  
button.  
4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first  
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator  
light begins to flash rapidly, release both  
buttons.  
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா  
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER  
If you continue to have programming difficulties,  
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs  
Department. The phone numbers are located in  
the Foreword of this manual.  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-  
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-  
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-  
propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will  
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has  
now been reprogrammed. The new device can  
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button  
that was just programmed. This procedure will  
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா  
buttons.  
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED  
INFORMATION  
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,  
to clear all programming, press and hold the two  
outside buttons and release when the indicator  
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).  
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-  
DIAGNOSIS  
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN  
If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand-  
held transmitter information:  
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the  
codes of any non-rolling code device that has  
been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the  
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-  
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional  
information.  
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE  
HOMELINKா BUTTON  
●
●
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries  
with new batteries.  
To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
button, complete the following.  
position the hand-held transmitter with its  
battery area facing away from the  
HomeLinkா surface.  
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but-  
ton. Do not release the button until step 4  
has been completed.  
When your vehicle is recovered, you will  
need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-  
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter  
information.  
●
press and hold both the HomeLinkா and  
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-  
ruption.  
2-60 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCC Notice:  
This device complies with FCC rules part 15  
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-  
tion is subject to the following two condi-  
tions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-  
terference and (2) This device must accept  
any interference that may be received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation.  
This transmitter has been tested and com-  
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313  
FCC I.D. CV2V67690  
Instruments and controls 2-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
2-62 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7  
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . .3-12  
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14  
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15  
How to use the remote keyless entry  
Operating the power lift gate  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24  
Cancel switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26  
Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Tilt operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31  
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32  
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32  
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34  
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .3-36  
Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36  
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37  
System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38  
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17  
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22  
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Operating the manual lift gate  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
KEYS  
A key number is only necessary when you have  
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate  
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer  
can duplicate it.  
WPD0128  
WPD0427  
1.  
Two master keys (black) with transpon-  
der chip and chrome NISSAN brand  
symbol on one side  
1.  
2.  
Two Intelligent Keys  
Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent  
Keys)  
3.  
Key number plate  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Valet key (black) with transponder chip  
Key number plate  
Transponder chip  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so  
equipped)  
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.  
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place  
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose  
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by  
using the key number. NISSAN does not record  
key numbers so it is very important to keep track  
of your key number plate.  
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent  
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-  
ligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-  
mobilizer System components.  
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a magnetic  
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and  
personal computers.  
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered  
and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be  
registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with  
the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-  
lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registra-  
tion process requires erasing all memory in the  
Intelligent Key components when registering new  
keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you  
have to the NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which  
contains electrical components, to  
come into contact with water or salt  
water. This could affect the system  
function.  
SPA1951  
Mechanical key  
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,  
which can be used in case of a discharged bat-  
tery.  
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply  
against another object.  
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock  
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an  
extended period in an area where tem-  
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).  
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into  
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to  
the lock position.  
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a  
key holder that contains a magnet.  
The mechanical key can be used for operation in  
the same way as an ordinary key.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.  
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time  
of registration will no longer be able to start your  
vehicle.  
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER  
SYSTEM KEYS  
CAUTION  
Always carry the mechanical key installed  
in the Intelligent Key slot.  
You can only drive your vehicle using the master  
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN  
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your  
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in  
the key head.  
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which  
contains an electrical transponder, to come into  
contact with salt water. This could affect system  
function.  
See “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the  
“Instruments and Controls” section of this  
manual.  
Valet hand-off  
The master key can be used for all the locks.  
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give  
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-  
chanical key with you to protect your belongings.  
The valet key cannot be used for the console box  
lock.  
To protect belongings when you leave a key with  
someone, give them the valet key only.  
To prevent the glove box or console box from  
being opened during valet hand-off, follow the  
procedure below.  
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-  
gent Key.  
Additional or replacement keys:  
If you still have a key, the key number is not  
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-  
cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN  
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used  
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN  
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to  
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-  
cause the registration process will erase the  
memory of all key codes previously registered  
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.  
After the registration process, these components  
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN  
2. Lock the glove box or console box with the  
mechanical key.  
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and  
keep the mechanical key with you.  
See “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls”  
section of this manual.  
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DOORS  
When the doors are locked using one of the  
following methods, the doors can not be opened  
using the inside or outside door handles. The  
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.  
Opening and closing windows  
The driver’s door key operation allows you to  
open and close windows equipped with auto-  
matic operation at the same time.  
WARNING  
●
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door  
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer  
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.  
● Always have the doors locked while  
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,  
this provides greater safety in the event  
of an accident by helping to prevent  
persons from being thrown from the  
vehicle. This also helps keep children  
and others from unintentionally open-  
ing the doors, and will help keep out  
intruders.  
●
To close the windows, turn the driver’s door  
key to the front of the vehicle for longer  
than 1 second after the door is locked.  
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.  
LPD0240  
Driver’s side  
● Before opening any door, always look  
for and avoid oncoming traffic.  
LOCKING WITH KEY  
The power door lock system allows you to lock or  
unlock all doors at the same time.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
1
Turning the key toward the front  
locks all doors.  
of the vehicle  
᭺
2
Turning the key one time toward the rear  
of the  
᭺
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,  
(where the key can  
only be removed and inserted) and turning it  
3
returning the key to neutral  
᭺
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks  
4
all doors  
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lockout protection  
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or  
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock  
position with the key in the ignition switch and any  
door open, all doors will lock and then unlock  
automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from  
being accidently locked inside the vehicle.  
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS  
●
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle  
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).  
●
All doors unlock automatically when the ig-  
nition switch is placed in the OFF position  
(Intelligent Key equipped vehicles) or when  
the key is removed from the ignition switch  
(non-Intelligent Key equipped vehicles).  
LPD0241  
WPD0381  
Inside lock  
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR  
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK  
KNOB  
LOCK SWITCH  
The automatic lock and unlock functions  
can be deactivated or activated indepen-  
dently of each other. To deactivate or activate  
the automatic door lock or unlock system, per-  
form the following procedure:  
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door  
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to  
To lock the door without the key, move the inside  
1
1
lock knob to the lock position , then close the  
the lock position . When locking the door this  
᭺
᭺
door.  
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the  
vehicle.  
To unlock the door without the key, move the  
inside lock knob to the unlock position  
1. Close all doors.  
2
.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the  
᭺
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s  
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
2
side) to the unlock position  
.
᭺
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM  
(if so equipped)  
3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds of  
performing Step #2:  
WARNING  
● Radio waves could adversely affect  
electric medical equipment. Those who  
use a pacemaker should contact the  
electric medical equipment manufac-  
turer for the possible influences before  
use.  
● To change AUTO UNLOCK settings:  
push and hold the power door lock switch  
to the  
position (UNLOCK) for more  
than 5 seconds.  
● To change AUTO LOCK settings: push  
and hold the power door lock switch to  
● The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-  
mits radio waves when the buttons are  
pushed. The FAA advises radio waves  
may affect aircraft navigation and com-  
munication systems. Do not operate the  
remote keyless entry keyfob while on  
an airplane. Make sure the buttons are  
not operated unintentionally when the  
unit is stored for a flight.  
the  
position (LOCK) for more  
than 5 seconds.  
4. When activated, the hazard warning lights  
will flash twice. When deactivated, the haz-  
ard warning lights will flash once.  
LPD0420  
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the  
OFF and ON position again between each  
setting change.  
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK  
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors  
from being opened accidentally, especially when  
small children are in the vehicle.  
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the  
interior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped),  
and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob  
from outside the vehicle.  
The child safety lock levers are located on the  
edge of the rear doors.  
Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,  
can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigation  
system, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”  
later in this section. For vehicles with navigation  
system, refer to “Comfort & convenience set-  
tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and  
voice recognition systems” section later in this  
manual.  
When the lever is in the lock position, the  
door can be opened only from the outside.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle  
before locking the doors.  
● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against  
another object.  
The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of  
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The  
effective distance depends upon the conditions  
around the vehicle.  
● Do not change or modify the keyfob.  
● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the  
keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until  
it is completely dry.  
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one  
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase  
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN  
dealer.  
● Do not place the keyfob for an extended  
period in an area where temperatures  
exceed 140°F (60°C).  
● Do not attach the keyfob with a key  
holder that contains a magnet.  
The keyfob will not function when:  
●
●
the battery is discharged.  
● Do not place the keyfob near equip-  
ment that produces a magnetic field,  
such as a TV, audio equipment and per-  
sonal computers.  
LPD0209  
the distance between the vehicle and the  
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).  
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS  
ENTRY SYSTEM  
The panic alarm will not activate when the  
key is in the ignition switch.  
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-  
ommends erasing the ID code of that key-  
fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-  
authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For  
information regarding the erasing proce-  
dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.  
Locking doors  
1. Close all windows.  
CAUTION  
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.  
3. Close the hood and all doors.  
Listed below are conditions or occur-  
rences which will damage the keyfob:  
● Do not allow the keyfob, which contains  
electrical components, to come into  
contact with water or salt water. This  
could affect the system function.  
4. Press the  
button on the keyfob. All  
the doors lock. The hazard warning lights  
flash twice and the horn beeps once to  
indicate all doors are locked.  
● Do not drop the keyfob.  
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
When the  
button is pressed with all  
Press the  
button on the keyfob again  
doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash  
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-  
minder that the doors are already locked.  
within 5 seconds.  
●
●
All doors unlock.  
The hazard warning lights flash once if all  
doors are completely closed.  
If a door is open and you press the  
button, the doors will lock but the horn will  
not beep and the hazard warning lights will  
not flash.  
The interior lights can be turned off without wait-  
ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the  
ignition switch and placing it in the ON or START  
position, locking the doors with the keyfob or  
pushing the interior light switch to the OFF posi-  
tion.  
The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles  
without navigation system, refer to “Silencing the  
horn beep feature” later in this section. For ve-  
hicles with navigation system, refer to “Comfort &  
convenience settings” in the “Monitor, climate,  
audio, phone and voice recognition system” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
Auto relock  
LPD0210  
When the  
button on the keyfob is pressed,  
Unlocking doors  
all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute  
unless one of the following operations is per-  
formed:  
Press the  
button on the keyfob once.  
●
●
Only the driver’s door unlocks.  
●
●
Any door is opened.  
The hazard warning lights flash once if all  
doors are completely closed with the ignition  
switch in any position except the ON posi-  
tion.  
A key is inserted into the ignition switch and  
the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.  
●
The interior lights and puddle lights (if so  
equipped) turn on and the light timer acti-  
vates for 30 seconds when the interior light  
switch is in the DOOR position with the  
ignition switch in any position except the ON  
position.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Opening windows  
The keyfob allows you to open windows  
equipped with automatic operation simulta-  
neously.  
●
To open the windows, press the  
but-  
ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-  
onds after all doors are unlocked.  
The door windows will open while pressing  
the button on the keyfob.  
The door windows cannot be closed by  
using the keyfob.  
LPD0243  
LPD0211  
Linking the keyfob to automatic drive  
positioner memory  
Operating the power lift gate (if so  
Using the panic alarm  
equipped)  
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive  
positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory  
setting.  
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,  
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention  
Press and hold the button on the keyfob for about  
0.5 seconds to open or close the lift gate. The  
hazard warning lights flash and a chime sounds  
to indicate the power open or power close se-  
quence has started.  
by pressing and holding the  
keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.  
button on the  
See “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-  
tion.  
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25  
seconds.  
The lift gate will reverse direction immediately  
during power open or power close if the keyfob  
button is pressed. A chime will sound to an-  
nounce the reversal.  
The panic alarm stops when:  
●
●
it has run for 25 seconds, or  
any button is pressed on the keyfob.  
For more information, see “Lift gate” later in this  
section.  
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE:  
Using the interior lights  
If you change the horn beep and light flash  
feature with the keyfob, the display screen  
(if so equipped) will not show the current  
mode and cannot be used to change the  
mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-  
vious mode and re-enable the display  
screen control.  
Press the  
button on the keyfob once to  
turn on the interior lights and puddle lamps (if so  
equipped).  
For additional information, refer to “Interior light”  
in the “Instruments and controls”section earlier in  
this manual.  
To deactivate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds.  
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to  
confirm that the horn beep feature has been  
deactivated.  
LPD0262  
To activate: Press and hold the  
Silencing the horn beep feature  
and buttons for at least 2 seconds  
once more.  
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-  
vated using the keyfob.  
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the  
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn  
beep feature has been reactivated.  
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-  
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so  
equipped)  
●
When the vehicle is parked near a parking  
meter.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
● Radio waves could adversely affect  
electric medical equipment. Those who  
use a pacemaker should contact the  
electric medical equipment manufac-  
turer for the possible influences before  
use.  
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with  
you when operating the vehicle.  
In such cases, correct the operating conditions  
before using the Intelligent Key function or use  
the mechanical key.  
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the  
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.  
Although the life of the battery varies depending  
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is  
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-  
charged, replace it with a new one.  
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with  
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-  
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-  
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-  
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following  
operating conditions.  
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio  
waves when the buttons are pushed.  
The FAA advises the radio waves may  
affect aircraft navigation and communi-  
cation systems. Do not operate the In-  
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make  
sure the buttons are not operated unin-  
tentionally when the unit is stored for a  
flight.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-  
ligent Key indicator will illuminate after the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position.  
●
When operating near a location where  
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as  
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting  
station.  
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving  
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment  
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-  
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-  
tery life may become shorter.  
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks  
using the remote controller function or pushing  
the request switch on the vehicle without taking  
the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating  
environment and/or conditions may affect the  
Intelligent Key operation.  
●
When in possession of wireless equipment,  
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,  
and CB radio.  
For information regarding replacement of a bat-  
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or  
covered by metallic materials.  
Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,  
unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition  
switch in the LOCK position is impossible when  
the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Un-  
locking the steering wheel is impossible even if  
the Intelligent Key is inserted into the ignition  
switch. Pay special attention that the vehicle bat-  
tery is not completely discharged.  
Be sure to read the following before using the  
Intelligent Key.  
When any type of radio wave remote control  
is used nearby.  
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an  
electric appliance such as a personal com-  
puter.  
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered  
and used with one vehicle. For information about  
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent  
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a magnetic  
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and  
personal computers.  
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN  
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-  
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the  
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate  
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing  
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
Listed below are conditions or occur-  
rences which will damage the Intelligent  
Key:  
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which  
contains electrical components, to  
come into contact with water or salt  
water. This could affect the system  
function.  
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply  
against another object.  
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent  
Key.  
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent  
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-  
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an  
extended period in an area where tem-  
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).  
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a  
key holder that contains a magnet.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPA2038  
WPD0375  
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,  
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may  
not function.  
OPERATING RANGE  
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS  
PRECAUTION  
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used  
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified  
operating range from the request switch  
●
Do not push the door handle request switch  
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as  
illustrated. The close distance to the door  
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system  
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-  
gent Key is outside the vehicle.  
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating  
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone  
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the  
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.  
1
.
᭺
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or  
strong radio waves are present near the operat-  
ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range  
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may  
not function properly.  
●
After locking with the door handle request  
switch, verify the doors are securely locked  
by testing them.  
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)  
1
from each request switch  
.
᭺
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left  
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the  
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the  
doors.  
Do not pull the door handle before pushing  
the door handle request switch. The door  
will be unlocked but will not open. Release  
the door handle once and pull it again to  
open the door.  
WPD0411  
WPD0412  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
OPERATION  
Locking doors  
1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK  
position and make sure you carry the Intelli-  
gent Key with you.  
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking  
the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.  
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you  
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door  
handle request switch within the range of opera-  
tion.  
2. Close all doors.  
3. Push any door handle request switch while  
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.  
4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.  
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and  
the outside buzzer sounds twice.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
CAUTION  
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-  
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-  
ating the request switch to lock the door.  
Put the intelligent key in a purse, pocket or  
your other hand.  
● After locking the doors using the re-  
quest switch, make sure that the doors  
have been securely locked by operating  
the door handles or the rear liftgate  
opener switch.  
● When locking the doors using the re-  
quest switch, make sure to have the  
Intelligent Key in your possession be-  
fore operating the request switch to  
prevent the Intelligent Key from being  
left in the vehicle.  
CAUTION  
The lockout protection may not function  
under the following conditions:  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on  
top of the instrument panel.  
● The request switch is operational only  
when the Intelligent Key has been de-  
tected by the Intelligent Key system.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side the glove box or a storage bin.  
WPD0413  
NOTE:  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side the door pockets.  
●
Doors lock with the door handle request  
switch while the ignition switch is not in the  
LOCK position.  
Lockout protection  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side or near metallic materials.  
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-  
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection  
is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.  
●
Doors do not lock by pushing the door  
handle request switch while any door is  
open. However, doors lock with the me-  
chanical key even if any door is open.  
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors  
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put  
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;  
the lock will automatically unlock and the door  
buzzer sounds.  
●
Doors do not lock with the door handle  
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside  
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.  
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside  
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-  
other Intelligent Key.  
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds  
when a door is unlocked and the room light  
switch is in the DOOR position.  
The interior light can be turned off without waiting  
for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-  
ing operations.  
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion.  
●
●
Locking the doors with the remote controller.  
Switching the room light switch to the OFF  
position.  
WPD0412  
WPD0413  
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE  
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION  
3. Power back door open.  
Unlocking doors  
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the  
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning  
the door handle to its original position will unlock  
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-  
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-  
quest switch to unlock the door.  
The remote keyless entry function can operate all  
door locks using the remote keyless function of  
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function  
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away  
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-  
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.  
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.  
2. Push the door handle request switch.  
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the  
outside buzzer sounds once.  
4. Push the door handle request switch again  
within 30 seconds to unlock all doors.  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pushing the request switch.  
The remote keyless entry function will not func-  
tion under the following conditions:  
For power liftgate opening:  
1. Carry the intelligent key.  
●
When the Intelligent Key is not within the  
operational range.  
●
●
Opening any door.  
2. Pull the power liftgate handle or press the  
power liftgate button.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
●
When the doors or the rear liftgate are open  
or not closed securely.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-  
charged.  
CAUTION  
After locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been  
securely locked by operating the door  
handles.  
CAUTION  
When locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in  
the vehicle.  
WPD0359  
Locking doors  
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
2. Close all doors.  
3. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and  
the horn beeps once.  
5. All doors will be locked.  
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when  
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in  
the DOOR position.  
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15  
seconds by performing one of the following op-  
erations:  
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion.  
●
●
Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.  
Switching the room light switch to the OFF  
position.  
Opening windows (if so equipped)  
WPD0360  
WPD0414  
The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows  
equipped with automatic operation simulta-  
neously.  
Releasing the rear lift gate  
Unlocking doors  
Press the  
button for longer than 0.5 sec-  
1. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
onds to open the rear lift gate. The rear lift gate  
release button will not operate when the ignition  
switch is in the ON position.  
●
To open the windows, press the  
but-  
ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3  
seconds after all doors are unlocked.  
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.  
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-  
The door windows will open while pressing  
the button on the Intelligent Key.  
onds to unlock all doors.  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pressing the  
The door windows cannot be closed by  
using the Intelligent Key.  
button:  
●
●
Opening any doors.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.  
Pushing the request switch on the driver or  
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in  
range of the door handle.  
WPD0415  
WPD0362  
Using the panic alarm  
Silencing the horn beep feature  
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,  
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention  
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-  
vated using the keyfob.  
by pressing and holding the  
button on the  
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.  
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25  
seconds.  
The panic alarm stops when:  
●
It has run for 25 seconds, or  
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE:  
WARNING SIGNALS  
If you change the horn beep and light flash  
feature with the keyfob, the display screen  
(if so equipped) will not show the current  
mode and cannot be used to change the  
mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-  
vious mode and re-enable the display  
screen control.  
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-  
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent  
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being  
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and  
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in  
the instrument panel.  
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is  
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the  
Intelligent Key.  
To deactivate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds.  
See the troubleshooting guide that follows and  
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments  
and controls” section of this manual.  
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to  
confirm that the horn beep feature has been  
deactivated.  
To activate: Press and hold the  
and buttons for at least 2 seconds  
once more.  
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the  
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn  
beep feature has been reactivated.  
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-  
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are  
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent  
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle  
system may respond differently than expected.  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-  
play and the inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park)  
position.  
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)  
position.  
When stopping the engine  
When opening the driver’s door to get out  
of the vehicle  
The inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.  
The NO KEY warning appears on the  
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times  
and the inside warning chime sounds for  
approximately 3 seconds.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
When closing the door after getting out of  
the vehicle  
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-  
play and the outside chime sounds  
continuously.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC position  
and the shift selector is not in the P (Park)  
position.  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion and place the ignition switch in the  
OFF position.  
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.  
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.  
knob turned to LOCK  
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
Close the door securely.  
When pushing the door handle request  
switch to lock the door  
The outside chime sounds for approximately A door is not closed securely.  
2 seconds.  
The door handle request switch is pushed  
before the door is closed.  
Push the door handle request switch after  
the door is closed.  
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HOOD  
LIFT GATE  
WARNING  
● Always be sure the lift gate has been  
closed securely to prevent it from open-  
ing while driving.  
● Do not drive with the lift gate open. This  
could allow dangerous exhaust gases  
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-  
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”  
section of this manual.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
LPD0244  
1
Pull the hood lock release handle located  
below the driver side instrument panel. The  
hood will spring up slightly.  
᭺
WARNING  
● Always be sure that hands and feet are  
clear of the door frame to avoid injury  
while closing the lift gate.  
● Make sure the hood is completely  
closed and latched before driving. Fail-  
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly  
open and result in an accident.  
2
Push the lever at the front of the hood to the  
side as illustrated with your fingertips and  
raise the hood.  
᭺
● If you see steam or smoke coming from  
the engine compartment, to avoid injury  
do not open the hood.  
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make  
sure it locks into place.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LPD0247  
LPD0283  
LPD0245  
Rear pillar switch  
Instrument panel switch  
Power Open:  
OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFT  
OPERATING THE POWER LIFT  
GATE (if so equipped)  
GATE (if so equipped)  
The power lift gate automatically moves from the  
fully closed position to the fully open position in  
approximately 5 – 8 seconds. The power open  
feature can be activated by the switch on the  
keyfob, the instrument panel switch and by the  
outside opener handle. The hazard lights flash  
and a chime sounds to indicate the power open  
sequence has been started.  
The power door lock system allows you to lock or  
unlock all doors including the lift gate simulta-  
neously.  
NOTE:  
To open, close or reverse the power lift  
gate, the shift selector must be in P (Park).  
Also, the power lift gate will not operate if  
battery voltage is low. Additionally, the  
glass hatch must be fully closed in order to  
open, close or reverse the power liftgate.  
To open the lift gate, pull up on the handle.  
To close, lower and push the lift gate down se-  
curely.  
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
The lift gate can be opened by the instru-  
ment panel switch and the keyfob even if the  
vehicle is locked. The lift gate will individually  
unlock and open. Once the lift gate is  
closed, its lock will align to the vehicle’s lock  
or unlock status.  
●
If the outside opener handle is activated  
while the cinching motor is engaged, the  
cinching motor will disengage and release  
the latch.  
NOTE:  
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,  
the power close function will not operate.  
WARNING  
●
●
The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-  
ond before the lift gate closes.  
There are some small distances immedi-  
ately before the closed position which  
cannot be detected. Make sure that all  
passengers have their hands, etc., inside  
the vehicle before closing the lift gate.  
●
●
●
The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-  
ond before the lift gate opens.  
The switch on the rear pillar can only be used  
to close the lift gate if the cancel switch is  
not in the on position.  
The lift gate must be unlocked to open it with  
the outside opener handle.  
Reverse:  
Manual Mode:  
The switch on the rear pillar cannot be used  
to open the lift gate.  
The power lift gate will reverse direction immedi-  
ately during power open or power close if the  
keyfob, instrument panel or rear pillar switch is  
pushed or if the outside handle is lifted. A chime  
will sound to announce the reversal.  
If power operation is not available, the lift gate  
may be operated manually. Power operation may  
not be available if the cancel switch is in the on  
position, if multiple obstacles have been de-  
tected in a single power cycle, or if battery volt-  
age is low.  
A warning chime will sound if the shift selector is  
moved out of P (Park) during a power open  
operation.  
Auto Reverse:  
Power Close:  
If an obstacle is detected during power open or  
power close, a warning chime will sound and the  
lift gate will reverse direction and return to the full  
open or full close position. If a second obstacle is  
detected, the lift gate motion will stop and the  
drive motor will disengage. The lift gate will enter  
manual mode.  
The power lift gate automatically moves from the  
fully open position to the secondary position.  
When the lift gate reaches the secondary posi-  
tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the lift  
gate to its primary latch position. Power close  
takes approximately 7 – 10 seconds. The power  
close feature can be activated by the switch on  
the keyfob, the instrument panel and the rear  
pillar. The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds  
to indicate the power close sequence has been  
started.  
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the lift  
gate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip  
during power close, the lift gate will reverse di-  
rection and return to the full open position.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
● If the power lift gate does not stay open  
or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at  
any time while a continuous warning  
chime sounds, do not operate the lift  
gate. There may be a pressure loss in  
one or both of the lift gate gas stays.  
Have the lift gate inspected by  
NISSAN dealer.  
a
● Do not activate the power lift gate if one  
or both of the lift gate gas stays are  
removed. Damage to the lift gate or  
power lift gate mechanisms may occur.  
LPD0250  
LPD0248  
Safe Mode:  
If the lift gate gas stays  
CANCEL SWITCH  
1
lose pressure, the  
᭺
Push the switch toward the CANCEL position to  
disable the rear pillar switch. The lift gate can still  
be opened and closed using the switch on the  
instrument panel and keyfob. The lift gate can  
also be opened manually with the outside handle  
if the lift gate is unlocked.  
power lift gate safe mode is activated. When the  
safe mode is activated, the lift gate slowly closes.  
A continuous warning chime sounds until the lift  
gate is in the fully down position. Then the lift gate  
will be pulled to the closed and latched position  
by a motor.  
The power lift gate cannot be opened using the  
switches at any time in the safe mode.  
The auto reverse function remains active while  
the lift gate is closing in the safe mode.  
Do not operate the lift gate again until it is  
checked by your NISSAN dealer.  
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIFT GATE RELEASE  
WARNING  
● Always be sure the lift gate has been  
closed securely to prevent it from open-  
ing while driving.  
● Do not drive with the lift gate open. This  
could allow dangerous exhaust gases  
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-  
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”  
section of this manual.  
CAUTION  
LPD0251  
LPD0252  
● If the power lift gate does not stay open  
or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at  
any time while a continuous warning  
chime sounds, do not operate the lift  
gate. There may be a pressure loss in  
one or both of the lift gate gas stays.  
Manual lift gate release  
Power lift gate release  
Manual lift gate (if so equipped)  
Power lift gate (if so equipped)  
If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked with  
the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a  
discharged battery, follow these steps:  
If the lift gate cannot be opened with the door  
lock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery,  
follow these steps:  
Have the lift gate inspected by  
NISSAN dealer.  
a
1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift  
gate .  
1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift  
gate.  
● Do not activate the power lift gate if one  
or both of the lift gate gas stays are  
removed. Damage to the lift gate or  
power lift gate mechanisms may occur.  
2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.  
2. Move the lever up to open the lift gate.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GLASS HATCH  
FUEL-FILLER DOOR  
NOTE:  
The lift gate must be unlocked in order to  
open the glass hatch.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with the glass hatch open.  
This could allow dangerous exhaust gases  
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust  
gas” in the “Starting and driving” section  
of this manual.  
LPD0246  
LPD0391  
To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle to  
release the glass hatch, then pull up on the glass  
hatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatch  
down securely.  
FUEL-FILLER CAP  
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the  
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn  
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are  
heard.  
1
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder  
refueling.  
while  
᭺
For additional information, see “Fuel recommen-  
dation” and “Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel rec-  
ommendation” in the “Technical and consumer  
information” section later in this manual.  
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in  
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity  
can cause an explosion of flammable  
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or  
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious  
injury or death when filling portable fuel  
containers:  
● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the  
fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the  
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten  
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause  
WARNING  
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and  
highly explosive under certain condi-  
tions. You could be burned or seriously  
injured if it is misused or mishandled.  
Always stop the engine and do not  
smoke or allow open flames or sparks  
near the vehicle when refueling.  
the  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
(MIL) to illuminate. If the  
light  
illuminates because the fuel-filler cap  
is loose or missing, tighten or install the  
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.  
– Always place the container on the  
ground when filling.  
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank  
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off  
automatically. Continued refueling may  
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel  
spray and possibly a fire.  
– Do not use electronic devices when  
filling.  
The  
light should turn off after a  
few driving trips. If the  
light  
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact  
with the container while you are fill-  
ing it.  
does not turn off after a few driving  
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a  
NISSAN dealer  
● Use only an original equipment type  
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a  
built-in safety valve needed for proper  
operation of the fuel system and emis-  
sion control system. An incorrect cap  
can result in a serious malfunction and  
possible injury. It could also cause the  
malfunction indicator light to come on.  
– Use only approved portable fuel con-  
tainers for flammable liquid.  
● For additional information, see the  
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in  
the “Instruments and Controls” section  
earlier in this manual.  
CAUTION  
● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door  
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system  
or other damage can occur if E-85 is  
used in vehicles that are not designed  
to run on E-85.  
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to  
attempt to start your vehicle.  
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,  
flush it away with water to avoid paint  
damage.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEERING WHEEL  
PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT  
CAUTION  
Do not adjust the pedal position with your  
foot on the pedal.  
WPD0428  
WPD0429  
The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-  
justed for driving comfort.  
TILT OPERATION  
WARNING  
Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the  
brake and accelerator pedal position away from  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while  
driving. You could lose control of your  
vehicle and cause an accident.  
1
2
the driver  
or toward the driver  
.
᭺
᭺
The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-  
justed separately.  
Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the  
steering wheel up or down to the desired posi-  
tion.  
WARNING  
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel  
in place.  
Do not adjust the pedal position while  
driving. You could lose control of your  
vehicle and cause an accident.  
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SUN VISORS  
1
To block glare from the front, swing down the  
main sun visor.  
᭺
2
To block glare from the side, remove the  
main sun visor from the center mount and  
swing the visor to the side.  
᭺
3
To block glare from the side and front, swing  
down the sub-sun visor.  
᭺
4
Slide the extension sun visor in or out as  
needed.  
᭺
CAUTION  
● Do not store the sun visor before return-  
ing the extension to its original  
position.  
LPD0257  
VANITY MIRRORS  
● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-  
edly downward.  
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor  
down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity  
mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is  
open.  
LPD0256  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIRRORS  
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE  
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)  
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-  
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-  
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the  
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare  
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in  
the ON position.  
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-  
matic anti-glare feature is operating.  
NOTE:  
Do not hang any objects over the sensors  
LPD0446  
WPD0126  
1
or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.  
᭺
Type A  
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)  
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the  
sensors, resulting in improper operation.  
Type A  
1
The night position  
reduces glare from the  
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.  
᭺
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-  
tion, press the button as described:  
To turn off the anti-glare feature, press  
2
Use the day position  
hours.  
when driving in daylight  
᭺
●
●
the  
off.  
button. The indicator light will turn  
WARNING  
Use the night position only when neces-  
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.  
To turn on the anti-glare feature, press  
the button again. The indicator light  
will turn on.  
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-  
matic anti-glare feature is operating.  
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For more information about the compass and  
2
compass features  
(if so equipped), see  
᭺
“Compass display” in the “Instruments and con-  
trols” section of this manual.  
LPD0469  
LPD0470  
Type B-Without compass  
Type C-With compass  
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,  
press:  
Type B and Type C  
2
The indicator light  
will illuminate when the  
᭺
●
the  
|
button for inside mirrors without  
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.  
compass.  
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:  
●
the  
compass.  
button for inside mirrors with  
●
the  
compass.  
O
button for inside mirrors without  
The indicator light will turn on.  
●
the  
button for inside mirrors with  
compass.  
Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic  
anti-glare outside mirrors. For additional informa-  
tion, see “Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors”  
later in this section.  
The indicator light will turn off.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans-  
ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver”in the “Instrument and controls”sec-  
tion of this manual.  
WARNING  
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on  
the passenger side are closer than they  
appear. Be careful when moving to the  
right. Using only this mirror could cause  
an accident. Use the inside mirror or  
glance over your shoulder to properly  
judge distances to other objects.  
For information on the compass display (if so  
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-  
ments and controls” section of this manual.  
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.  
You could lose control of your vehicle  
and cause an accident.  
LPD0418  
OUTSIDE MIRRORS  
The outside mirror remote control will operate  
only when the ignition switch is placed in the  
ACC or ON position.  
1
Rotate the round switch  
to select the right or  
᭺
left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired po-  
sition pushing the round switch.  
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-  
glare feature operates only when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position.  
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when  
starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the  
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminate  
when the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-  
ing.  
To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the  
button on the rearview mirror. The indicator light  
will turn off.  
To turn on the anti-glare feature again, press  
the  
button on the rearview mirror. The in-  
LPD0259  
LPD0417  
dicator light will turn on.  
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so  
Power folding outside mirrors (if so  
equipped)  
For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-  
view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearview  
mirror” earlier in this section.  
equipped)  
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.  
CAUTION  
Heated mirrors  
Do not manually fold the power folding  
mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can  
damage the mirrors.  
The outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,  
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-  
tional information, see “Rear window and outside  
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and  
controls” section of this manual.  
Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.  
Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (if  
so equipped)  
The outside mirrors will automatically dim during  
nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if  
so equipped)  
The automatic drive positioner system has two  
features:  
mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,  
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-  
tem” section of this manual and “Pedal posi-  
tion adjustment” and “Outside mirrors” ear-  
lier in this section.  
●
●
Memory storage function  
Entry/exit function  
During this step, do not place the ignition  
switch in any position other than ON.  
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,  
push the memory switch (1 or 2).  
The indicator light for the pushed memory  
switch will come on and stay on for approxi-  
mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.  
After the indicator light goes off, the se-  
lected positions are stored in the selected  
memory (1 or 2).  
LPD0419  
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION  
If a new memory is stored in the same memory  
switch, the previous memory will be deleted.  
Two positions for the driver’s seat, accelerator  
and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be  
stored in the automatic drive positioner memory.  
Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-  
tem.  
Linking a keyfob to a stored memory  
position  
Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory  
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-  
ing procedure:  
1. Place the shift selector in the P (Park) posi-  
tion.  
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-  
tion.  
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator and  
brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the  
desired positions by manually operating  
each adjusting switch. For additional infor-  
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. While the indicator light for the memory  
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-  
●
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the  
fuse opens, the memory storage function will  
be canceled and must be restarted before a  
stored memory position can be set again.  
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to  
restart the memory storage function. You  
can also restart the memory storage function  
using the following procedure.  
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION  
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat  
will automatically move when the shift selector is  
placed in the P (Park) position. This allows the  
driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more  
easily.  
onds, press the  
button on the keyfob.  
The indicator light will blink. After the indica-  
tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that  
memory setting.  
With the key removed from the ignition switch or  
the ignition switch is moved to OFF, press  
The driver’s seat will slide backward:  
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the  
fuse.  
●
●
●
When the key is removed from the ignition  
switch and the driver’s door is opened.  
the  
button on the keyfob. The driver’s seat,  
accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mir-  
rors will move to the memorized position.  
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than  
2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK  
position.  
When the driver’s door is opened with the  
ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.  
NOTE:  
When the ignition switch is turned from  
ACC to LOCK with the driver’s door open.  
Once the memory storage function has been  
restarted, you can store a memory position.  
See “Memory storage function”earlier in this  
section.  
If a new memory position is saved to the  
memory switch, the keyfob automatically  
re-links.  
The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-  
tion:  
Confirming memory storage  
●
●
●
When the key is inserted into the ignition  
switch and the driver’s door is closed.  
Selecting the memorized position  
●
Place the ignition switch in the ON position  
and push the SET switch. If the main memory  
has not been stored, the indicator light will  
come on for approximately 0.5 seconds.  
When the memory has stored the position,  
the indicator light will stay on for approxi-  
mately 5 seconds.  
Set the shift selector to the P (Park) position, then:  
When the driver’s door is closed with the  
ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.  
●
●
Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s  
door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or  
When the ignition switch is turned from  
ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P  
(Park) position.  
Place the ignition switch in the ON position  
and push the memory switch (1 or 2).  
The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,  
and outside mirrors will move to the memorized  
position with the indicator light blinking, and then  
the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-  
celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see  
“Comfort & convenience settings” in the “Moni-  
tor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition  
systems” section of this manual. For vehicles  
without navigation system, see your NISSAN  
dealer.  
The automatic drive positioner system can be  
adjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga-  
tion system, see “Comfort & convenience set-  
tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and  
voice recognition systems” section of this  
manual. For vehicles without navigation system,  
see your NISSAN dealer.  
SYSTEM OPERATION  
The automatic drive positioner system will not  
work or will stop operating under the following  
conditions:  
●
When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7  
km/h).  
Restarting the entry/exit function  
●
When any of the memory switches are  
pushed while the automatic drive positioner  
is operating.  
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse  
opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.  
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to  
restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart  
the entry/exit function using the following proce-  
dure.  
●
When the adjusting switch for the driver’s  
seat is turned on while the automatic drive  
positioner is operating.  
●
●
●
●
When the seat has been already moved to  
the memorized position.  
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the  
fuse.  
When no seat position is stored in the  
memory switch.  
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than  
2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK  
position.  
When the shift selector is moved from P  
(Park) to any other position.  
The entry/exit function should now work properly.  
When the driver’s door remains open more  
than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is  
not in the ON position.  
3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice  
recognition systems  
Control panel buttons — color screen without  
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36  
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36  
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37  
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37  
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38  
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Navigation System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16  
Control panel buttons — color screen with  
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17  
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18  
How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18  
Start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26  
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32  
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33  
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33  
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34  
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34  
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35  
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40  
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40  
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .4-40  
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55  
CompactFlashா (CF) player operation  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60  
Music Box™ Hard Drive audio system  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62  
CD/CF (CompactFlashா) care and cleaning . . . . . .4-71  
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . .4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76  
NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76  
Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . .4-78  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79  
Flip-down screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79  
Before operating the DVD mobile  
entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80  
Playing a digital versatile disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82  
Remote control operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86  
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88  
How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89  
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System without  
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92  
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-94  
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-94  
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96  
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97  
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99  
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with  
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107  
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109  
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109  
Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109  
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111  
Making a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112  
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113  
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114  
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115  
Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115  
Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117  
NISSAN Voice Recognition System  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118  
NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-118  
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121  
Before Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121  
Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121  
NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate  
Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-130  
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-137  
Speaker Adaptation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —  
COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT  
NAVIGATION SYSTEM  
WARNING  
● Positioning of the heating or air condi-  
tioning controls and display controls  
should not be done while driving in or-  
der that full attention may be given to  
the driving operation.  
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-  
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,  
fire, or electrical shock.  
● Do not use this system if you notice any  
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or  
lack of sound. Continued use of the  
system may result in accident, fire or  
electric shock.  
● In case you notice any foreign object in  
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,  
or notice smoke or smell coming from  
it, stop using the system immediately  
and contact your nearest NISSAN  
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may  
lead to accidents, fire or electrical  
shock.  
WHA0881  
5. INFO button (P. 4-5)  
1. NISSAN controller (P. 4-3)  
2. STATUS button (P. 4-4)  
6. – (brightness control) button  
7. SETTING button (P. 4-9)  
8. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3)  
3. + (brightness control) button  
4.  
OFF brightness control button  
(P. 4-16)  
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reference symbols:  
CAUTION  
ENTER button — This is a button on the control  
panel.  
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal  
display may break if it is hit with a hard  
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do  
not touch the liquid crystalline material,  
which contains a small amount of mer-  
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash  
immediately with soap and water.  
“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.  
By selecting this key, you can proceed to the next  
function.  
● To clean the display, never use a rough  
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any  
kind of solvent or paper towel with a  
chemical cleaning agent. They will  
scratch or deteriorate the panel.  
WHA0883  
● Do not splash any liquid such as water  
or car fragrance on the display. Contact  
with liquid will cause the system to  
malfunction.  
HOW TO USE THE NISSAN  
CONTROLLER  
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on  
the display screen. Select an item on the display  
When you use this system, make sure the engine  
is running.  
2
using the main directional buttons  
or the  
᭺
3
1
center dial . Then press the ENTER button  
᭺
᭺
If you use the system with the engine not  
running (ignition switch in the ON or ACC  
position) for a long time, it will discharge  
the battery, and the engine will not start.  
to select the item or perform the action.  
4
The BACK button  
has two functions:  
᭺
●
Go back to the previous display (cancel).  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
If you press the BACK button  
during setup,  
3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:  
Shows that the NISSAN controller may be  
used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and  
select more options.  
᭺
the setup will be canceled and/or the display will  
return to the previous screen.  
●
Finish setup.  
4. Screen Count:  
4
In some screens pressing the BACK button  
accepts the changes made during setup.  
᭺
Shows the number of menu selections avail-  
able for that screen (for example, 5/6).  
5. Footer/Information Line:  
Provides more information (if available)  
about the menu selection currently high-  
lighted (for example, Enhances stereo imag-  
ing and sound).  
HOW TO USE THE STATUS  
BUTTON  
LHA0914  
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE  
SCREEN  
To display the status of the audio, climate control  
system and fuel consumption, press the STATUS  
button.  
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-  
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-  
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different  
areas on the screen provide you with important  
information. See the following for details:  
The following information will appear when the  
STATUS button is pressed:  
Audio → Audio and climate control system →  
Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-  
erage fuel economy and distance to empty →  
Audio  
1. Header:  
Shows the path used to get to the current  
screen (for example, press the SETTING  
button > then select the “Audio” key).  
2. Menu Selections:  
Shows the options to choose within that  
menu screen (for example, Bass, etc.).  
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
●
If the amount of fuel added while the  
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-  
play just before the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF position may con-  
tinue to be displayed.  
●
When driving uphill or rounding curves,  
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may  
momentarily change the display.  
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)  
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based  
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The  
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi  
(500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery  
cables, the display might show (**.*).  
LHA0915  
LHA0921  
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON  
Fuel economy  
Press the INFO button. The display screen  
shows vehicle information for your convenience.  
Press the INFO button then select the “Fuel  
Economy” key using the NISSAN controller and  
press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel  
Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy  
Record.  
Resetting fuel economy  
The average fuel economy calculation can be  
reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the  
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key  
using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-  
TER button.  
The information shown on the screen should be a  
guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.  
See the following for details.  
Distance to empty (MI or km)  
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you  
with an estimation of the distance that can be  
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly  
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel  
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display  
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level  
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the  
heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition  
and the temperature.  
In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-  
played on the screen:  
LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.  
WARNING  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, tire pressure will not be  
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS) will not function and  
the low tire pressure warning light will  
flash for approximately 1 minute. The  
light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-  
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
LHA0922  
LHA0923  
Fuel economy record  
Tire pressure information (if so  
equipped)  
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel  
Economy” key, then select the “View” key using  
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
To display tire pressure information, press the  
INFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” key  
using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-  
TER button.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
The average fuel consumption history will be  
displayed in a graph form along with the average  
fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.  
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-  
cates that the pressure is being measured. After  
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will  
be displayed randomly.  
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on  
the screen does not correspond with the actual  
order of the tire position.  
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resetting the trip computer  
Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.  
Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs to  
be reset using the NISSAN controller and press  
the ENTER button.  
To reset all of the items in the trip computer select  
the “Reset ALL”key and press the ENTER button.  
A confirmation screen will appear. Select the  
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.  
LHA0924  
LHA0925  
Trip computer  
Maintenance items  
Press the INFO button, then select the “Trip  
Computer” key using the NISSAN controller and  
press the ENTER button.  
Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte-  
nance” key using the NISSAN controller and  
press the ENTER button; the maintenance infor-  
mation will be displayed on the screen.  
The trip computer will display the following items:  
●
Elapsed Time – Journey time since the last  
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59  
minutes.  
●
●
Driving Distance – Distance driven (mile or  
km) since the last reset.  
Average Speed – Average speed driven  
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resetting the maintenance interval  
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi  
(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.  
LHA0926  
LHA0839  
Changing the maintenance interval  
Displaying the maintenance notice re-  
minder  
Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys using  
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button to display the screen to change the main-  
tenance interval.  
Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key and press  
the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE  
INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte-  
nance interval. The indicator light will illuminate  
when it is ON.  
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-  
troller and press the ENTER button. Use the  
NISSAN controller to change the maintenance  
interval; to accept the changes press the BACK  
button.  
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-  
tomatically displayed as shown when both of the  
following conditions are met:  
●
The vehicle is driven the set distance and the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.  
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-  
sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.  
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-  
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press  
the BACK button.  
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays  
each time the key is turned ON until one of the  
following conditions are met:  
●
●
The “Reset” key is selected.  
The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to  
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).  
●
The maintenance interval is set again.  
LHA0927  
WHA0937  
Type A  
HOW TO USE THE SETTING  
BUTTON  
Type B  
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-  
TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can  
select and/or adjust several functions, features  
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use  
the NISSAN controller to select each item to be  
set and press the ENTER button.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LHA0929  
LHA0930  
WHA0823  
Brightness/contrast:  
Display off:  
Display settings  
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key  
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map  
background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust  
the brightness to darker or brighter and the con-  
trast to lower or higher.  
Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the  
“Display ON” turns amber and the message  
above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,  
HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode  
button on the control panel is operated, the dis-  
play turns on for that operation. If one of the  
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will  
not automatically turn off until that operation is  
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-  
matically after 5 seconds.  
Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER  
button. The Display settings screen will appear.  
The new settings are automatically saved when  
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK  
button or any other mode button.  
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To turn the screen on:  
●
Press the SETTING button and select the  
“Display” key and then select the “Display  
ON”key. Then set the screen to on by press-  
ing the ENTER button, or  
●
Hold the  
OFF button for approxi-  
mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-  
ing display”will appear and the “Display ON”  
key will be automatically turned on (no am-  
ber indicator).  
Background color:  
Select the “Background Color” key; the display  
color changes between day and night.  
LHA0931  
LHA0932  
Beeps settings  
Clock  
The new settings are automatically saved when  
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK  
button or any other mode button.  
Select the “Beeps” key and press the ENTER  
button. The Beeps settings screen will appear.  
The following display will appear after pressing  
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”  
key using the NISSAN controller and pressing  
the ENTER button.  
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a  
beep will sound if any control panel button is  
pressed.  
On-screen Clock:  
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-  
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper  
right corner of the screen.  
Clock Format:  
Choose either the 12h (12–hour) clock display or  
the 24h (24–hour) clock display.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Daylight Savings Time:  
●
●
●
●
●
Atlantic  
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-  
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the  
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the  
amber indicator light will disappear.  
Newfoundland  
Aleutian  
Hawaii  
Alaska  
LHA0933  
Time Zone:  
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone  
screen will appear.  
Select one of the following zones, depending on  
the current location, by selecting the correct time  
zone key and pressing the ENTER button to  
enable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-  
nate for that location).  
●
●
●
●
Pacific  
Mountain  
Central  
Eastern  
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
OK:  
Select to accept the changes made and  
return to the clock setting display.  
After selection/settings, press the BACK button  
or any other mode button to accept the changes.  
LHA0943  
LHA0938  
Clock Adjust:  
Comfort & Convenience settings (if so  
equipped)  
Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the  
NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-  
ton. The comfort and convenience option screen  
will be displayed.  
You can set the following operating conditions by  
selecting the desired item using the NISSAN  
controller, then pressing the ENTER button. The  
indicator light (box at the right of the selected  
item) alternately turns on and off each time the  
ENTER button is pressed.  
Adjust the time by manually inputting the correct  
time.  
●
0 – 9:  
Select to change the number in the display.  
●
Modify:  
Select to change the number at the cursor  
position.  
●
●
>:  
Select to move the cursor position to the  
right.  
Indicator light is illuminated — ON  
<:  
Select to move the cursor position to the left.  
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE:  
If you change the horn beep or the lamp  
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will  
not be changed with the display. Use the  
keyfob to return to the previous mode and  
re-enable the display control.  
Auto Re-Lock Time: Select to set the length of  
time before doors automatically re-lock.  
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is  
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first  
after the door unlock operation. When the door  
handle request switch on the driver’s or front  
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,  
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All  
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock  
operation is performed again within 1 minute.  
LHA0939  
LHA0940  
Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or  
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when  
any door is unlocked.  
Remote Key Response Horn: Select to turn  
on or turn off the horn beep mode used when the  
LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.  
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will  
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is  
performed once.  
Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjust  
the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher  
(right) or lower (left).  
NOTE:  
If you change the horn beep or the lamp  
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will  
not be changed with the display. Use the  
keyfob to return to the previous mode and  
re-enable the display control.  
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn  
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by  
pushing the door handle request switch.  
Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to change  
the duration of the automatic headlight off timer  
from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 second  
periods.  
Intelligent Key Lock Reply: Select to change  
the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when  
a door handle request switch is pushed to lock.  
Remote Key Response Lights: Select to turn  
on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode  
used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the  
keyfob is pressed.  
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn  
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-  
cally according to the vehicle speed.  
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select to turn off all sounds made when a door  
handle request switch is pushed, by selecting the  
“OFF” key.  
Intelligent Key Unlock Reply: Select to  
change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode  
used when a door handle request switch is  
pushed to unlock.  
Select to turn off all sounds made when a door  
handle request switch is pushed, by selecting the  
“OFF” key.  
Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turn  
on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backwards  
for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF  
position and the driver’s door is opened. After  
getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition  
switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat  
moves to the previous position.  
LHA0934  
LHA0935  
Select Language:  
Language / Units  
Select the “English” key, the “Français” key or the  
“Español” key to change the language shown on  
the display.  
Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-  
guage / Units” key and press the ENTER button.  
Select which setting you want to change using  
the NISSAN controller and selecting either the  
“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” key  
by pressing the ENTER button.  
Return All Settings to Default: Select to  
change all the comfort and convenience systems  
to their default settings.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OFF BUTTON  
To change the display brightness, press  
the  
will change the display to the day  
night display. Then, adjust the brightness  
OFF button. Pressing the button again  
or the  
by using the NISSAN controller.  
The display brightness can also be adjusted us-  
ing the + (brighter) button or the Ϫ (dimmer)  
button.  
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the  
display will return to the previous display.  
Press and hold the  
OFF button for more  
LHA0936  
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the  
button again to turn the display on.  
Select Units:  
Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”  
(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units  
shown on the display.  
Audio settings  
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System”later in  
this section.  
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —  
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
9. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-18)  
10. ROUTE button*  
11. ZOOM IN button*  
12. MAP button*  
13. ZOOM OUT button*  
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to  
the separate Navigation System Owner’s  
Manual.  
**For information on the PHONE button, see  
“Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with  
Navigation System” later in this section.  
When you use this system, make sure the engine  
is running.  
If you use the system with the engine not  
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long  
time, it will discharge the battery, and the  
engine will not start.  
Reference symbols:  
LHA0880  
ENTER button — This is a button on the control  
panel.  
1. STATUS button (P. 4-20)  
2. DEST button*  
5.  
OFF brightness control button  
(P. 4-32)  
“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.  
By selecting this key, you can proceed to the next  
function.  
6. INFO button (P. 4-21)  
7. SETTING button (P. 4-26)  
8. VOICE button*  
3. NISSAN controller (P. 4-18)  
4. PHONE button**  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
If you press the BACK button  
during setup,  
᭺
● Do not splash any liquid such as water  
or car fragrance on the display. Contact  
with liquid will cause the system to  
malfunction.  
the setup will be canceled and/or the display will  
return to the previous screen.  
●
Finish setup.  
To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-  
not be operated while driving.  
4
In some screens, pressing the BACK button  
accepts the changes made during setup.  
᭺
The on-screen functions that are not available  
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.  
5
For the VOICE button  
functions, refer to the  
᭺
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.  
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-  
ate the navigation system.  
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH  
SCREEN  
CAUTION  
LHA0882  
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal  
display may break if it is hit with a hard  
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do  
not touch the liquid crystalline material,  
which contains a small amount of mer-  
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash  
immediately with soap and water.  
HOW TO USE THE NISSAN  
CONTROLLER  
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on  
the display screen. Select an item on the display  
using the main directional buttons  
2
(certain  
᭺
Navigation System functions use the additional  
6
3
directional buttons  
) or the center dial  
.
᭺
᭺
● To clean the display, never use a rough  
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any  
kind of solvent or paper towel with a  
chemical cleaning agent. They will  
scratch or deteriorate the panel.  
1
Then press the ENTER button  
item or perform the action.  
to select the  
᭺
4
The BACK button  
has two functions:  
᭺
●
Go back to the previous display (cancel).  
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHA0885  
WHA0887  
WHA0889  
Adjusting the item:  
Inputting characters:  
Touch screen operation  
1
Touch the “+” key  
᭺
2
or the “Ϫ” key  
to adjust  
1
Touch the letter or number key  
.
᭺
With this system, the same operations as those  
for the NISSAN controller are possible using the  
touch screen operation.  
᭺
3
the settings. Touch the “UP”key  
to scroll up to  
᭺
There are some options available when inputting  
characters.  
4
the previous page, or touch the “DOWN” key  
to scroll down to next page.  
᭺
Selecting the item:  
●
●
●
Uppercase:  
Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio”key,  
Shows uppercase characters.  
1
touch the “Audio” key  
on the screen. Touch  
᭺
Lowercase:  
2
the “BACK” key  
᭺
to return to the previous  
Shows lowercase characters.  
screen.  
Space:  
Inserts a space.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Symbols:  
menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-  
mination, etc.).  
Shows symbols such as the question mark  
(?).  
3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:  
Shows that the NISSAN controller may be  
used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and  
select more options.  
Delete:  
Deletes the last inputted character with one  
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to  
delete all of the characters.  
4. Screen Count:  
●
OK:  
Shows the number of menu selections avail-  
able for that screen (for example, 1/14).  
Completes the character input.  
5. Footer/Information Line:  
Touch screen maintenance  
Provides more information (if available)  
about the menu selection currently high-  
lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when  
unlocking doors).  
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft  
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a  
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft  
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-  
tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the  
screen.  
LHA0890  
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE  
SCREEN  
HOW TO USE THE STATUS  
BUTTON  
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-  
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-  
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different  
areas on the screen provide you with important  
information. See the following for details.  
START-UP SCREEN  
To display the status of the audio, climate control  
system, fuel consumption and navigation system,  
press the STATUS button.  
When you place the ignition switch in the ACC or  
ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is  
displayed on the screen. When you read and  
agree with the warning, press the ENTER button.  
The following information will appear when the  
STATUS button is pressed:  
1. Header:  
Shows the path used to get to the current  
screen (for example, press the SETTING  
button > then select the “Comfort & Conv.”  
key).  
If you do not push the ENTER button, you will not  
be able to use the navigation system.  
Audio → Audio and climate control system →  
Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-  
erage fuel economy and distance to empty →  
Audio, climate control temperature settings and  
Navigation System → Audio  
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate  
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.  
2. Menu Selections:  
Shows the options to choose within that  
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
●
If the amount of fuel added while the  
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-  
play just before the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF position may con-  
tinue to be displayed.  
●
When driving uphill or rounding curves,  
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may  
momentarily change the display.  
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)  
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based  
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The  
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi  
(500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery  
cables, the display might show (**.*).  
LHA0892  
LHA0893  
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON  
Fuel economy  
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows  
vehicle and navigation information for your con-  
venience.  
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel  
Economy” key using the NISSAN controller and  
press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel  
Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy  
Record.  
Resetting fuel economy  
The average fuel economy calculation can be  
reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the  
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key  
using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-  
TER button.  
The information shown on the screen should be a  
guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.  
See the following for details.  
Distance to empty (MI or km)  
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you  
with an estimation of the distance that can be  
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly  
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel  
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display  
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level  
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the  
heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition  
and the temperature.  
In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-  
played on the screen:  
LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.  
WARNING  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, tire pressure will not be  
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS) will not function and  
the low tire pressure warning light will  
flash for approximately 1 minute. The  
light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-  
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
LHA0894  
LHA0895  
Fuel economy record  
Tire pressure information  
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel  
Economy” key, then select the “View” key using  
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
To display tire pressure information, press the  
INFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” key  
using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-  
TER button.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
The average fuel consumption history will be  
displayed in a graph form along with the average  
fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.  
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-  
cates that the pressure is being measured. After  
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will  
be displayed randomly.  
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on  
the screen does not correspond with the actual  
order of the tire position.  
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resetting the trip computer  
Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.  
Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs to  
be reset using the NISSAN controller and press  
the ENTER button.  
To reset all of the items in the trip computer select  
the “Reset ALL”key and press the ENTER button.  
A confirmation screen will appear; select the  
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.  
LHA0896  
LHA0897  
Trip computer  
Maintenance items  
Press the INFO button, then select the “Trip  
Computer” key using the NISSAN controller and  
press the ENTER button.  
Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte-  
nance” key using the NISSAN controller and  
press the ENTER button; the maintenance infor-  
mation will be displayed on the screen.  
The trip computer will display the following items:  
●
Elapsed Time – Journey time since the last  
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59  
minutes.  
●
●
Driving Distance – Distance driven (miles or  
km) since the last reset.  
Average Speed – Average speed driven  
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resetting the maintenance interval  
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi  
(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.  
LHA0898  
LHA0839  
Changing the maintenance interval  
Displaying the maintenance notice re-  
minder  
Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys using  
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button to display the screen to change the main-  
tenance interval.  
Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key and press  
the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE  
INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte-  
nance interval. The indicator light will illuminate  
when it is ON.  
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-  
troller and press the ENTER button. Use the  
NISSAN controller to change the maintenance  
interval, to accept the changes, press the BACK  
button.  
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-  
tomatically displayed as shown when both of the  
following conditions are met:  
●
The vehicle is driven the set distance and the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.  
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-  
sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.  
Traffic Info.  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-  
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press  
the BACK button.  
Where am I?  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays  
each time the key is turned ON until one of the  
following conditions are met:  
GPS Satellite Info.  
●
●
The “Reset” key is selected.  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to  
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).  
●
The maintenance interval is set again.  
LHA0908  
Other items  
Press the INFO button and select the “Others”  
key using the NISSAN controller and press the  
ENTER button to view information on the naviga-  
tion and voice recognition systems.  
Voice recognition  
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN  
Voice Recognition system (if so equipped)” later  
in this section.  
Navigation version  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA0884  
LHA0901  
LHA0902  
Brightness/contrast:  
HOW TO USE THE SETTING  
BUTTON  
Display settings  
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key  
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map  
background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust  
the brightness to darker or brighter and the con-  
trast to lower or higher.  
Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER  
button. The Display settings screen will appear.  
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-  
TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can  
select and/or adjust several functions, features  
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use  
the NISSAN controller to select each item to be  
set and press the ENTER button.  
The new settings are automatically saved when  
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK  
button or any other mode button.  
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To turn the screen on:  
●
Press the SETTING button and select the  
“Display” key and then select the “Display  
ON”key. Then set the screen to on by press-  
ing the ENTER button, or  
●
Hold the  
OFF button for approxi-  
mately two seconds and the message “re-  
suming display” will appear and the “Display  
ON” key will be automatically turned on (no  
amber indicator).  
Background color:  
Select the “Background Color” key; the display  
color changes between day and night.  
WHA0823  
LHA0904  
Display off:  
Clock  
The new settings are automatically saved when  
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK  
button or any other mode button.  
Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the  
“Display ON” turns amber and the message  
above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,  
HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode  
button on the control panel is operated, the dis-  
play turns on for that operation. If one of the  
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will  
not automatically turn off until that operation is  
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-  
matically after five seconds.  
The following display will appear after pressing  
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”  
key using the NISSAN controller and pressing  
the ENTER button.  
On-screen Clock:  
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-  
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper  
right corner of the screen.  
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly  
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock Format:  
●
●
●
●
Atlantic  
Choose either the 12h (12–hour) clock display or  
the 24h (24–hour) clock display.  
Newfoundland  
Hawaii  
Offset Adjust:  
Alaska  
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per  
minute.  
After selection/settings, press the BACK button  
or any other mode button to accept the changes.  
Daylight Saving Time:  
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-  
nated), daylight saving time is on. To turn off the  
daylight saving time, touch the “ON” key; the  
amber indicator light will disappear.  
LHA0905  
Time Zone:  
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone  
screen will appear.  
Select one of the following zones, depending on  
the current location, by selecting the correct time  
zone key and pressing the ENTER button to  
enable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-  
nate for that location).  
●
●
●
●
Pacific  
Mountain  
Central  
Eastern  
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA1203  
WHA1204  
WHA1205  
Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or  
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when  
any door is unlocked.  
Remote Key Response Horn: Select to turn  
on or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the  
LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.  
Comfort & Convenience settings  
Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the  
NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-  
ton. The comfort and convenience option screen  
will be displayed.  
Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjust  
the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher  
(right) or lower (left).  
NOTE:  
If you change the horn beep or the lamp  
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will  
not be changed with the display. Use the  
keyfob to return to the previous mode and  
re-enable the display control.  
You can set the following operating conditions by  
selecting the desired item using the NISSAN  
controller, then pressing the ENTER button. The  
indicator light (box at the right of the selected  
item) alternately turns on and off each time the  
ENTER button is pressed.  
Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to change  
the duration of the automatic headlight off timer  
from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 second  
periods.  
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn  
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-  
cally according to the vehicle speed.  
Indicator light is illuminated — ON  
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Key Response Lights: Select to turn  
on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode  
used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the  
keyfob is pressed.  
Intelligent Key Lock Reply: Select to change  
the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when  
a door handle request switch is pushed to lock.  
Select to turn off all sounds made when a door  
handle request switch is pushed, by selecting the  
“OFF” key.  
NOTE:  
If you change the horn beep or the light  
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will  
not be changed with the display. Use the  
keyfob to return to the previous mode and  
re-enable the display control.  
Intelligent Key Unlock Reply: Select to  
change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode  
used when a door handle request switch is  
pushed to unlock.  
Select to turn off all sounds made when a door  
handle request switch is pushed, by selecting the  
“OFF” key.  
Auto Re-Lock Time: Select to set the length of  
time before doors automatically re-lock.  
LHA0909  
Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turn  
on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backwards  
for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF  
position and the driver’s door is opened. After  
getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition  
switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat  
moves to the previous position.  
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is  
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first  
after the door unlock operation. When the door  
handle request switch on the driver’s or front  
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,  
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All  
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock  
operation is performed again within one minute.  
Others settings  
Select the “Others” key by using the NISSAN  
controller and pressing the ENTER button. Voice  
recognition, language and units setting screen  
will be displayed.  
Voice Recognition:  
Return All Settings to Default: Select to  
change all the comfort and convenience systems  
to their default settings.  
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN  
Voice Recognition system (if so equipped)” later  
in this section.  
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will  
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is  
performed once.  
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn  
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by  
pushing the door handle request switch.  
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA0911  
LHA0912  
LHA0913  
Language / Units:  
Select Language:  
Select Units:  
Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-  
guage / Units” key and press the ENTER button.  
Select which setting you want to change using  
the NISSAN controller and selecting either the  
“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” key  
by pressing the ENTER button.  
Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to  
change the language shown on the display.  
Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”  
(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units  
shown on the display.  
If you select the “Français” key, French language  
will be displayed so please use the French Own-  
er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,  
please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-  
der Information” in the “Technical and consumer  
information” section.  
Audio settings  
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System”later in  
this section.  
Navigation settings  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding these set-  
tings.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Volume and beeps settings  
OFF BUTTON  
Navigation volume  
To change the display brightness, press  
the  
will change the display to the day  
night display. The brightness can then be  
OFF button. Pressing the button again  
For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa-  
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-  
mation regarding these settings.  
or the  
adjusted using the NISSAN controller.  
Phone volume  
If no operation is performed within 10 seconds,  
the display will return to the previous display.  
For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation Sys-  
tem” later in this section.  
Press and hold the  
OFF button for more  
than two seconds to turn the display off. Press  
the button again to turn the display on.  
WHA0903  
Beep setting  
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a  
beep will sound if any control panel button is  
pressed.  
Phone settings  
For phone settings refer to “Bluetoothா Hands-  
Free Phone System With Navigation System”  
later in this section.  
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so  
equipped)  
When the shift selector is shifted into the R  
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the  
view directly to the rear of the vehicle.  
● When washing the vehicle with high-  
pressure water, be sure not to spray it  
around the camera. Otherwise, water  
may enter the camera unit causing wa-  
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-  
function, fire or an electric shock.  
WARNING  
● The system is designed as an aid to the  
driver in detecting large stationary ob-  
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-  
hicle. The system will not detect small  
objects below the bumper, and may not  
detect objects close to the bumper or  
on the ground.  
● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-  
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-  
function or cause damage resulting in a  
fire or an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
● The RearView Monitor is a convenience  
but it is not a substitute for proper back-  
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe  
to do so before backing up. Always  
back up slowly.  
There is a plastic cover over the camera.  
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning  
dirt or snow from the cover.  
LHA0437  
They are indicated as reference distances to  
objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-  
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED  
LINES  
A
cate distances from the back bumper line  
the illustration.  
in  
᭺
● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-  
tor differ from actual distance because  
a wide-angle lens is used.  
1
1.5 ft (0.5 m) red  
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and  
᭺
distances to objects with reference to the  
2
3 ft (1 m) yellow  
᭺
A
bumper line  
are displayed on the monitor.  
● Make sure that the lift gate is securely  
closed when backing up.  
᭺
3
7 ft (2 m) green  
᭺
4
● Do not put anything on the rearview  
camera. The rearview camera is in-  
stalled beside the lift gate handle.  
10 ft (3 m) green  
᭺
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than  
the actual clearance.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-  
tor may differ somewhat from those of the  
actual object.  
OPERATING TIPS  
●
When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-  
verse), the monitor screen automatically  
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.  
However, the radio can be heard.  
When the contrast of objects is low at night,  
pressing the SETTING button may not  
change the brightness.  
●
It may take some time until the RearView  
Monitor is displayed after the shift selector  
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects  
may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-  
View Monitor screen is displayed com-  
pletely. When the shift selector is returned to  
a position other than R (Reverse), it may take  
some time until the screen changes. Objects  
on the screen may be distorted until they are  
completely displayed.  
●
●
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a  
dark place or at night.  
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,  
the RearView Monitor may not display ob-  
jects. Clean the camera.  
●
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to  
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-  
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth  
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent  
and then wipe with a dry cloth.  
LHA1021  
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN  
To adjust the quality of the screen, press the  
SETTING button.  
●
When the temperature is extremely high or  
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-  
jects. This is not a malfunction.  
●
●
Do not damage the camera as the monitor  
screen may be adversely affected.  
●
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,  
Tint, Color, Contrast, and Black Level of the  
RearView Monitor, press the SETTING but-  
ton with the RearView Monitor on, then  
touch one of the adjustment keys. Press the  
“–” or “+” key on the item and adjust the  
level.  
Do not use body wax on the camera window.  
If body wax does get on the camera window,  
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-  
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.  
●
●
When strong light directly enters the cam-  
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.  
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the  
screen. This is due to strong reflected light  
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.  
●
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint  
and Color of the RearView Monitor while the  
vehicle is moving.  
●
The screen may flicker under fluorescent  
light. This is not a malfunction.  
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VENTS  
LHA1030  
Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-  
1
2
senger’s side vents , center vents , and rear  
᭺
᭺
3
4
passengers’ vents  
and  
by moving the vent  
᭺
᭺
slide and/or vent assemblies.  
1
For the driver’s and passenger’s side vents  
,
᭺
open or close by using the dial. Move the dial  
toward the  
toward the  
position to open the vents or  
position to close them.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER  
(automatic)  
● Do not use the recirculation mode for  
long periods as it may cause the interior  
air to become stale and the windows to  
fog up.  
Start the engine and operate the controls to  
activate the air conditioner.  
AUTOMATIC OPERATION  
Cooling or heating (auto)  
This mode may be normally used all year round as  
the system automatically works to keep a con-  
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan  
speed are also controlled automatically.  
LHA0859  
1. Driver’s temperature control dial/AUTO  
button  
2. A/C ON/OFF button  
3. Fan speed control (increase)  
4. Front window defroster button  
5. MODE button  
6. Passenger’s temperature control dial/  
DUAL button  
7. System OFF  
WARNING  
1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be  
displayed.)  
● The air conditioner cooling function op-  
erates only when the engine is running.  
2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control  
dial to the left or right to set the desired  
temperature. Driver and passenger tem-  
peratures can be set independently. Press  
DUAL to activate dual climate control func-  
tions. Turn the passenger’s side temperature  
control dial to the left or right to set the  
desired passenger’s temperature.  
● Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the assistance  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should also not be left alone. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or  
others through inadvertent operation of  
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,  
temperatures in a closed vehicle could  
quickly become high enough to cause  
severe or possibly fatal injuries to  
people or animals.  
8. Fan speed control (decrease)  
9. Rear window defroster button  
10. Air recirculation button  
●
Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F  
(24°C) for normal operation.  
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-  
ment will be maintained automatically. Air  
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off  
are also controlled automatically.  
or the A/C button is pressed even if the air  
flow MODE control button is used to select a  
Air flow control  
Pushing the MODE button manually controls air  
flow and selects the air outlet:  
position other than the  
position. This  
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the  
windshield. The air recirculation mode auto-  
matically turns off, allowing outside air to be  
drawn into the passenger compartment to  
further improve the defogging performance.  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents.  
— Air flows from center and side  
A visible mist may be seen coming from the  
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is  
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-  
function.  
vents and foot outlets.  
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.  
— Air flows from defroster and foot  
outlets.  
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging  
MANUAL OPERATION  
1. Push the defroster control button  
to  
Fan speed control buttons  
turn the system on. The display will show the  
defrost icon.  
— Air flows from defroster outlets.  
Press the fan speed control buttons  
to manually control the fan speed.  
+ / –  
To turn system off  
Press the OFF button.  
OPERATING TIPS  
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right  
to set the desired temperature.  
Press OFF to turn the system off.  
●
●
●
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the  
windows, press the fan control speed button  
until it reaches the maximum speed  
Push the AUTO button to return to automatic  
control of the fan speed.  
●
When the engine coolant temperature and  
outside air temperature are low, the air flow  
from the foot outlets may not operate for a  
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is  
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-  
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets  
will operate normally.  
.
Air recirculation  
As soon as possible after the windshield is  
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the  
auto mode.  
The  
mode automatically turns off, allowing  
outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-  
partment to prevent fogging in defrost, floor or  
def/floor modes.  
When the defroster control button  
is  
activated, the air conditioner will automati-  
cally be turned on at outside temperatures  
above 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for  
more than one minute, the air conditioning  
system will continue to operate until the fan  
control is turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off,  
Push the air recirculation button  
culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the  
AUTO button to return to automatic mode.  
to recir-  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER  
LIC0836  
LHA0863  
LHA0861  
1
The sunload sensor , located on the top center  
Rear seat temperature and fan speed can be  
1. Rear fan speed control dial  
2. Rear airflow mode buttons  
3. Rear temperature control dial  
᭺
of the instrument panel, helps the system main-  
tain a constant temperature. Do not put anything  
on or around this sensor.  
controlled from both the front seat overhead con-  
A
sole controls  
sole controls  
or the rear seat overhead con-  
᭺
B
.
᭺
Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer control  
of the rear climate functions to the rear passen-  
gers.  
To operate the rear air conditioner, the engine  
must be running.  
If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the air  
conditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fan  
speed positions, air is discharged from the rear  
vents at the corresponding speed.  
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER  
AUDIO SYSTEM  
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-  
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with  
the environment in mind.  
RADIO  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF  
(power) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to  
the radio with the engine not running, the ignition  
switch should be placed in the ACC position.  
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s  
ozone layer.  
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-  
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-  
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants  
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner  
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant  
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section of this manual.  
Radio reception is affected by station signal  
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-  
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-  
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality  
normally are caused by these external influences.  
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-  
hicle may influence radio reception quality.  
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-  
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.  
WHA1129  
CONTROLS  
Radio reception  
WARNING  
Fan control dial  
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with  
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-  
dio reception. These circuits are designed to  
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-  
ity of that reception.  
The air conditioner system contains re-  
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid  
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-  
vice should be done only by an experi-  
enced technician with proper equipment.  
The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and  
off and controls fan speed.  
Airflow mode buttons  
The airflow mode buttons select where the air  
flow is directed from.  
However, there are some general characteristics  
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect  
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even  
when the finest equipment is used. These char-  
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-  
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction  
in your NISSAN radio system.  
Temperature control dial  
The temperature control dial allows rear passen-  
gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reception conditions will constantly change be-  
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,  
signal distance and interference from other ve-  
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-  
scribed below are some of the factors that can  
affect your radio reception.  
(usually in conjunction with increased distance  
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can  
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the  
treble control to reduce treble response.  
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so  
equipped)  
When the satellite radio is used for the first time  
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite  
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-  
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite  
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or  
large building for satellite radio to receive all of  
the necessary data.  
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective  
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected  
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The  
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-  
mentary flutter or loss of sound.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come  
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-  
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-  
nate the noise.  
AM RADIO RECEPTION  
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an  
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-  
stalled and an XMா* satellite radio service sub-  
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can  
bend around objects and skip along the ground.  
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the  
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of  
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-  
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter  
to receiver.  
FM RADIO RECEPTION  
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi  
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM  
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-  
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM  
station reception even if the FM station is within  
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is  
directly related to the distance between the  
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-  
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-  
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect  
off objects.  
Satellite radio performance may be affected if  
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio  
signal.  
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing  
through freeway underpasses or in areas with  
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several  
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in  
areas where no obstacles exist.  
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite  
antenna.  
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can  
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the  
ice to restore satellite radio reception.  
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical  
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.  
* XMா is a registered trademark of XM Satellite  
Radio, Inc.  
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from  
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade  
and/or drift.  
Static and flutter: During signal interference from  
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position  
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-  
light.  
Compact disc (CD) player  
CAUTION  
CDs that are in poor condition or are  
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-  
prints may not work properly.  
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD  
insert slot. This could damage the CD  
and/or CD changer/player.  
●
The following CDs may not work prop-  
erly:  
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door  
closed could damage the CD and/or CD  
changer.  
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)  
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)  
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)  
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD  
player at a time.  
●
Do not use the following CDs as they  
may cause the CD player to malfunc-  
tion:  
●
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)  
round discs that have the “COMPACT  
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc  
or packaging.  
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter  
● CDs that are not round  
During cold weather or rainy days, the  
player may malfunction due to the hu-  
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD  
and dehumidify or ventilate the player  
completely.  
● CDs with a paper label  
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or  
have abnormal edges  
LHA0099  
●
●
This audio system can only play pre-  
recorded CDs. It has no capability to  
record or burn CDs.  
●
●
The player may skip while driving on  
rough roads.  
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS  
The CD player sometimes cannot func-  
tion when the compartment tempera-  
ture is extremely high or low.  
Decrease/increase the temperature  
before use.  
If the CD cannot be played, one of the  
following messages will be displayed.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHECK DISC:  
●
The CF player sometimes cannot function  
when the passenger compartment tempera-  
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-  
perature before use.  
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a  
compressed audio format created by Mi-  
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA  
codec offers greater file compression than  
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more  
digital audio tracks in the same amount of  
space when compared to MP3s at the same  
level of quality.  
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-  
rectly (the label side is facing up,  
etc.).  
●
●
Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.  
Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.  
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or  
warped and it is free of scratches.  
PRESS EJECT:  
Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlashா  
(CF) with MP3 or WMA (if so  
equipped)  
●
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of  
bits per second used by a digital music file.  
The size and quality of a compressed digital  
audio file is determined by the bit rate used  
when encoding the file.  
This is an error due to excessive tem-  
perature inside the player. Remove the  
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After  
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD  
can be played when the temperature of  
the player returns to normal.  
Terms:  
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures  
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the  
most well-known compressed digital audio  
file format. This format allows for near “CD  
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of  
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an  
audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file  
size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:  
44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no  
perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compres-  
sion removes the redundant and irrelevant  
parts of a sound signal that the human ear  
doesn’t hear.  
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency  
is the rate at which the samples of a signal  
are converted from analog to digital (A/D  
conversion) per second.  
UNPLAYABLE:  
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-  
tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)  
CD).  
Multisession — Multisession is one of the  
methods for writing data to media. Writing  
data once to the media is called a single  
session, and writing more than once is called  
a multisession.  
CompactFlashா (CF) player (if so  
equipped)  
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the  
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that  
contains information about the digital music  
file such as song title, artist, album title,  
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.  
ID3 tag information is displayed on the  
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.  
●
Do not force a CF card into the slot. This  
could damage the CF card and/or player.  
●
During cold weather or rainy days, the player  
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this  
occurs, remove the CF card and dehumidify  
or ventilate the player completely.  
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* Windowsா and Windows Mediaா are regis-  
tered trademarks and trademarks of the Mi-  
crosoft Corporation in the United States of  
America and/or other countries.  
Playback order:  
Music playback order of a CD/CF with MP3 or  
WMA files is as illustrated.  
●
●
●
The names of folders not containing MP3 or  
WMA files are not shown in the display.  
CompactFlashா is a registered trademark of the  
SanDiskா Corporation in the United States of  
America and/or other countries.  
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,  
“Root Folder” is displayed.  
The playback order is the order in which the  
files were written by the writing software.  
Therefore, the files might not play in the  
desired order.  
WHA1078  
Playback order chart  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specification chart:  
Supported media  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW:  
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.  
Supported file systems  
CompactFlash card: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32  
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5  
8 kHz - 48 kHz  
Version  
MP3  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4  
Supported  
versions*1  
WMA*2 Version  
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
32 kHz - 48 kHz  
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4  
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)  
WMA tag (WMA only)  
Tag information  
Folder levels  
With navigation system:  
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)  
Without navigation system:  
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)  
With navigation system: 128 characters  
Without navigation system: 64 characters  
Text character number limitation  
Displayable character codes*3  
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:  
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)  
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.  
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.  
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.  
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.  
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting guide:  
Symptom  
Cause and Countermeasure  
Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.  
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.  
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.  
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.  
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.  
Cannot play  
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for  
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.  
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applica-  
tions or other text editing applications.  
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.  
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.  
Poor sound quality  
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.  
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts  
before the music starts  
playing.  
playing.  
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the  
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.  
Music cuts off or skips  
Skipping with high bit rate  
files  
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.  
Moves immediately to the  
next song when playing  
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the  
player will skip to the next song.  
Songs do not play back in  
the desired order  
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA0944  
1. RADIO AM·FM button*  
2. PRESET A·B·C button  
3. RPT button  
7. REAR CTRL button  
8. SCAN button  
9. TRACK button  
10. SEEK/CAT button  
11. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob  
13. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons  
14.  
15. VOL/ON·OFF control knob  
16. DISC·AUX button  
CD eject button  
4.  
speaker control button  
5. RDM button  
6. PAUSE·MUTE button  
12.  
CD load button  
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the  
volume.  
*When the RADIO AM·FM button is  
pressed, the satellite radio mode will be  
skipped unless an optional satellite re-  
ceiver and antenna are installed and an  
XMா satellite radio service subscription  
is active. Satellite radio is not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)  
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-  
ing speed changes.  
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Balance  
and Fade):  
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH  
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if  
so equipped)  
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the  
mode as follows:  
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade  
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-  
tion precautions” earlier in this section.  
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press  
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode  
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to  
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You  
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and  
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level  
between the front and rear speakers and Balance  
adjusts the sound between the right and left  
speakers.  
LHA0927  
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an  
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-  
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-  
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):  
To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press  
the SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” key  
using the NISSAN controller, then press the EN-  
TER button. The audio settings screen will be  
displayed. Select the “–” key or “+” key, then  
press the ENTER button to change the SSV.  
Audio main operation  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-  
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.  
Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-  
cally reappear after about 10 seconds.  
VOL/ON·OFF control:  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and then push the VOL/ON·OFF control  
knob while the system is off to call up the mode  
(radio or CD) which was playing immediately  
before the system was turned off.  
While in this screen you can also adjust the other  
audio settings by selecting the corresponding  
key.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the BACK button.  
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF  
control knob.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While in this screen, you can also adjust the other  
audio settings by selecting the corresponding  
key.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the BACK button.  
For information on how to use the NISSAN con-  
troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”  
earlier in this section.  
Clock set:  
For setting the clock, see “Clock” under the  
“Control panel buttons – color screen without  
navigation system” heading earlier in this section.  
WHA0941  
WHA0928  
For information on how to use the NISSAN con-  
troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”  
earlier in this section.  
Precision phased audio (if so equipped):  
To turn on or off the precision phased audio,  
press the SETTING button. Select the “Audio”  
key using the NISSAN controller, then press the  
ENTER button, the audio settings screen will be  
displayed. Select the “Precision Phased Audio”  
key, then press the ENTER button. If the amber  
indicator light is displayed, the precision phased  
audio is enabled. Pressing the ENTER button  
again will turn off the precision phased audio, the  
indicator light will disappear.  
When this item is turned on, super high pitch  
sound and super low pitch sound are empha-  
sized and midrange sound is played naturally.  
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAUSE·MUTE button:  
To mute or pause the audio sound, press the  
PAUSE·MUTE button.  
Press the PAUSE·MUTE button again to resume  
the audio sound.  
FM/AM/SAT radio operation  
FM/AM/SAT band select:  
Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will change  
the band as follows:  
AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)  
When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed while  
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,  
the radio will come on at the station last played.  
WHA0946  
WHA0947  
●
●
●
●
●
Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
song name.  
CD/MP3 display mode  
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD  
certain text might be able to be displayed (when  
CD encoded with text is being used).  
Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
album name.  
The last station played will also come on when  
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.  
Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
artist’s name.  
*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, the  
satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an  
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-  
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-  
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is  
encoded the following text might be able to be  
displayed by selecting the “Text” key using the  
NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-  
ton:  
Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-  
rently playing.  
Track displays the name of the song on the  
CD currently playing.  
●
Folder displays the name of the current  
folder being accessed.  
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO  
AM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc will  
automatically be turned off and the last radio  
station played will come on.  
Some of this text or modes might not display  
while playing a regular CD. Press the BACK  
button to exit the CD text display screen.  
●
File displays the name of the file currently  
playing.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during  
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast  
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change  
from stereo to monaural reception.  
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-  
tions):  
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but  
many stations are now considering broadcasting  
RDS data.  
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT  
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C  
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or  
SAT stations.  
RDS can display:  
TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:  
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.  
Station name, such as “The Groove”.  
To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR  
knob to the right or left.  
1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the  
PRESET A·B·C select button.  
Music or programming type such as “Clas-  
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.  
SEEK/CAT and TRACK  
tuning buttons:  
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station  
band.  
●
Artist and song information.  
Press the SEEK/CAT  
TRACK button for less than 1.5 seconds  
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-  
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.  
button or the  
3. Tune to the desired station using manual,  
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any  
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –  
6) until a beep sound is heard.  
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the  
RDS icon is displayed.  
Compact disc (CD) changer operation  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
SCAN tuning:  
4. The channel indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Programming is now  
complete.  
position and press the  
button, then press  
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-  
casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the  
SCAN button again during this 5 second period  
will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain  
tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not  
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to  
the next station.  
one of the CD insert (1–6) slots. Insert the com-  
pact disc into the slot with the label side facing  
up. The compact disc will be guided automati-  
cally into the slot and start playing.  
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-  
ner.  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-  
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.  
If the system has been turned off while the com-  
pact disc was playing, pressing the  
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact  
disc.  
Radio data system (RDS):  
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data  
information service transmitted by some radio  
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-  
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
times to skip back through tracks. The compact  
disc will go back the number of times the button  
is pressed.  
When the CD button is pressed with the com-  
pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play-  
ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned  
off and the compact disc will start to play.  
button:  
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press  
When the TRACK  
button is pressed while  
the  
button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se-  
lect the loading slot by pressing the CD insert  
select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.  
TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob  
the compact disc is playing, the next track will  
start to play from its beginning. Press several  
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc  
will advance the number of times the button is  
pressed. (When the last track on the compact  
disc is skipped through, the first track will be  
played.)  
While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the  
TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or  
backward through available folders.  
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press and  
hold the  
button for more than 1.5 seconds.  
CD select buttons:  
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the  
display when CDs are loaded into the changer.  
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a  
CD select button (1 – 6).  
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-  
lect tracks when a CD is being played.  
DISC·AUX button:  
RPT button:  
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the  
system off and the compact disc loaded, the  
system will turn on and the compact disc will start  
to play.  
When the RPT button is pressed while the com-  
pact disc is played, the play pattern can be  
changed as follows:  
SEEK/CAT and TRACK  
(Rewind·Fast Forward)  
buttons:  
CD:  
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the  
compact disc loaded with the radio playing, the  
radio will automatically be turned off and the  
compact disc will start to play.  
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT  
(rewind)  
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRK RPT →  
ALL DISC RPT  
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button  
while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc  
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When  
the button is released, the compact disc will  
return to normal play speed.  
MP3/WMA CD:  
SEEK/CAT and TRACK  
buttons:  
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER  
RPT → 1 TRK RPT → ALL DISC RPT  
ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.  
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will  
be repeated.  
When the CD button is pressed with the system  
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will  
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.  
When the SEEK/CAT  
while a compact disc is playing, the track being  
played returns to its beginning. Press several  
button is pressed  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 TRK RPT: The track that is currently playing will  
be repeated  
1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently being  
accessed will be repeated.  
REAR CTRL:  
CD EJECT:  
Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear  
seat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-  
LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRL  
button again to turn the rear seat audio controller  
off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If the  
vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio  
controller, the display will show “Rear Controls  
Not Available”.  
Current/Selected disc:  
●
Press the  
button, then press the slot  
RDM button:  
number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The  
compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-  
ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded  
disc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is not  
removed within 15 seconds, the disc will  
reload.  
When the RDM button is pressed while the com-  
pact disc is played, the play pattern can be  
changed as follows:  
CD:  
Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-  
proximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear dis-  
play screen. Rear Display ON will display. Press  
and hold the REAR CTRL button again will turn  
the rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF will  
display. If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear  
display screen, the display will show “Rear Con-  
trols Not Available”.  
ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → ALL DISC MIX  
MP3/WMA CD:  
All discs:  
●
Press and hold the  
button for more  
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be  
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed  
ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → 1 FOLDER MIX  
→ ALL DISC MIX  
within 15 seconds or the  
button is  
ALL DISC MIX: All discs loaded will be played in  
a mixed order.  
1 DISC MIX: The tracks on the disc that is cur-  
rently playing will be played in a mixed order.  
1 FOLDER MIX: The tracks in the folder that is  
currently being accessed will be played in a  
mixed order.  
pressed again during the eject sequence,  
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-  
celed.  
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:  
Press the  
button to turn the rear speakers  
When this button is pressed while a compact  
disc is playing, the compact disc will eject and  
the last source will be played.  
off and the headphones on. Press this button  
again to turn rear seat speakers back on and the  
headphones off.  
CD IN indicator:  
SCAN button:  
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs  
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode  
only.  
While listening to a CD, press the SCAN button  
to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on  
the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again  
during this 10 second period stops the scan and  
the CD remains on that track.  
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA0948  
AUX jack  
1
The AUX jack  
is located below the air condi-  
᭺
tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts  
any standard analog audio input, such as from a  
portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or a  
laptop computer.  
Press the DISC·AUX button to play a compatible  
device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA0945  
1. PRESET A·B·C button  
2. DISC/AUX button  
7. SEEK/CAT button  
13. AM·FM/SAT button*  
14. MUSIC BOX button  
8. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob  
9. CompactFlashா insert slot  
10. Station select (1 - 6) buttons  
3.  
speaker control button  
4. REAR CTRL button  
5. SCAN·RPT button  
6. TRACK button  
11.  
CD eject button  
12. VOL/ON·OFF control knob  
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the  
volume.  
*When the AM·FM/SAT button is  
pressed, the satellite radio mode will be  
skipped unless an optional satellite re-  
ceiver and antenna are installed and an  
XMா satellite radio service subscription  
is active. Satellite radio is not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)  
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-  
ing speed changes.  
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Balance  
and Fade):  
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH  
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so  
equipped)  
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the  
mode as follows:  
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade  
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-  
tion precautions” earlier in this section.  
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press  
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode  
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to  
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You  
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and  
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level  
between the front and rear speakers and Balance  
adjusts the sound between the right and left  
speakers.  
LHA0884  
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an  
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-  
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-  
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):  
To change the SSV mode from OFF (0) to 5,  
press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-  
dio” key and the audio settings screen will be  
displayed. Touch the “–”key or “+”key, to change  
the SSV.  
Audio main operation  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-  
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.  
Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-  
cally reappear after about 10 seconds.  
VOL/ON·OFF control:  
While in this screen you can also adjust the other  
audio settings by touching the corresponding  
key.  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and then push the VOL/ON·OFF control  
knob while the system is off to call up the mode  
(radio or CD) which was playing immediately  
before the system was turned off.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, touch the “BACK” key.  
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF  
control knob.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While in this screen, you can also adjust the other  
audio settings by touching the corresponding  
key.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, touch the “BACK” key.  
Clock set:  
For setting the clock, see “Clock” under the  
“Control panel buttons – color screen without  
navigation system” heading earlier in this section.  
LHA0900  
WHA0942  
Precision phased audio (if so equipped):  
To turn on or off the precision phased audio,  
press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-  
dio” key; the audio settings screen will be dis-  
played. Touch the “Precision Phased Audio ON”  
key. If the amber indicator light is displayed, the  
precision phased audio is enabled. Touching the  
“Precision Phased Audio ON” key again will turn  
off the precision phased audio; the indicator light  
will disappear.  
When this item is turned on, super high pitch  
sound and super low pitch sound are empha-  
sized and midrange sound is played naturally.  
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM/AM/SAT radio operation  
FM/AM/SAT band select:  
Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will change  
the band as follows:  
AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)  
When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed while  
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,  
the radio will come on at the station last played.  
The last station played will also come on when  
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.  
*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, the  
satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an  
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-  
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-  
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
WHA0949  
WHA0950  
●
●
●
●
Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
album name.  
CD/MP3 display mode  
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD  
certain text might be able to be displayed (when  
CD encoded with text is being used).  
Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
artist’s name.  
Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-  
rently playing.  
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO  
AM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc will  
automatically be turned off and the last radio  
station played will come on.  
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is  
encoded the following text might be able to be  
displayed by touching the “Text” key:  
Track displays the name of the song on the  
CD currently playing.  
●
●
●
Folder displays the name of the current  
folder being accessed.  
The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during  
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast  
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change  
from stereo to monaural reception.  
Some of this text or modes might not display  
while playing a regular CD. Press the BACK  
button to exit the CD text display screen.  
File displays the name of the file currently  
playing.  
Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
song name.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:  
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station  
band.  
●
Artist and song information.  
To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR  
knob to the right or left.  
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the  
RDS icon is displayed.  
3. Tune to the desired station using manual,  
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any  
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –  
6) until a beep sound is heard.  
SEEK/CAT and TRACK  
tuning buttons:  
Compact disc (CD) player operation  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and insert the compact disc into the slot  
with the label side facing up. The compact disc  
will be guided automatically into the slot and start  
playing.  
4. The channel indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Programming is now  
complete.  
Press the SEEK/CAT  
TRACK button for less than 1.5 seconds  
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-  
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.  
button or the  
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-  
ner.  
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-  
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.  
SCAN·RPT (SCAN tuning) button:  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
Press the SCAN·RPT button to initiate scan tun-  
ing. Scan tuning will stop at each broadcasting  
station for 5 seconds. Press the SCAN·RPT but-  
ton again during this 5 second period to stop  
scan tuning; the radio will remain tuned to that  
station. If the SCAN·RPT button is not pressed  
within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next  
station.  
If the system has been turned off while the com-  
pact disc was playing, pressing the  
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact  
disc.  
Radio data system (RDS):  
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data  
information service transmitted by some radio  
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-  
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but  
many stations are now considering broadcasting  
RDS data.  
DISC/AUX button:  
When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the  
system off and the compact disc loaded, the  
system will turn on and the compact disc will start  
to play.  
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-  
tions):  
RDS can display:  
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT  
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C  
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or  
SAT stations.  
When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the  
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the  
radio will automatically be turned off and the  
compact disc will start to play.  
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.  
Station name, such as “The Groove”.  
1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the  
PRESET A·B·C select button.  
Music or programming type such as “Clas-  
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.  
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the button is released, the compact disc will  
return to normal play speed.  
1 DISC RPT: the entire disc will be repeated.  
1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be  
repeated.  
1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly.  
1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-  
cessed will be repeated.  
SEEK/CAT and TRACK  
buttons:  
When the CD button is pressed with the system  
off and the compact disc loaded the system will  
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.  
When the SEEK/CAT  
button is pressed  
while a compact disc is playing, the track being  
played returns to its beginning. Press several  
times to skip back through tracks. The compact  
disc will go back the number of times the button  
is pressed.  
When the CD button is pressed with the com-  
pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play-  
ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned  
off and the compact disc will start to play.  
1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folder  
being accessed will be played randomly.  
REAR CTRL:  
Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear  
seat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-  
LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRL  
button again will turn the rear seat audio control-  
ler off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If the  
vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio  
controller, the display will show “Rear Controls  
Not Available”.  
TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob  
When the TRACK  
button is pressed while  
the compact disc is playing, the next track will  
start to play from its beginning. Press several  
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc  
will advance the number of times the button is  
pressed. (When the last track on the compact  
disc is skipped through, the first track will be  
played.)  
While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the  
TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or  
backward through available folders.  
SCAN·RPT (random and repeat) button:  
When the SCAN·RPT button is pressed while the  
compact disc is being played, the play pattern  
can be changed as follows:  
Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-  
proximately 1.5 seconds to turn the rear display  
screen on. Rear Display ON will display. Press  
and hold the REAR CTRL button again to turn the  
rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF will  
display. If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear  
display screen, the display will show “Rear Con-  
trols Not Available”.  
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-  
lect tracks when a CD is being played.  
CD:  
1 DISC RPT → 1 TRK RPT → 1 DISC RDM → 1  
SEEK/CAT and TRACK  
(Rewind·Fast Forward)  
buttons:  
DISC RPT  
MP3/WMA CD:  
1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT →  
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT  
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button  
(rewind)  
1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → 1 DISC RPT  
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc  
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:  
Press the  
button to turn the rear speakers  
off and the headphones on. Press this button  
again to turn rear seat speakers back on and the  
headphones off.  
CD EJECT button:  
When the  
button is pressed with the com-  
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be  
ejected.  
When the  
button is pressed while the  
WHA0948  
LHA0952  
compact disc is being played, the compact disc  
will eject and the system will turn off.  
AUX jack  
COMPACTFLASHா (CF) PLAYER  
1
OPERATION (if so equipped)  
The AUX jack  
is located below the air condi-  
᭺
tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts  
any standard analog audio input, such as from a  
portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or a  
laptop computer.  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
1
position, and insert a CF card  
into the Com-  
. Then press the  
DISC/AUX button repeatedly to switch to the  
᭺
2
pactFlashா player slot  
᭺
Press the DISC/AUX button to play a compatible  
device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.  
CompactFlashா mode.  
If the system has been turned off while the Com-  
pactFlashா card was playing, pressing the  
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the Com-  
pactFlashா card.  
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DISC/AUX button:  
When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the  
system off and the CF card inserted, the system  
will turn on. If another audio source is playing and  
a CF card is inserted, press the DISC/AUX but-  
ton repeatedly until the center display changes to  
the CompactFlashா mode.  
WHA0953  
WHA0954  
●
●
Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
album name.  
CF display mode  
While listening to CF certain text might be able to  
be displayed.  
Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
artist’s name.  
Depending on how the files are encoded on the  
CF the following text might be able to be dis-  
played by touching the “Text” key:  
Press the BACK button to exit the CF text display  
screen.  
●
●
●
Folder displays the name of the current  
folder being accessed.  
File displays the name of the file currently  
playing.  
Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
song name.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
●
●
No CompactFlashா card  
A CF card is not inserted in the slot.  
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:  
SCAN·RPT button:  
Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while the CF  
card is playing changes the play pattern as fol-  
lows:  
Press the  
card is playing to return to the beginning of the  
current track. Press the TRACK button  
SEEK/CAT button while the CF  
CompactFlashா read error  
The system cannot read the CF card.  
while the CF card is playing to skip to the begin-  
ning of the next track.  
Unplayable file  
The system cannot play a music file.  
1 CF CARD RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK  
RPT → 1 CF CARD RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM →  
1 CF CARD RPT  
No audio file  
The CF card inserted in the slot or its folder  
does not contain any music files.  
If you press and hold the  
wind) button or the  
SEEK/CAT (re-  
TRACK (fast forward)  
1 CF CARD RPT: the entire CF card will be  
repeated.  
1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-  
cessed will be repeated.  
1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be  
repeated.  
1 CF CARD RDM: all the tracks on the CF card  
will be played randomly.  
1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folder  
being accessed will be played randomly.  
button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds,  
the CF card will play while rewinding or fast  
Compatibility with other media:  
forwarding. When the  
SEEK/CAT (rewind)  
If commercially available CompactFlashா  
adapter is inserted into the slot, other memory  
media can also be used.  
a
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button  
is released, the CF card will return to the normal  
playing speed.  
MUSIC BOX™ HARD DRIVE AUDIO  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-  
lect tracks when the CF card is being played.  
The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can  
store songs from CDs being played. The system  
has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and  
can record up to 200 hours (approximately 2,900  
songs).  
For more information on how to use the NISSAN  
controller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-  
ler” earlier in this section.  
CF eject:  
Press the knob next to the CF slot while a CF  
card is inserted to eject the CF card.  
Folder selection:  
To change to another folder in the CF card either: Troubleshooting messages:  
●
●
●
Turn the TUNE/FLDR knob right or left.  
Touch the desired folder key on screen.  
Use the NISSAN controller.  
The following messages will be displayed under  
certain conditions:  
●
Reading CompactFlashா  
The system is reading the CF card inserted  
in the slot.  
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music  
Box Hard Drive audio system:  
●
●
CDs without MP3/WMA files.  
Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid  
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.  
●
●
Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-  
fication in CD-Extras.  
First session of multisession disc.  
Extreme temperature conditions [below Ϫ4°F  
(Ϫ20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect  
the performance of the hard-disk.  
WHA0955  
WHA0956  
NOTE:  
●
Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se-  
lected to be recorded to the Music Box  
hard-disk drive.  
Recording CDs  
If the hard drive needs to be replaced due  
to a malfunction, all stored music data will  
be erased.  
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.  
For information on playing CDs, see “Com-  
pact Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in  
this section.  
●
●
The skip, fast forward and rewind features  
are disabled while the CD is recording.  
The recording process can be stopped at  
any time. All tracks that were played before  
the CD was stopped are stored.  
2. Touch the “REC” key. REC CD appears on  
the screen.  
●
●
Individual tracks can be deleted from the  
hard drive after the CD is recorded.  
NOTE:  
●
The system starts playing and recording the  
1st track on the CD when the “REC” key is  
selected.  
The system records faster than it plays.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the title information of the track being recorded  
is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, the  
title is automatically displayed on the screen. For  
title acquisition from the hard-disk drive, music  
recognition technology and related data are pro-  
vided by Gracenoteா.  
Stopping recording:  
To stop the recording, touch the “STOP” key on  
the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio system  
is turned off or the ignition switch is placed in the  
OFF position, the recording also stops.  
To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”  
key on the screen or use the NISSAN controller  
and press the ENTER button. The track name and  
album title are displayed on the screen.  
If a track is not recorded successfully due to  
skipping sounds, the  
symbol is displayed  
behind the track number.  
WHA0957  
The Music Box audio system cannot perform  
recording under the following conditions:  
Playing recorded songs  
Select the Music Box audio system by using one  
of the following methods:  
●
●
There is not enough space in the hard drive.  
The number of albums reaches the maximum  
of 500.  
●
Press the mode select switch on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
For information, see “Steering wheel switch  
for audio control” later in this section.  
●
The number of tracks reaches the maximum  
of 3,000.  
●
●
Press the MUSIC BOX button.  
Automatic recording:  
Give voice commands.  
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to  
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For  
more information, see “Music Box settings” later  
in this section.  
For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recog-  
nition system (if so equipped)” later in this  
section.  
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stopping playback:  
For more information on how to use the NISSAN  
controller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-  
ler” earlier in this section.  
The system stops playing when:  
●
Another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlashா  
or AUX) is selected.  
Play mode selection:  
To change to another album or artist, turn the  
TUNE/FLDR knob.  
●
●
The audio system is turned off.  
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position.  
SCAN·RPT button:  
Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while a track is  
playing changes the play pattern as follows:  
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:  
ALL Playlist RPT → 1 Playlist RPT → 1 TRK RPT  
→ ALL Playlist RDM → 1 Playlist RDM → ALL  
Playlist RPT  
Press the  
SEEK/CAT button while a track  
is playing to return to the beginning of the current  
track. Press the  
TRACK button while a  
LHA0958  
track is playing to skip to the beginning of the next  
track.  
ALL Playlist RPT: the entire playlist will be re-  
peated.  
1 Playlist RPT: the playlist currently being played  
will be repeated.  
1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be  
repeated.  
ALL Playlist RDM: all the tracks in the playlist will  
be played randomly.  
Music Box menu  
There are some options available during play-  
back. Touch the “Menu” key, then select one of  
the following that are displayed on the screen, if  
necessary. Refer to the following information for  
each item:  
If you press and hold the  
wind) button or the  
SEEK/CAT (re-  
TRACK (fast forward)  
button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds;  
the track will play while rewinding or fast forward-  
ing. When the  
SEEK/CAT (rewind) button  
●
Play by Artist  
1 Playlist RDM: the tracks in the current playlist  
will be played randomly.  
or the TRACK (fast forward) button is re-  
leased, the track will return to the normal playing  
speed.  
Plays songs by an artist whose music is  
currently being played. The artists are sorted  
in alphabetical order.  
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-  
lect tracks.  
●
Play by Album  
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are  
sorted in alphabetical order.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Play by Category  
Plays music from one of the following cat-  
egories:  
– My Favorites  
– Hit Songs  
– Kids’ Songs  
– Rarely Played  
●
Search Artists  
Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order.  
Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks  
by the artist and starts playing the first track.  
WHA1206  
LHA0960  
●
●
Play by Date  
●
Search Albums  
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are  
sorted in order of the date when they were  
stored in the system.  
Displays a list of albums in order of the date  
when they were stored in the system. Se-  
lecting an album displays all of the tracks on  
the album and starts playing the first track.  
Touch the “Sort”key to re-sort albums in one  
of the following order:  
Play by Mood  
Plays music from one of the following  
moods:  
– Rec. (Recorded) Date  
– Name  
– Relaxing Music  
– Lively Music  
– Slow Music  
– Release Year  
– Artist  
– Upbeat Music  
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Search Song Details  
●
Music Box System Info.  
Displays the following information about the  
Music Box audio system:  
● Transfer Missing Titles to CF  
Transfers the information of the album re-  
corded without titles to a CompactFlashா  
card. Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/  
for details.  
Set the conditions and touch the “Start  
Song Search” key to search for a desired  
song that is stored in the system. The con-  
ditions are as follows:  
– Music Box Used / Free Space  
Information about Saved Albums, Saved  
Tracks and Remaining Time is displayed.  
– Music Box Settings  
– Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)  
For information, see “Music Box settings”  
later in this section.  
– Mood Categories  
– Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s, ’10s  
and After)  
Number of saved tracks and their catego-  
ries (Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow  
Music, Upbeat Music and Others) are  
displayed.  
– CDDB Version  
– Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist,  
Group and Duo)  
The version of the built-in Gracenoteா  
Database is displayed.  
– Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B,  
Hip Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae,  
Folk, Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listen-  
ing, New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Re-  
ligious, World, Classical, Children’s and  
Other)  
– Deleted Items  
Information about the deleted tracks is  
displayed.  
– Search Missing Titles  
If titles are not displayed for CDs that  
have been recorded, titles can be ac-  
quired using one of the following meth-  
ods:  
●
●
Search Keywords  
Input a search keyword using the keypad  
displayed on the screen.  
For information, see “How to use the touch  
screen” earlier in this section.  
● Retrieve from HDD  
Searches the title using the database in  
the hard drive.  
Edit Albums  
● Retrieve from CF  
Searches the title from the information  
acquired on the Internet.  
Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,  
Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit  
the details using the keypad displayed on  
the screen.  
For information, see “How to use the touch  
screen” earlier in this section.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Edit Info.  
Edit the name of the track being played and  
its artist using the keypad displayed on the  
screen.  
For information, see “How to use the touch  
screen” earlier in this section.  
The category of the track can also be set to  
Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop,  
Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,  
Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,  
Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,  
Classical, Children’s and Others.  
●
Remove Track  
Reset the mood setting of a track.  
LHA0961  
LHA0962  
Music Box text display:  
Restoring deleted data  
While listening to a track in the Music Box audio  
system you can view certain text. Touch the “Text”  
key to display the following information for each  
item:  
Deleted music data can be restored by perform-  
ing the following:  
1. Touch the “Menu”key and then the touch the  
“Music Box System Info.” key on the screen.  
●
Set Mood  
2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the  
“Album/Track” key.  
Set the mood category of the track to “Re-  
laxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music”  
or “Upbeat Music”.  
3. Touch the “Restore Album/Track” key to re-  
store the deleted music data.  
●
Delete Track  
Delete the track being played.  
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA0964  
LHA0965  
LHA0962  
You can also listen to the beginning of each track  
that has been deleted by performing the follow-  
ing:  
Music Box settings  
To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system  
to your preferred settings, touch the “Menu” key  
during playback, then touch the “Music Box Sys-  
tem Info.” key, and then the “Music Box Settings”  
key.  
1. Touch the “Menu” key and then the “Music  
Box System Info.” key on the screen.  
2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the  
“Play Sample” key.  
●
Automatic Recording:  
When this item is turned to ON, the Music  
Box Hard Drive audio system automatically  
starts recording when a CD is inserted.  
●
Recording Quality:  
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132  
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the  
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for  
your own personal non-commercial use only. You  
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the  
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to  
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR  
Gracenoteா  
NOTE:  
●
The information contained in the  
Gracenoteா Database is not fully guaran-  
teed.  
EXPLOIT  
GRACENOTE  
DATA,  
THE  
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE  
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-  
TED HEREIN.  
●
The service of the Gracenoteா Database on  
the Internet may be stopped without prior  
notice for maintenance.  
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use  
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,  
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-  
late these restrictions. If your license terminates,  
you agree to cease any and all use of the  
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and  
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights  
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and  
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership  
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote  
become liable for any payment to you for any  
information that you provide. You agree that  
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this  
Agreement against you directly in its own name.  
End-User License Agreement  
LHA0963  
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-  
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.  
●
●
Title Text Priority:  
Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc  
Data Base) to acquire track information from  
the Gracenoteா Database or set to CD  
TEXT to acquire the information from CDs.  
Gracenoteா MusicID™ Terms of Use  
This device contains software from Gracenote,  
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The  
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-  
ware”) enables this application to do online disc  
identification and obtain music-related informa-  
tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-  
mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers  
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-  
tions. You may use Gracenote Data only by  
means of the intended End-User functions of this  
device.  
Delete ALL Music Box Data:  
Delete all music data stored on the hard-  
disk.  
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique  
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.  
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric  
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-  
vice to count queries without knowing anything  
about who you are. For more information, see the  
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for  
the Gracenote MusicID Service.  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-  
AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST  
REVENUES.  
The Gracenote Software and each item of  
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”  
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-  
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy  
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote  
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete  
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change  
data categories for any cause that Gracenote  
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the  
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are  
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-  
ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.  
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with  
new enhanced or additional data types or cat-  
egories that Gracenote may provide in the future  
and is free to discontinue its online services at  
any time.  
Copyright:  
Music recognition technology and related data  
are provided by Gracenoteா. Gracenote is the  
industry standard in music recognition technol-  
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-  
mation visit www.gracenote.com.  
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,  
copyright © 2000-2006 Gracenote. Gracenote  
Software, copyright © 2000-2006 Gracenote.  
This product and service may practice one or  
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;  
#6,061,680;  
#6,230,192,  
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-  
ing. Some services supplied under license from  
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.  
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks  
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,  
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-  
marks of Gracenote.  
LHA0049  
#6,154,773,  
#6,230,207,  
#6,161,132,  
#6,240,459,  
CD/CF (CompactFlashா) CARE AND  
CLEANING  
CD:  
●
●
●
Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the  
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.  
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-  
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.  
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-  
SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR  
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR  
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE  
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
Always place the discs in the storage case  
when they are not being used.  
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the  
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft  
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular  
motion.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or  
alcohol intended for industrial use.  
●
Do not store the cards in highly humid loca-  
tions.  
A new disc may be rough on the inner and  
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by  
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the  
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.  
●
●
Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.  
Do not spill any liquids on the cards.  
Refer to the CompactFlashா card Owner’s  
Manual for more details.  
LHA1002  
CF cards:  
CAUTION  
Do not force the CompactFlashா card into  
the CompactFlashா player slot. Forcing  
the CF card could damage the pins inside  
the CF player slot, especially if the CF card  
is upside down or backwards.  
●
●
●
Never touch the terminal portion of the Com-  
pactFlashா cards. Do not bend the cards.  
Always place the cards in the storage case  
when they are not being used.  
Do not place heavy objects on the cards.  
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POWER on/off switch  
If you have the Type A switch, with the ignition  
switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push  
the POWER switch to turn the audio system on  
or off.  
If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition  
switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push  
the MODE switch to turn the audio system on.  
MODE select switch  
Push the mode select switch to change the mode  
in the following sequence: PRESET A → PRE-  
SET B → PRESET C → Music Box** (if so  
equipped) → CD* → CompactFlashா* (if so  
equipped) → DVD* (if so equipped) → AUX***.  
WHA0611  
WHA0612  
Type A  
1. Volume control switch  
2. MODE select switch  
3. POWER on/off switch  
4. Tuning switch  
Type B  
1. Volume control switch  
2. Phone operation switch  
*These modes are only available when compat-  
ible media storage is inserted into the device.  
3. POWER on and MODE select switch  
4. Tuning switch  
**This mode is only available when music has  
been downloaded into the Music Box hard-disk  
drive audio system.  
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR  
AUDIO CONTROL  
***This mode is only available when a compatible  
auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.  
The audio system can be operated using the  
controls on the steering wheel.  
Volume control switch  
Push the volume control switch up or down to  
increase or decrease the volume.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Next/Previous track (Music Box):  
Push the tuning switch or  
Tuning  
for less  
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the  
present track or skip to the next track. Push  
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.  
Memory change (radio):  
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,  
B or C), push the tuning switch  
for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next  
preset station in memory.  
or  
Push and hold the tuning switch  
or  
for more than 1.5 seconds to change playlists.  
When the last playlist is playing, the next playlist  
will be selected.  
Seek tuning (radio):  
Push the tuning switch  
or  
for more  
Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):  
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous  
radio station.  
Push the tuning switch  
than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up  
or down.  
or  
for more  
Next/Previous track (CD/CF):  
Push the tuning switch  
or  
for less  
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the  
present track or skip to the next track. Push  
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.  
This system searches for the blank intervals be-  
tween selections. If there is a blank interval within  
1 program or there is no interval between pro-  
grams, the system may not stop in the desired or  
expected location.  
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REAR AUDIO CONTROLS  
Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radio  
control panel to turn the rear controls on. Press  
the button again to turn the rear controls off.  
Press the  
button; the headphones symbol  
illuminates on the front display when the head-  
phones are on. Two headphone jacks are pro-  
vided so two rear seat passengers may listen to  
the audio system privately.  
One or two infrared headphones are included if  
the vehicle is equipped with the DVD entertain-  
ment system. Most portable radio headphones  
work with the rear audio controls.  
For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radio  
with compact disc player, if the rear passengers  
turn off the rear speakers and are using head-  
phones they may choose to listen to a different  
media than the front passengers. The rear pas-  
sengers can listen to the radio along with the  
front passengers or they can listen to a CD.  
LHA0322  
VOL (volume) button:  
1. VOL (volume) control button  
2. MODE select button  
7. Infrared headphone transmitter lens*  
The VOL button allows the rear passengers to  
adjust the headphone volume level. The vehicle  
volume can also be changed if the REAR CTRL is  
enabled and the rear audio mode is the same as  
the front.  
3.  
*Red transmitters will be visible when  
infrared headphones are on.  
speaker control button  
4. NEXT button  
5. SEEK button  
6. Headphone jacks  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT  
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)  
ANTENNA  
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:  
Window antenna  
Press this  
off and headphones on. Press this  
again to turn rear seat speakers back on and  
headphones off.  
button to turn the rear speakers  
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear  
passenger and driver side windows.  
button  
CAUTION  
MODE button:  
● Do not place metalized film near the  
rear driver or passenger side window  
glass or attach any metal parts to it. This  
may cause poor reception or noise.  
The MODE button allows the rear passengers to  
change between AM, FM, CD, DVD and AUX.  
The media options are listed on the face plate of  
the rear audio controls. When a source of media  
is selected, the media label will be illuminated.  
● When cleaning the inside of the rear  
driver or passenger side window, be  
careful not to scratch or damage the  
window antenna. Lightly wipe along the  
antenna with a dampened soft cloth.  
WHA0966  
SEEK button:  
This vehicle is equipped with the mobile enter-  
tainment system, which enables you to play a  
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the im-  
ages and sounds both in the front and rear dis-  
play screens.  
In AM or FM mode, the SEEK button allows the  
rear seat passengers to find the next radio station  
up or down the station band frequency.  
In CD mode, the SEEK button allows the rear  
passengers to find the next or previous selection  
on the CD.  
NEXT button:  
When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM or  
FM mode, the radio will change to the next preset.  
The NEXT button does not function while in SAT  
radio mode or when playing a DVD or CD.  
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme  
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or  
above 158°F (70°C)].  
WARNING  
● The driver must not attempt to operate  
or view the Mobile Entertainment Sys-  
tem while the vehicle is in motion so  
that full attention may be given to ve-  
hicle operation.  
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do not  
operate the system more than 15 minutes without  
starting the engine.  
Movies will not be shown on the front display  
while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce  
driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie  
is played. To view movies in the front display, stop  
the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift  
selector to the P (Park) position and apply the  
parking brake.  
● Do not attempt to modify the system to  
display a movie on the front screen  
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing  
so may distract the driver and may  
cause a collision and serious personal  
injury or death.  
CAUTION  
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal  
display may break if hit with a hard or  
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not  
touch the liquid crystalline material,  
which contains a small amount of mer-  
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash  
immediately with soap and water.  
● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning  
the Mobile Entertainment System com-  
ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-  
ing solutions.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA0967  
If the DVD comes out and is not removed  
within 25 seconds, it will be pulled back into  
the slot to protect it.  
1. EJECT button  
2. DVD slot  
3. Auxiliary input jacks  
2. DVD slot:  
DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER  
CONTROLS  
Insert a DVD into the slot with the label side  
facing up. The DVD will be guided automati-  
cally into the slot.  
1.  
EJECT button:  
When the button is pressed with the  
LHA0317  
3. Auxiliary input jack:  
DVD loaded, it will be ejected.  
The display will show the eject symbol in the  
upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds  
1. POWER button  
2. STOP button  
For information, see “DVD auxiliary input  
jacks” later in this section.  
3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-  
OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button  
4. TITLE button  
once the  
button is pressed.  
If the DVD is not loaded, the display will  
show “NO DISC”.  
5. ENTER button  
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. DISPLAY button  
7. MODE button  
8. SUBTITLE button  
9. AUDIO button  
10. ANGLE button  
11. CLEAR button  
12. PAUSE button  
13. PLAY button  
CAUTION  
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal  
display may break if hit with a hard or  
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not  
touch the liquid crystalline material,  
which contains a small amount of mer-  
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash  
immediately with soap and water.  
14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE  
button  
15. MENU button  
16. NAVIGATION keys  
17. BACK button  
18. NUMERIC KEYPAD  
● The screen rotates down to view and up  
into the housing to store when not in  
use. Ensure that the screen is latched  
securely into the housing when stored.  
LHA0315  
FLIP-DOWN SCREEN  
REMOTE CONTROL  
The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-  
Refer to “Remote control operation” later in this  
section for the function of each button.  
1
trol receiver  
screen.  
located at the bottom of the  
᭺
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD  
MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM  
Precautions  
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-  
ment system.  
WARNING  
The driver must not attempt to operate the  
DVD System or wear the headphones  
while the vehicle is in motion so that full  
attention may be given to vehicle  
operation.  
SAA0720  
SAA0721  
NOTE:  
CAUTION  
Headphones  
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle  
engine is running. Operating the DVD  
for extended periods of time with the  
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle  
battery.  
For optimum infrared headphone perfor-  
mance, increase the volume on the rear  
seat controller to the maximum level and  
adjust the infrared headphone volume us-  
ing the volume control on the headphones.  
Using a lower volume setting on the rear  
seat controller can cause static noise in the  
infrared headphones.  
Power ON/OFF:  
Press the power button to turn the headphones  
on or off.  
Volume control:  
● Do not allow the system to get wet.  
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-  
uids may cause the system to  
malfunction.  
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-  
ume.  
The headphones will automatically be turned off  
in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that  
period. To prevent the battery from being dis-  
charged, keep the power supply turned off when  
not in use.  
While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD player  
does not guarantee complete functionality of all  
VIDEO-CD formats.  
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copyright and trademark  
Disc selection  
You can play the following disc formats with the  
DVD drive:  
●
The technology protected by the U.S. patent  
and other intellectual property rights owned  
by Macrovision Corporation and other right  
holders is adopted for this system.  
●
●
●
DVD-VIDEO  
VIDEO-CD  
●
This copyright protected technology cannot  
be used without a permit from Macrovision  
Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,  
etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision  
Corporation is not issued.  
CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD  
with MP3/WMA cannot be played.)  
Use DVDs with a region code 1; DVDs with  
region code ALL or 1 will operate in the DVD  
entertainment system. The region code is dis-  
played as a small symbol printed on the top of the  
DVD. This vehicle-installed DVD player cannot  
play DVDs with a region code other than 1 or  
ALL.  
●
●
Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.  
Dolby digital is manufactured under license  
from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.  
WHA0968  
Display settings  
●
●
Dolby and the double D mark are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.  
Front display:  
To adjust the front display mode, press the SET-  
TING button while the DVD is being played,  
select the “Display”key with the NISSAN control-  
ler, and then press the ENTER button. To adjust  
the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint, color, con-  
trast and black level, select each key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.  
Then you can adjust each item using the NISSAN  
controller. After changes have been made press  
the BACK button to save the settings.  
DTS and DTS Digital Surround are regis-  
tered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,  
Inc.  
Parental level (parental control)  
DVDs with the parental control setting can be  
played with this system. Please use your own  
judgement to set the parental control with the  
system.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear display:  
Pressing the  
button on the front controls  
turns the rear speakers on or off and enables or  
disables the wireless headphones .  
To adjust the rear display mode, press the DISP  
(Display) button on the remote controller.  
It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote  
control.  
To adjust the display brightness, tint, color and  
contrast, select each key using the joystick on the  
remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right  
or left.  
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables  
are necessary. You can use them in almost all the  
ranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to use  
the headphones in the front seat.)  
Press the BACK button to apply the settings and  
return to the previous display.  
DISC/AUX button  
Park the vehicle in a safe location and  
apply the parking brake for the front seat  
occupants to operate the DVD drive while  
watching the images.  
LHA0972  
PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE  
DISC (DVD)  
Press the DISC/AUX button on the instrument  
panel and turn the display to the DVD mode.  
With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,  
video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-  
gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-  
pendently of the front seat.  
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-  
matically.  
Press the DISC/AUX button located on the front  
controls to hear the sound of the DVD play  
through the speakers.  
The operation screen will be turned on when the  
DISC/AUX button located on the instrument  
panel is pressed while a DVD is being played,  
and it will turn off automatically after a period of  
time. To turn it on again, press the DISC/AUX  
button once more.  
Press the REAR CTRL button located on the  
front controls to disable or enable rear seat audio  
controls. For more information on rear seat audio  
controls see, “Rear Audio Controls” earlier in this  
section.  
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to  
DVD operation keys  
SKIP (rewind) key:  
press the  
button on the keypad of the re-  
To operate the DVD drive, touch the preferred key  
(if so equipped) or select the preferred key dis-  
played on the operation screen using the  
NISSAN controller.  
mote controller.  
Touch the “  
”SKIP key to skip the chapter(s)  
of the disc backward. The chapters will go back  
the number of times the “  
touched.  
STOP key:  
” SKIP key is  
Touch the “  
DVD.  
” STOP key to stop playing the  
NOTE:  
Touch and hold the “  
” SKIP key for more  
If the display in your vehicle is not touch  
screen enabled; use the NISSAN controller  
and the ENTER button to operate the fol-  
lowing functions. For more information on  
how to operate the NISSAN controller, see  
“How to use the NISSAN controller” earlier  
in this section.  
than 1.5 seconds to rewind the disc. When the  
To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to  
“
” SKIP key is released, the disc will be  
press the  
button on the keypad of the  
played normally.  
remote controller.  
To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also pos-  
SKIP (forward) key:  
sible to press the  
button on the keypad of  
the remote controller.  
Touch the “  
” SKIP key to skip the chapter(  
s) of the disc forward. The chapters will advance  
PAUSE key:  
the number of times the “  
touched.  
” SKIP key is  
Touch the “  
To resume playing the DVD, touch the  
”PLAY key.  
”PAUSE key to pause the DVD.  
Touch and hold the “  
” SKIP key for more  
“
than 1.5 seconds to fast forward the disc. When  
To pause the DVD, it is also possible to press  
the “ ” SKIP key is released, the disc will be  
played normally.  
the  
button on the keypad of the remote  
controller.  
To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible  
PLAY key:  
to press the  
button on the keypad of the  
remote controller.  
Touch the “ ” PLAY key to start playing the  
DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA0969  
LHA0970  
LHA0971  
NOTE:  
For more information, see “DVD auxiliary input  
jacks” later in this section.  
DVD settings  
If the display in your vehicle is not touch  
screen enabled; use the NISSAN controller  
and the ENTER button to operate the fol-  
lowing functions. For more information on  
how to operate the NISSAN controller see,  
“How to use the NISSAN controller” earlier  
in this section.  
Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the following  
settings while playing a DVD.  
Menu:  
Some menus specific to each DVD will be  
shown. For details, see the instructions attached  
to the DVD.  
When all the changes have been made, press  
BACK button to save all the settings.  
Top Menu:  
Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For  
details, see the instructions attached to the DVD.  
Switch to DVD-AUX:  
Switch the output source from the DVD drive to  
another device connected to the auxiliary input  
jacks located on the DVD player.  
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio:  
10Key Search:  
DVD auxiliary input jacks  
Some audio tracks specific to each DVD will be  
shown. For details, see the instructions attached  
to the DVD.  
Touch the “10Key Search” key to open the num-  
ber entry screen. Input the number you want to  
search for and touch the “OK” key. The specified  
Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.  
The auxiliary input jacks are located on the front of  
the DVD player, which is located inside the cen-  
ter console. NTSC and PAL compatible devices  
such as video games, camcorders and portable  
video players can be connected to the auxiliary  
jacks.  
Subtitle:  
Title Search:  
Choose the preferred DVD subtitle language by  
The scene with the specified title will be dis-  
played the number of times the “–” key or the “+”  
key is touched.  
touching the “  
” key or the “  
” key.  
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-  
tion purposes.  
Display Mode:  
●
●
●
Yellow - video input  
Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cinema  
Menu Skip:  
White - left channel audio input  
Red - right channel audio input  
mode by touching the “  
key.  
” key or the “  
”
DVD menus are automatically configured and the  
contents will be played directly when the “Menu  
Skip” key is turned on. Note that some discs may  
not be played directly even if this item is turned  
on.  
Angle:  
Before connecting a device to a jack, power off  
the portable device and turn off the DVD player.  
If the DVD contains different angles (such as  
moving images), the current image angle can be  
switched to another one.  
To view something connected to the auxiliary  
input jacks, press the DISC/AUX button until the  
DVD mode appears, then select the “Settings”  
key using the NISSAN controller and press the  
ENTER button. Then select the “Switch to DVD-  
AUX” key using the NISSAN controller and press  
the ENTER button. The screen will change to the  
DVD-AUX mode.  
DVD Language:  
Touch the “DVD Language”key to open the num-  
ber entry screen. Input the number correspond-  
ing to the preferred language and touch the “OK”  
key. The DVD top menu language will be  
changed to the one specified.  
Choose a different angle by touching the “–” key  
or the “+” key; the angle will change if available.  
Angle Mark:  
When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be  
shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene  
can be seen from a different angle. Touch the  
“ON” key to enable the angle mark; the indicator  
light will illuminate.  
DRC:  
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you  
to tune the dynamic range of the sound recorded  
in the Dolbyா Digital format. Touch the “–” key or  
the “+” key to tune the DRC.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The DVD system can also be controlled by using  
the remote controller in the rear seats. See the  
following items.  
PWR on/off button:  
With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON  
position, press the PWR button to turn the DVD  
rear display on or off.  
NOTE:  
The PWR button on the remote control only  
turns the rear display on or off.  
Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side  
facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically  
into the slot.  
LHA0973  
LHA0974  
●
Display Mode:  
Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cin-  
ema mode by selecting the “ ” key or  
the “ ”key using the NISSAN controller  
and press the ENTER button.  
DVD-AUX settings  
Select the “Settings” key using the NISSAN con-  
troller and press the ENTER button to adjust the  
following settings:  
If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, the  
DVD player will automatically turn on.  
CAUTION  
●
Switch to DVD:  
When all the changes have been made, press the  
BACK button to save all the settings.  
Select this key to switch back to the DVD  
mode.  
Do not force the compact disc into the  
slot. This could damage the player.  
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION  
●
Video Format:  
If the auxiliary source is in a different video  
MODE select button:  
For all operation precautions, see “Before oper-  
ating the DVD Mobile Entertainment System”  
earlier in this section.  
Press the MODE button to select Audio/Video  
source between DVD and AUX input (input jacks  
on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,  
White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =  
Video input).  
format, select the “  
”key or the “  
”
key using the NISSAN controller and press  
the ENTER button and the video format will  
change.  
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The display will show the “AUX” in the upper left  
corner of the display for 4 seconds once the  
Mode is changed to AUX.  
beginning. Press several times to skip through  
programs. The DVD will advance the number of  
upon receipt of the next play message, will begin  
at the Title Menu or at “the beginning of the disc”.  
times the button is pressed. When the  
(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, the  
program being played returns to its beginning.  
Press several times to skip back through pro-  
grams. The DVD will go back the number of times  
the button is pressed.  
DISPLAY:  
To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary input  
jacks” in this section.  
If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2  
seconds, the display menu will appear on the  
screen.  
PLAY:  
●
The display menu will remain on the screen  
for 10 seconds if no subsequent control  
activations occur.  
When the  
PLAY button on the remote  
PAUSE:  
control is pressed, the player will play.  
●
Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate  
within the display menu and use ENTER to  
select the item.  
In play mode, the display will briefly show  
on the upper left corner of the display.  
When the  
PAUSE button on the remote  
control is pressed, the player will pause playing of  
the media. In pause mode, the player will  
show  
FF (Fast Forward), REW  
(Rewind):  
on the upper left corner of the dis-  
NAVIGATION KEYS:  
play until the player is changed to another mode.  
If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-  
GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,  
Down, Left, and Right within the menu.  
STOP:  
Press the  
(fast forward) /  
(rewind)  
buttons to carry out the fast forward or rewind  
presentation at 5 times normal play speed.  
Press the STOP button once to stop playing the  
media. The display will show  
left corner of the display for 4 seconds, and the  
last disc position will be stored. When the PLAY  
button is pressed again, it will resume at the  
stored disc track and time position.  
If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION  
KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,  
and Right within the menu.  
in the upper  
Press the  
(fast forward) /  
(rewind)  
buttons again or PLAY button to resume the  
normal play speed.  
ENTER:  
NEXT CHAPTER/  
In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-  
lect MENU items.  
PREVIOUS CHAPTER:  
If the STOP button is pressed again when the  
player is already in Stop mode, it will reinitialize  
the pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect,  
it will ignore the last stored disc position and  
When the  
(NEXT CHAPTER) button is  
In the display menu, press the ENTER button to  
select items for modification, as per the on-  
screen instructions.  
pressed while the DVD is playing, the program  
next to the present one will start to play from its  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MENU:  
AUDIO:  
The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will  
continuously shift the previously input number to  
the “left”.  
If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU  
button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on  
the screen. Use the Navigation Keys to navigate  
within the menu and use ENTER to select the  
item.  
Press the AUDIO button to call up the audio  
menu.  
The chapter/title/track number will be automati-  
cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if  
3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.  
Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle  
through each available audio track.  
ANGLE:  
Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY  
mode.  
The operator can cancel the input  
chapter/title/track number by actuating the  
CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the  
3-second timer.  
Press the ANGLE button to call up the camera  
angle menu.  
TITLE:  
Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle  
through each available angle.  
Press the TITLE button to return the DVD media  
to the “title” of the DVD.  
These functions can be used only for the DVD  
discs which correspond to them.  
CLEAR:  
Press the TITLE button again to return to the  
previous stop point and play.  
CARE AND MAINTENANCE  
Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric  
inputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the  
3-second timer.  
Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the  
surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment  
System (DVD player face, screen, remote control,  
etc.).  
BACK:  
Press the BACK button to exit the current active  
menu and return to the previous menu.  
NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10):  
Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access  
disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their  
numeric value.  
SUBTITLE:  
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme  
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or  
above 158°F (70°C)].  
Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle  
selection menu.  
Use the “≥10” button to input numbers greater  
than or equal to 10. Up to 3 digits can be inputted  
when selecting the chapter/title/track number.  
Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme  
humidity conditions (less than 10% or more than  
75%).  
Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle  
through each available subtitle.  
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● A new disc may be rough on its inner  
and outer edges. Remove the rough  
edges using the side of a pen or pencil  
as illustrated.  
CAUTION  
● Do not use any solvents or cleaning  
solutions when cleaning the video  
system.  
● Never attempt to use a DVD that has  
been cracked, deformed, or repaired  
using adhesive. Doing so may cause  
damage to the equipment.  
● Do not use excessive force on the moni-  
tor screen.  
● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-  
tor screen as it may become dirty or  
damaged.  
●
Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-  
nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not  
be read properly.  
●
●
●
●
Do not write, draw or attach anything on any  
side of the DVD.  
LHA0049  
Do not store the DVD in locations with direct  
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.  
HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD  
CAUTION  
Always place discs in the storage case when  
they are not being used.  
● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch  
the surface of the disc.  
Do not put on any sticker or write anything  
on either surface of the DVD.  
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from  
the center to the outer edge using a  
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc  
using a circular motion.  
● Do not use  
a
conventional record  
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-  
tended for industrial use.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
DVDs with a region code other than  
A
5. If the disc cannot be ejected see your  
NISSAN dealer for further assistance.  
“1”. The region code  
is displayed in  
᭺
a small symbol printed on the top of  
6. Re-program the radio presets.  
B
the DVD  
.
᭺
●
●
●
DVDs that are not round.  
DVDs with a paper label.  
DVDs that are warped, scratched, or  
have unequal edges.  
●
●
Recordable  
(DVD+R).  
digital  
video  
discs  
Rewritable  
(DVD+RW).  
digital  
video  
discs  
If a DVD with a paper label is used and  
becomes jammed, you may be able to reset  
the unit and eject the jammed disc with the  
following procedure:  
1. Record the radio presets.  
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from  
LHA0484  
the battery for five minutes.  
DVD player operation precautions  
3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-  
nal.  
Do not use the following DVDs as they may  
cause the DVD player to malfunction:  
4. Check to see if the jammed DVD has  
been ejected. If it has not, try to eject  
the DVD by pushing the eject button.  
●
3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.  
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
When changing batteries, do not let dust or  
oil get on the remote control and head-  
phones.  
FCC Notice:  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment. This device complies  
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210  
of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) This de-  
vice may not cause harmful interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any inter-  
ference received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation of the  
device.  
LHA0318  
SAA0723  
If the battery is removed for any reason  
other than replacement, close the lid se-  
curely.  
Remote control and headphones  
battery replacement  
Replace the battery as follows:  
1. Open the lid.  
●
If you will not be using the remote control for  
long periods of time, remove the batteries.  
2. Replace batteries with new ones.  
●
Replacement of the batteries is needed  
when the remote control only functions at  
extremely close distances to the DVD player  
or not at all.  
●
●
Size AA (remote control)  
Size AAA (headphones)  
●
●
Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.  
Make sure that the  
the batteries match the markings inside the  
compartment.  
and  
ends on  
An improperly disposed battery can harm  
the environment. Always confirm local regu-  
lations for battery disposal.  
3. Close the lid securely.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO  
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE  
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in  
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following  
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may  
adversely affect the engine control system and  
other electronic parts.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-  
sible from the electronic control  
modules.  
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle  
in a safe location. If you have to use a  
phone while driving, exercise extreme  
caution at all times so full attention may  
be given to vehicle operation.  
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in  
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-  
trol system harnesses. Do not route the  
antenna wire next to any harness.  
WARNING  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
● A cellular telephone should not be used  
while driving so full attention may be  
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-  
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-  
phones while driving.  
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio  
as recommended by the manufacturer.  
● Connect the ground wire from the CB  
radio chassis to the body.  
CAUTION  
● If you must make a call while your ve-  
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-  
lar phone operational mode (if so  
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-  
ercise extreme caution at all times so  
full attention may be given to vehicle  
operation.  
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,  
use a phone after starting the engine.  
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not ground electrical accessories  
directly to the battery terminal. Doing  
so will bypass the variable voltage con-  
trol system and the vehicle battery may  
not charge completely. Refer to “Vari-  
able voltage control system” in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-  
tion later in this manual.  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
● Use electrical accessories with the en-  
gine running to avoid discharging the  
vehicle battery.  
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
module when the ignition switch is placed in the  
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned  
on and carried in the vehicle.  
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா  
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.  
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone  
at a time.  
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System, refer to the following notes.  
●
Set up the wireless connection between a  
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle  
phone module before using the hands-free  
phone system.  
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones  
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle  
phone  
module.  
Please  
visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-  
mended phone list and pairing.  
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free  
phone under the following conditions:  
WHA0975  
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-  
vice area.  
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with  
your cellular phone in the vehicle.  
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-  
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you  
can set up the wireless connection between your  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.  
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can  
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is  
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such  
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking  
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-  
tainous area.  
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-  
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-  
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-  
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it  
from being dialed.  
●
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual  
regarding the telephone charges, cellular  
phone antenna and body, etc.  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed to  
Visteon.  
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal  
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be  
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-  
ing a call.  
REGULATORY INFORMATION  
FCC Regulatory information  
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with  
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the  
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,  
modification, or attachments could damage  
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-  
tions.  
Do not place the cellular phone in an area  
surrounded by metal or far away from the  
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone  
quality degradation and wireless connection  
disruption.  
USING THE SYSTEM  
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows  
hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone  
System.  
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may  
not be available so full attention may be given to  
vehicle operation.  
●
While a cellular phone is connected through  
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-  
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-  
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge  
cellular phones.  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference and  
Initialization  
2. this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,  
which takes a few seconds. If the  
pressed before the initialization completes, the  
system will announce “Hands-free phone system  
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.  
●
●
If the hands-free phone system seems to be  
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”  
later in this section. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-  
shooting help.  
button is  
IC Regulatory information  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-  
ence, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to  
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-  
ing the device in a different location may  
reduce or eliminate the noise.  
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-  
quirements of the Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
●
If a command is not recognized, the system  
announces, “Command not recognized.  
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a  
clear voice.  
●
To speed the operation you can say multiple  
commands. For example, press the  
button then say “Phonebook, New entry”  
rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voice  
feedback prompt then say “New entry”.  
Operating tips  
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN  
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:  
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as  
possible. Close the windows to eliminate  
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration  
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system  
from recognizing voice commands correctly.  
If you want to go back to the previous com-  
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-  
tion” any time the system is waiting for a  
response.  
How to say numbers  
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain  
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer  
to the following rules and examples.  
You can cancel a command when the sys-  
tem is waiting for a response by saying,  
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces  
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can  
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a  
command. Otherwise, the command will not  
be received properly.  
●
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
●
●
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds  
after the tone sounds.  
also press the  
button on the steering  
–
“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh  
oh”, or  
wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session  
is cancelled, a double beep is played to  
indicate you have exited the system.  
Speak in a natural voice without pausing  
between words.  
–
“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh  
oh”  
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice  
feedback, press the volume control switches  
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being  
provided with feedback. You can also use  
the radio volume control knob.  
Giving voice commands  
●
Words can be used for the first 4 digits  
places only.  
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press  
and release the  
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a  
command.  
button located on the  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh  
oh”,  
In most cases you can interrupt the voice  
feedback to speak the next command by  
The command given is picked up by the micro-  
phone, and voice feedback is given when the  
command is accepted.  
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty  
two hundred, and  
pressing the  
wheel.  
button on the steering  
●
If you need to hear the available commands  
for the current menu again, say “Help” and  
the system will repeat them.  
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two  
hundred.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.  
The system will prompt you to continue en-  
tering digits, if desired.  
See “List of voice commands” and “Interna-  
tional” later in this section for more informa-  
tion.  
Example: 1-555-1212 *123  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
– “One eight zero zero”  
– “One five five five one two one two star  
one two three”  
The system repeats the numbers and  
prompts you to enter more.  
NOTE:  
– “six six two”  
For best results, say phone numbers as  
single digits.  
The system repeats the numbers and  
prompts you to enter more.  
The voice command “Help” is available at any  
time. Please use the “Help” command to get  
information on how to use the system.  
– “six two zero zero”  
WHA0976  
●
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-  
able when using the “Call International”  
command and the “Send” command during  
a call).  
CONTROL BUTTONS  
The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands-  
Free Phone System are located on the steering  
wheel.  
●
●
●
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using  
the “Call International” command).  
PHONE/SEND  
Press the  
button to initiate a VR  
Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available  
only when storing a phone book number).  
session or answer an incoming call.  
You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#”  
at any time in any position of the phone  
number (available only when using “Call In-  
ternational” command).  
You can also use the  
button to  
skip through system feedback and to  
enter commands during a call. See “List  
of voice commands” and “During a call”  
later in this section for more information.  
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information on speaker adaptation, see  
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in this  
section.  
Pairing procedure  
PHONE/END  
Press the  
NOTE:  
button to cancel a VR  
4. The system announces the current language  
and gives you the option to change the lan-  
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in  
French). Use the following chart to select  
the language.  
session or end a call.  
The pairing procedure must be performed  
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle  
starts moving during the procedure, the  
procedure will be cancelled.  
GETTING STARTED  
The following procedures will help you get  
started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-  
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice  
commands” later in this section.  
Main Menu  
NOTE:  
A
“Setup”  
᭺
B
“Pair phone”  
᭺
You must press the  
the button within  
button or  
seconds to  
C
“New phone”  
Choosing a language  
5
᭺
change the language.  
D
Initiate from handset  
᭺
You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free  
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.  
E
Name phone  
᭺
Press  
(PHONE/SEND)  
Press  
(PHONE/END)  
to select  
Current  
language  
F
Assign priority  
᭺
To change the language, perform the following.  
to select  
Spanish  
English  
English  
G
Choose ringtone  
᭺
1. Press and hold the  
than 5 seconds.  
button for more  
English  
Spanish  
French  
French  
French  
Spanish  
1. Press the  
button on the steering  
wheel. The system announces the available  
commands.  
2. The system announces: “Press the  
PHONE/SEND button for the  
(
)
5. If you decide not to change the language, do  
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the  
VR session will end, and the language will  
not be changed.  
A
hands-free phone system to enter the  
speaker adaptation mode or press the  
2. Say: “Setup” . The system acknowledges  
᭺
the command and announces the next set of  
available commands.  
PHONE/END (  
ferent language.”  
) button to select a dif-  
button.  
B
3. Say: “Pair phone” . The system acknowl-  
᭺
edges the command and announces the  
3. Press the  
next set of available commands.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
4. Say: “New phone” . The system acknowl-  
refer to “Setup” later in this section for more  
information on changing priorities.  
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-  
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five  
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two  
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five  
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than  
10 digits or any special characters, say “In-  
ternational”. See “How to say numbers” ear-  
lier in this section, for more information.  
᭺
edges the command and asks you to initiate  
pairing from the phone handset  
D
.
᭺
7. The system will ask if you would like to select  
G
The pairing procedure of the cellular phone  
varies according to each cellular phone  
model. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-  
tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-  
lular phones.  
a custom ring tone  
. Follow the instruc-  
᭺
tions provided by the system or refer to  
“Setup” later in this section for more infor-  
mation on selecting ringtones.  
4. When you have finished speaking the phone  
number, the system repeats it back and an-  
nounces the available commands.  
Making a call by entering a phone  
number  
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter  
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code  
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and  
cannot be changed.  
Main Menu  
C
5. Say: “Dial”  
. The system acknowledges  
᭺
A
“Call”  
᭺
the command and makes the call.  
B
Number (speak digits)  
᭺
For additional command options, see “List of  
voice commands” later in this section.  
C
“Dial”  
5. The system asks you to say a name for the  
᭺
E
phone  
.
᭺
Receiving a call  
1. Press the  
button on the steering  
If the name is too long or too short, the  
system tells you, then prompts you for a  
name again.  
wheel. A tone will sound.  
When you hear the ring tone, press the  
button on the steering wheel.  
A
2. Say: “Call”  
. The system acknowledges  
᭺
the command and announces the next set of  
available commands.  
Once the call has ended, press the  
on the steering wheel.  
button  
Also, if more than one phone is paired and  
the name sounds too much like a name  
already used, the system tells you, then  
prompts you for a name again.  
Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10  
digits or any special characters.  
NOTE:  
If you do not wish to take the call when you  
6. The system asks you to assign a priority level  
3. Say the number you wish to call starting with  
F
B
the area code in single digit format . If the  
᭺
hear the ring tone, press the  
on the steering wheel.  
button  
. The priority level determines which  
᭺
phone is active when more than one paired  
Bluetoothா phone is in the vehicle. Follow  
the instructions provided by the system or  
system has trouble recognizing the correct  
phone number, try entering the number in  
the following groups: 3-digit area code,  
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For additional command options, see “List of  
voice commands” later in this section.  
If you want to go back to the previous command,  
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time  
the system is waiting for a response.  
See “Phone book” later in this section to learn  
how to store entries.  
When prompted by the system, say the name of  
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system  
acknowledges the name.  
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS  
When you get used to the menus in the system,  
you can talk ahead by saying more than one  
command at a time. For example, say, “Call five  
five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”  
Main Menu  
“Call” or “Call International”  
“Phone Book”  
“Memo Pad”  
If there are multiple locations associated with the  
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-  
tion.  
Also, when you get used to the system re-  
sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by  
“Setup”  
Once you have confirmed the name and location,  
the system begins the call.  
pressing the  
button on the steering wheel.  
When you press and release the  
button on  
However, if you press the  
button when the  
B
Number (speak digits)  
᭺
the steering wheel, you can choose from the  
commands on the Main Menu. The following  
pages describe these commands and the com-  
mands in each sub-menu.  
system is waiting for a response from you it will  
end the VR session.  
When prompted by the system, say the number  
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”  
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”  
earlier in this section for more details.  
“Call”  
Main Menu  
Remember to wait for the tone before  
speaking.  
“Call” or “Call International”  
C
“Redial”  
᭺
A
Name (speak name)  
᭺
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands  
currently available any time the system is waiting  
for a response.  
Use the Redial command to call the last number  
that was dialed within the vehicle.  
B
Number (speak digits)  
᭺
C
“Redial”  
᭺
NOTE:  
If you want to end an action without completing it,  
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the  
system is waiting for a response. The system will  
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is  
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate  
you have exited the system.  
D
“Call Back”  
᭺
The system will not redial the last number  
dialed by the handset keypad.  
A
Name (speak name)  
᭺
If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you  
can dial a number associated with a name and  
location.  
The system acknowledges the command, re-  
peats the number and begins dialing.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a redial number does not exist, the system  
announces, “There is no number to redial” and  
ends the VR session.  
●
●
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces  
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns  
to the call.  
NOTE:  
If a call is ended or the cellular phone  
network connection is lost while the Mute  
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset  
to “off” for the next call so the other party  
can hear your voice.  
D
“Call back”  
᭺
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of  
the last incoming call within the vehicle.  
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send  
command to enter numbers, “*”or “#”during  
a call. For example, if you were directed to  
dial an extension by an automated system:  
“Phone book”  
The system acknowledges the command, re-  
peats the number and begins dialing.  
Say: “Send one two three four.”  
NOTE:  
The system acknowledges the command  
and sends the tones associated with the  
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-  
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,  
Say “pound” for “#”.  
If a call back number does not exist, the system  
announces, “There is no number to call back”and  
ends the VR session.  
Phone book commands are not available  
when the vehicle is moving.  
International  
Main Menu  
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special  
characters, please say “international”. When the  
system acknowledges the command, the system  
will prompt you to speak the number.  
“Phone Book”  
●
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-  
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular  
phone when privacy is desired.  
A
“New Entry”  
᭺
B
“Edit”  
᭺
C
“Delete”  
᭺
During a call  
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call  
transferred to privacy mode.” The system  
then ends the VR session.  
D
“List Names”  
᭺
During a call there are several command options  
available. Press the  
button on the steering  
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each  
phone paired with the system. Each name can  
have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-  
ated with it.  
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-  
mands.  
You can also issue the Transfer Call com-  
mand again to return to a hands-free call  
through the vehicle.  
●
“Help” — The system announces the avail-  
able commands.  
●
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute  
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.  
Use the mute command again to unmute  
your voice.  
●
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-  
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session  
and returns to the call.  
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
NOTE:  
Enter a phone number by voice command:  
“Edit”  
᭺
Each phone has its own separate phone  
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone  
book if you are currently connected with  
Phone B.  
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”  
See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section  
for more information.  
Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone  
book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone  
number to an existing entry.  
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory:  
When prompted by the system, say the name of  
the entry you wish to edit.  
A
“New entry”  
᭺
Use the New Entry command to store a new  
name in the system.  
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges  
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer  
from the phone handset. The new contact phone  
number will be transferred from the cellular  
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.  
The system acknowledges the name and asks  
you for the location you would like to edit.  
When prompted by the system, say the name you  
would like to give the new entry.  
Say the name of the location.  
The system acknowledges the location.  
For example, say: “Mary.”  
If the name is too long or too short, the system  
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.  
The transfer procedure varies according to each  
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions  
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN  
recommended cellular phones.  
The system will ask you to say a phone number or  
to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory.  
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name  
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts  
you for a name again.  
Enter a phone number by voice command:  
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.  
”See “How to say numbers”earlier in this section  
for more information.  
Once the system accepts the name and you  
confirm it is correct, the system asks for a location  
(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).  
The system repeats the number and prompts you  
for the next command. When you have finished  
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose  
“Store.”  
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory:  
For example, say: “Home.”  
The system acknowledges the location.  
The system confirms the name, location and  
number. The system then asks if you would like to  
store another location for the same name. If you  
do not wish to store another location, the system  
ends the VR session.  
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges  
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer  
from the phone handset. The new contact phone  
number will be transferred from the cellular  
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.  
The system will ask you to say a phone number or  
to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
The transfer procedure varies according to each  
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions  
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN  
recommended cellular phones.  
If a redial number or a call back number exists, the  
system deletes them without asking for confirma-  
tion.  
“Record”  
᭺
The system announces “Recording” and a tone  
sounds, signaling you to begin.  
If there is no number for the entry you are trying to  
delete, the system says so and ends the VR  
session.  
Speak the information you wish to record clearly.  
When you are done, press the  
button on the steering wheel.  
or  
The system repeats the number and prompts you  
for the next command. When you have finished  
entering numbers, choose “Store.”  
D
“List names”  
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the  
names and locations in the phone book.  
A tone sounds and the system announces  
“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end  
the VR session.  
The system confirms the name, location and  
number, then announces that the entry has been  
stored. The system then ends the VR session.  
If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish  
to record over the oldest memo.  
The system recites the phone book entries but  
does not include the actual phone numbers.  
When the playback of the list is complete, the  
system goes back to the main menu.  
B
“Play”  
᭺
C
“Delete”  
᭺
The system plays back all the memos in the order  
of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR  
session.  
Use the Delete command to erase one entry from  
the phone book, all entries from the phone book,  
the current redial number or the current call back  
number.  
You can stop the playback of the list at any time  
by pressing the  
button on the steering  
wheel. The system ends the VR session.  
If there are no memos recorded, the system an-  
nounces “No messages to play.” The system  
ends the VR session.  
“Memo pad”  
To delete entries from the phone book, say a  
name or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-  
tem.  
Main Menu  
C
“Delete”  
᭺
The Delete command erases all memos. The  
system asks you to confirm this action before  
deleting all memos.  
“Memo Pad”  
The system acknowledges the command and  
asks you to confirm the deletion.  
A
“Record”  
᭺
B
“Play”  
᭺
To delete the current redial number or call back  
number, say “redial number” or “call back num-  
ber” when prompted by the system.  
C
“Delete”  
᭺
The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice  
memos, each up to 20 seconds long.  
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a  
sixth phone, the system announces that you must  
first delete one phone or replace an existing  
phone.  
“Select phone”  
“Setup”  
᭺
Use the Select Phone command to select a  
phone of lesser priority when two or more phones  
paired with Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-  
tem are in the vehicle at the same time.  
Main Menu  
“Setup”  
“Pair Phone”  
A
If you try to pair a phone that has already been  
paired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-  
nounces the name the phone is already using.  
The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.  
᭺
B
“List Phone”  
᭺
The system asks you to name the phone and  
confirm the selection.  
C
“Select Phone”  
᭺
D
“Change Priority”  
Once the selection is confirmed, the selected  
phone remains active until the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF position or you select a new  
phone.  
᭺
E
When prompted by the system, choose from the  
following commands:  
“Delete Phone”  
᭺
F
“Select Ringtone”  
᭺
●
“New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone”  
earlier in this section.  
G
“Bluetooth Off”  
᭺
D
“Change priority”  
᭺
Use the Setup command to change options as-  
sociated with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System.  
●
“Replace phone” — The system announces  
the names of the phones already paired and  
asks which you would like to replace.  
Use the Change Priority command to change the  
priority level of the active phone.  
The priority level determines which phone is ac-  
tive when more than one paired Bluetoothா  
phone is in the vehicle.  
A
“Pair phone”  
᭺
Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat-  
ible phone to the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System.  
Once you say the name of the phone you  
wish to replace, the pairing procedure will  
begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in  
this section.  
The system states the priority level of the active  
phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).  
●
“List phone” – See the description below.  
If the new priority level is already being used for  
another phone, the two phones will swap priority  
levels.  
NOTE:  
B
“List phone”  
᭺
The pairing procedure must be performed  
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle  
starts moving during the procedure, the  
procedure will be cancelled. Also, see  
“Pairing procedure” earlier in this section  
for additional information.  
Use the List Phone command to hear the names  
of the phones currently paired. If no phones are  
paired, the system announces, “No paired  
phones to list.” The system then ends the VR  
session.  
For example, if the current priority levels are:  
Priority Level 1 = Phone A  
Priority Level 2 = Phone B  
Priority Level 3 = Phone C  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
and you change the priority level of Phone C to  
Level 1, then:  
The system announces the name of the active  
phone and asks you to choose from the following  
commands:  
system is capable of storing a different speaker  
adaptation model for memory A and memory B.  
Priority Level 1 = Phone C  
Priority Level 2 = Phone B  
Priority Level 3 = Phone A  
If memory A is available, the system will use  
memory A to store the model. If memory A is in  
use and memory B is available, the system will  
use memory B to store the model. If both of the  
memory locations are in use, the system will ask  
the user to select which memory location should  
be overwritten.  
●
“Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone  
and asks if you would like to select that tone.  
If you say “No”, the system plays the next  
ringtone available and continues to cycle  
through the ringtones until you select one or  
quit.  
E
“Delete phone”  
᭺
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a  
specific phone or all phones from the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System.  
●
“Silent” — The system asks you to confirm  
your wish to disable the ringtone.  
Training procedure  
The system announces the names of the phones  
already paired with the system and their priority  
level. The system then gives you the option to  
delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the  
list again.  
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.  
G
“Bluetooth off”  
᭺
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet  
outdoor location.  
Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System.  
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-  
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-  
sion in P (Park).  
Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones,  
the system asks you to confirm this action.  
When the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-  
tem is off, you will not be able to make or receive  
calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you  
will not have access to the Phone Book.  
3. Press and hold the  
than 5 seconds.  
button for more  
NOTE:  
When you delete a phone, the associated  
phone book for that phone will also be  
deleted.  
You can still use the Memo Pad and access  
Setup.  
4. The system announces: “Press the  
PHONE/SEND button for the  
(
)
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE  
hands-free phone system to enter the  
speaker adaptation mode or press the  
F
“Select ringtone”  
᭺
Use the Select Ringtone command to select the  
tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is  
received.  
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-  
dialect users to train the system to improve rec-  
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of  
commands, the users can create a voice model of  
their own voice that is stored in the system. The  
PHONE/END (  
ferent language.”  
) button to select a dif-  
button.  
5. Press the  
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information on selecting a different lan-  
guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in  
this section.  
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
call back number  
Training phrases  
call star two zero nine five  
delete phone  
During the SA mode, the system instructs the  
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system  
will prompt you for each phrase.)  
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected  
automatically. If both memory locations are  
already in use, the system will prompt you to  
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-  
vided by the system.  
dial eight three zero five one  
Home  
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
phone book new entry  
dial three oh four two nine  
delete call back number  
setup pair phone  
four three pause two nine pause zero  
delete redial number  
phone book list names  
call eight oh five four one  
Correction  
7. When preparation is complete and you are  
ready to begin, press the  
button.  
memo pad play  
eight pause nine three two pause seven  
delete all entries  
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the  
instructions provided by the system.  
9. When training is finished, the system will tell  
you an adequate number of phrases have  
been recorded.  
call seven two four zero nine  
phone book delete entry  
memo pad record  
setup change ring tone  
dial seven four oh one eight  
setup main menu  
10. The system will ask you to say your name.  
Follow the instructions to register your name.  
dial star two one seven oh  
Yes  
Delete  
11. The system will announce that speaker ad-  
aptation has been completed and the sys-  
tem is ready.  
No  
dial nine seven two six six  
memo pad delete  
select ring tone  
dial eight five six nine two  
Bluetooth on  
The SA mode will stop if:  
call seven six three oh one  
go back  
●
The  
button is pressed for more than 5  
setup change priority  
call three one nine oh two  
seconds in SA mode.  
call five six two eight zero  
dial six six four three seven  
●
●
The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.  
●
●
nine seven pause pause three oh eight  
Cancel  
The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or  
LOCK position.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
The system should respond correctly to all voice  
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-  
countered, try the following solutions.  
Where the solutions are listed by number, try  
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until  
the problem is resolved.  
Symptom  
Solution  
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.  
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.  
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.  
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too  
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.  
System fails to interpret the command correctly.  
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.  
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-  
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.  
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by  
using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.  
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the  
phone book.  
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.  
4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE  
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM  
(if so equipped)  
WARNING  
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle  
in a safe location. If you have to use a  
phone while driving, exercise extreme  
caution at all times so full attention may  
be given to vehicle operation.  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,  
use a phone after starting the engine.  
WHA0977  
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with  
your cellular phone in the vehicle.  
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-  
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you  
can set up the wireless connection between your  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.  
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can  
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-  
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-  
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-  
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
module when the ignition switch is turned to the  
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned  
on and carried in the vehicle.  
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is  
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as  
in a tunnel, in an underground parking  
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-  
tainous area.  
●
●
If the hands-free phone system seems to be  
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”  
later in this section. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-  
shooting help.  
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா  
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.  
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone  
at a time.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to  
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-  
ing the device in a different location may  
reduce or eliminate the noise.  
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it  
from being dialed.  
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the  
phone commands, so dialing a phone number  
using your voice is possible. For more details, see  
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System (if so  
equipped)” later in this section.  
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal  
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be  
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-  
ing a call.  
●
●
●
Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual  
regarding the telephone charges, cellular  
phone antenna and body, etc.  
Immediately after the ignition switch is  
pushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROM  
for the navigation system is inserted into the  
player, it may be impossible to receive a call  
for a short period of time.  
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System, refer to the following notes.  
The signal strength display on the monitor  
will not coincide with the signal strength  
display of some cellular phones.  
●
Set up the wireless connection between a  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone  
module before using the hands-free phone  
system.  
If reception between callers is unclear, ad-  
justing the incoming or outgoing call volume  
may improve the clarity. See “Call volume”  
later in this section.  
●
●
Do not place the cellular phone in an area  
surrounded by metal or far away from the  
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone  
quality degradation and wireless connection  
disruption.  
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones  
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle  
phone  
module.  
Please  
visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-  
mended phone list and pairing.  
While a cellular phone is connected through  
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-  
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-  
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge  
cellular phones.  
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free  
phone under the following conditions:  
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-  
vice area.  
4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REGULATORY INFORMATION  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed to  
Xanavi Informatics  
Corporation.  
FCC Regulatory information  
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with  
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the  
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,  
modification, or attachments could damage  
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-  
tions.  
VOICE COMMANDS  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions:  
You can use voice commands to operate various  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System features  
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For  
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition  
System (if so equipped)” later in this section.  
1. This device may not cause interference and  
LSU0001  
2. this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device.  
PAIRING PROCEDURE  
1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument  
panel or the switch on the steering  
IC Regulatory information  
wheel, and select the “Pair phone” key on  
the display using the NISSAN controller.  
Then press the ENTER button.  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-  
ence, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-  
quirements of the Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
If a phone is already paired with the sys-  
tem, Step 1 will not work. To pair another  
phone, press the SETTING button, then se-  
lect the “Phone” key and press the ENTER  
button. Scroll to the bottom of the list and  
select the “Bluetooth Setup” key and press  
the ENTER button. Select the “Pair Phone”  
key, and press the ENTER button then fol-  
low the instructions in Step 2.  
LSU0002  
LSU0003  
2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the  
name list of the phones, and press the EN-  
TER button.  
3. When a PIN code appears on the screen,  
operate the Bluetoothா cellular phone to  
enter the PIN code.  
The pairing procedure of the cellular phone  
varies according to each cellular phone. See  
the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for de-  
tails.  
You  
can  
also  
visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the  
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for  
instructions on pairing recommended cellu-  
lar phones.  
When the pairing is complete, the screen  
will return to the Bluetoothா setup display.  
4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA0978  
LHA0983  
LHA0984  
your cellular phone to your phonebook in  
your car.  
If you want to add a voicetag select the “Yes”  
key and press the ENTER button. For ex-  
ample, if the person’s name is David, speak  
“David” while the Store voicetag screen is  
on the display. The David voicetag is stored  
in the phonebook. Voicetag is a useful func-  
tion for easy dialing supported by the Voice  
Recognition system. For more information,  
see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System (if  
so equipped)” later in this section.  
PHONEBOOK  
Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the  
phonebook.  
5. Operate the cellular phone to send a per-  
son’s name and phone number from the  
memory of the cellular phone. The memory  
sending procedure from the cellular phone  
varies according to each cellular phone  
manufacturer. See the cellular phone own-  
er’s manual for more details.  
1. Press the SETTING button, then select the  
“Phone” key and press the ENTER button.  
2. Select the “Phonebook” key and press the  
ENTER button.  
3. Select one of the “None (Add New)” keys  
from the name list of the phonebook and  
press the ENTER button.  
6. After the download is registered in the  
phonebook, the system will ask if you want to  
add a voicetag for it. The voicetag screen will  
be displayed.  
7. When the phonebook download is com-  
pleted, the screen will return to the name list  
of the phonebook.  
4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key in  
order to transfer a phonebook entry from  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:  
Copy a phonebook from the Bluetoothா cellular  
phone. The availability of this function depends  
on each cellular phone. The copying procedure  
from the cellular phone also varies according to  
each cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-  
er’s manual for more details.  
Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:  
Store the name and phone number from the  
outgoing call list.  
Copy from Incoming Call Logs:  
Store the name and phone number from the  
incoming call list.  
LSU0007  
LSU0078  
Transfer via Bluetooth:  
There are different methods to input a phone  
number. Select one of the following options for  
Step 4 above.  
Transfer a contact from the Bluetoothா cellular  
phone. Availability of this function depends on  
each cellular phone. The transferring procedure  
from the cellular phone also varies according to  
each cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-  
er’s manual for more details.  
MAKING A CALL  
To make a call, follow the procedure below:  
1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument  
Enter Data by Keypad:  
Input the name and phone number manually us-  
ing the keypad displayed on the screen. For in-  
formation on how to use the touch screen, see  
“How to use the touch screen” earlier in this  
section.  
panel or the  
wheel. The “Phone” screen will appear on  
the display.  
switch on the steering  
Delete:  
Delete a contact that is registered in the phone-  
book.  
2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the  
“Phone” menu and press the ENTER button.  
3. Select the registered person’s name from  
the list and press the ENTER button. Dialing  
will start and the screen will change to the  
Call in Progress screen.  
4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. After the call is over, perform one of the  
following to finish the call:  
●
●
Call (Downloaded):  
Select the name or phone number from the  
downloaded cellular phonebook.  
a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call in  
Progress screen and press the ENTER  
button.  
Dial (Keypad):  
Input the phone number manually using the  
keypad displayed on the screen. For infor-  
mation on how to use the touch screen, see  
“How to use the touch screen” earlier in this  
section.  
b. Press the  
wheel.  
switch on the steering  
c. When the Call in Progress screen is dis-  
played, press the PHONE button on the  
instrument panel to hang up. If any other  
screen is currently displayed, press the  
PHONE button to display the Call in  
Progress screen first, then press the  
PHONE button again to hang up.  
LHA0987  
RECEIVING A CALL  
There are different methods to make a call. Select  
one of the following options instead of “Call  
(Phonebook)” in Step 2 above.  
When you hear a phone ring, the display will  
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow  
one of the procedures listed below:  
●
Redial:  
a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.  
Dial the previously dialed number again.  
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument  
panel.  
●
Call (Call Logs):  
Select the name or phone number from the  
incoming or outgoing call logs.  
c. Press the phone  
wheel switches.  
button on the steering  
There are some options available when receiving  
a call. Select one of the following displayed on  
the screen.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Answer:  
Accept an incoming call to talk.  
Keypad:  
Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.  
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-  
mail.  
On Hold:  
Put an incoming call on hold.  
NOTE:  
Reject Call:  
Reject an incoming call.  
Pushing the TALK  
switch on the  
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures  
listed below:  
steering wheel during a call allows num-  
bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec-  
ognition.  
a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.  
Cancel Mute:  
This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.  
Mute will be cancelled.  
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument  
panel.  
LHA0988  
c. Press and hold the phone  
steering wheel switches.  
button on the  
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or  
quieter, press the volume control switch located  
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume  
control knob on the instrument panel while talking  
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in  
the SETTING mode.  
DURING A CALL  
There are some options available during a call.  
Select one of the following displayed on the  
screen, if necessary:  
Hang up:  
Finish the call.  
Use Handset:  
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.  
Mute:  
Mute your voice to the person.  
4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LSU0009  
LHA0978  
LHA0979  
●
Download All:  
ENDING A CALL  
PHONE SETTING  
Download all of the contacts registered in  
the Bluetoothா cellular phone. Availability of  
this function depends on each cellular  
phone. The memory downloading procedure  
from the cellular phone also varies according  
to each cellular phone. See your cellular  
phone Owner’s Manual for more details.  
To finish the call, perform one of the following  
procedures:  
To set up the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-  
TING button on the instrument panel and select  
the “Phone” key on the display, then press the  
ENTER button.  
●
Select the “Hang up” key on the Call in  
Progress display and press the ENTER button.  
●
●
Push the  
wheel.  
switch on the steering  
Phonebook:  
See “Phonebook” earlier in this section for add-  
ing, editing and deleting a contact.  
When the Call in Progress screen is dis-  
played, press the PHONE button on the  
instrument panel to hang up. If any other  
screen is currently displayed, press the  
PHONE button to display the Call in  
Progress screen first, then press the  
PHONE button again to hang up.  
●
Delete Downloaded Phonebook:  
Delete all of the downloaded phonebook  
entries.  
Downloaded Phonebook:  
See the following information for each item.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-  
book:  
Delete a single entry from the downloaded  
phonebook. Touch the corresponding letter  
key, then touch the name key you wish to  
delete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete the  
entry.  
Automatic Hold:  
If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be  
placed on hold automatically after several rings.  
Use Vehicle Ringtone:  
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is  
different from the cellular phone’s will sound  
when receiving a call.  
LHA0980  
LHA0989  
●
●
Priority Change  
●
●
●
Bluetooth:  
Delete Call Logs:  
Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from  
the list.  
If multiple phones are registered to the sys-  
tem, you can change the priority of the  
phones on the shown list. The system shows  
the priority level of each phone. Select  
phone to change priority. Then, select an-  
other phone to swap priority levels.  
If this item is turned off, the connection be-  
tween the cellular phone and the in-vehicle  
phone module will be canceled.  
Bluetooth Setup:  
See the following information for each item.  
Bluetooth Info.:  
Check information about the device name,  
vehicle name, device address, device PIN  
and connection status.  
Remove Paired Phone:  
Delete a registered cellular phone from the  
paired list.  
Pair Phone:  
See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.  
4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Paired Phone List:  
To access the settings, press the SETTING but-  
ton, then highlight “Volume and Beeps” using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.  
Up to 5 registered cellular phones are  
shown on the list. If you select a cellular  
phone that is different from the one currently  
being connected, the newly selected phone  
will be connected to the system.  
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming  
voice during a call by pushing the volume control  
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the  
volume control knob on the instrument panel.  
Edit Phone Name:  
If you would like to change the way your  
phone’s name is displayed, select this key; a  
character input screen will be displayed.  
LSU0083  
CALL VOLUME  
Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume  
may improve clarity if reception between callers is  
unclear.  
●
Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows  
you to hear a difference in volume.  
●
Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows  
the person you are talking with to hear a  
difference in volume.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free  
operation of the systems equipped on this ve-  
hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.  
“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-  
mand Mode” later in this section.  
Displaying user guide  
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system  
for the first time or you do not know how to  
operate it, you can display the User Guide for  
confirmation.  
To improve the recognition success rate when  
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the  
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that  
mode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” later  
in this section. Otherwise, it is recommended that  
Alternate Command Mode be turned off and  
Standard Mode be used for the best recognition  
performance.  
There are two voice recognition modes of opera-  
tion available. They are:  
You can confirm how to use voice commands by  
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-  
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several  
voice commands.  
●
●
Standard Mode  
Alternate Command Mode  
In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),  
commands that are available are always shown  
on the display and announced by the system. You  
can complete your desired operation by simply  
following the prompts given by the system. In this  
mode, hands-free operation of Audio Climate  
Control and Display is not available through  
NISSAN Voice Recognition.  
For the voice commands for the navigation sys-  
tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s  
Manual of your vehicle.  
For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting  
is the Standard Mode. See “Standard Mode” in  
this section. For vehicles in Canada, the factory  
default setting is the Alternate Command Mode.  
See “Alternate Command Mode”later in this sec-  
tion.  
For advanced operation, you can change to an  
Alternate Command Mode that enables the op-  
eration of the display, audio, and climate control  
through NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this  
mode is active, an expanded list of commands  
can be spoken after pushing the TALK  
switch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-  
mand menu prompts are turned off.  
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION  
STANDARD MODE  
The Standard Mode enables control of naviga-  
tion, phone and vehicle information. With this  
setting active, commands that are available are  
always shown on the display and announced by  
the system.  
In Alternate Command Mode the recognition  
success rate may be affected because the num-  
ber of available commands and the ways of  
speaking each command are increased. See  
4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
●
●
Finding a Street Address  
Tutorial for entering a destination by street  
address.  
Placing Calls  
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice  
command operation.  
Help on Speaking  
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct  
command recognition by the system.  
Voice Recognition Settings  
Describes the available Voice Recognition  
settings.  
WHA1207  
WHA1208  
NOTE:  
You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing  
the  
switch and saying “Help”.  
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument  
panel.  
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using  
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN control-  
ler and press the ENTER button.  
Available items:  
●
Getting Started  
Describes the basics of how to operate the  
Voice Recognition system.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-  
ognition system  
If you choose “Finding a Street Address” or  
“Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to  
perform these operations using Voice Recogni-  
tion.  
LSU0014  
LSU0015  
Getting started  
Useful tips for correct operation  
Before using the Voice Recognition system for  
the first time, you can confirm how to use com-  
mands by viewing the Getting Started section of  
the User Guide.  
You can display useful speaking tips to help the  
system recognize your voice commands cor-  
rectly.  
1. Highlight “Help on Speaking” and press the  
ENTER button.  
1. Highlight “Getting Started” and press the  
ENTER button.  
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the  
screen using the NISSAN controller.  
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the  
screen using the NISSAN controller.  
4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USING THE SYSTEM  
Initialization  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,  
which takes a few seconds. When completed,  
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If  
the  
switch is pressed before the initializa-  
tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-  
cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-  
ognition initialization is completed.  
BEFORE STARTING  
To get the best recognition performance from  
Voice Recognition, observe the following:  
LSU0080  
WHA1109  
Voice recognition settings  
GIVING VOICE COMMANDS  
●
The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet  
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate  
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-  
bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the  
system from correctly recognizing the voice  
commands.  
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-  
ognition system are described.  
1. Press the  
steering wheel.  
switch located on the  
1. Highlight “Voice Recognition Settings” and  
press the ENTER button.  
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the  
screen using the NISSAN controller.  
●
●
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a  
command.  
Speak in a natural conversational voice with-  
out pausing between words.  
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan  
speed is automatically lowered so that your  
commands can be recognized more easily.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating tips  
How to speak numbers  
●
Say a command after the tone. Voice com-  
mands cannot be accepted when the icon  
is  
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to  
speak numbers when giving voice commands.  
Refer to the following examples.  
.
General rule:  
●
Commands that are available are always  
shown on the display and spoken through  
voice menu prompts. Commands other than  
those that are displayed are not accepted.  
Please follow the prompts given by the sys-  
tem.  
●
●
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.  
When saying the phone number 800-662-  
6200, the system will accept “eight-  
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or  
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also  
supported.  
●
If the command is not recognized, the sys-  
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the  
command in a clear voice.  
Examples:  
1-800-662-6200  
LSU0017  
●
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,  
and the system announces, “Would you like  
to access Phone, Navigation, Information or  
Help?”  
●
●
Press the  
switch on the steering  
wheel to return to the previous screen.  
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two  
zero zero”  
If you want to cancel the command, press  
and hold the  
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.  
switch. The message,  
– “One eight hundred six six two six two  
zero zero”  
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the  
screen changes from  
a command.  
to  
, speak  
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-  
tem feedback, push the volume control  
switch on the steering wheel or use the  
audio system volume knob while the system  
is making an announcement.  
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts  
and speak after the tone sounds until your  
desired operation is completed.  
4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:  
You can improve the recognition of phone num-  
bers by saying the phone number in three groups  
of numbers. For example, when you try to call  
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and  
the system will then ask you for the next three  
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,  
the system will then ask for the last four digits.  
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of  
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-  
mance.  
NOTE:  
When speaking a house number, speak the  
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter  
“O” is included in the house number, it will  
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak  
“oh” instead of “zero”.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Mode command list  
Category Command:  
COMMAND  
Phone  
ACTION  
Displays Phone function commands.  
Displays Navigation function commands.  
Displays Vehicle Information.  
Navigation  
Information  
Help  
Displays User Guide.  
Navigation Command:  
COMMAND  
Address  
ACTION  
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).  
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.  
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.  
Sets a route to a previous destination.  
Places  
Home  
Previous Destinations  
Phone Command:  
COMMAND  
Dial Number  
Change Number  
Redial  
ACTION  
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.  
Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).  
Makes a call to the last dialed number.  
Phonebook  
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.  
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).  
International Call  
4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Information Command: (if so equipped)  
COMMAND  
Traffic Info.  
ACTION  
Turns the traffic information system on and off.  
Displays Fuel Economy information.  
Displays Trip information.  
Fuel Economy  
Trip Computer  
Maintenance  
Displays Maintenance information.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice command examples  
Some basic voice command examples are de-  
scribed here.  
For navigation system commands, see the sepa-  
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.  
WHA1109  
LSU0017  
Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone  
number 800-662-6200:  
2. The system announces, “Would you like to  
access Phone, Navigation, Information or  
Help?”  
1. Press the  
steering wheel.  
switch located on the  
3. Say “Phone”.  
4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LSU0018  
LSU0019  
LSU0020  
4. Say “Dial Number”.  
5. Say “800”.  
6. The system announces, “Please say the next  
three digits or dial, or say change number.”  
7. Say “662”.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
You can only say a phone number using the  
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using  
this command. Please use the “International  
Call” command for all other formats, and  
when special characters such as star (*),  
pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.  
If you say “Change Number” during phone  
number entry, the system will automatically  
request that you repeat the number using  
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the  
area code first and then follow the prompts.  
●
●
Do not add a “1” in front of the area code  
when speaking phone numbers.  
LSU0021  
LSU0022  
If the system does not recognize your com-  
mand, please try repeating the command  
using a natural voice. Speaking too slow or  
too loudly may further decrease recognition  
performance.  
8. The system announces, “Please say the last  
four digits” or say change number.  
10. The system announces, “Dial or Change  
Number?”  
9. Say “6200”.  
11. Say “Dial”.  
12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.  
NOTE:  
●
You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10  
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-  
tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-  
essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is  
recommended for improved recognition.  
See “How to speak numbers” earlier in this  
section.  
4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA1109  
LSU0017  
LSU0018  
Example 2 — Placing an international call  
to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:  
2. The system announces, “Would you like to  
access Phone, Navigation, Information or  
Help?”  
4. Say “International Call”.  
1. Press the  
steering wheel.  
switch located on the  
3. Say “Phone”.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION  
ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE  
The Alternate Command Mode enables control  
of the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-  
tems as well as additional commands for the  
Vehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-  
tems. With this setting active, the system does  
not announce or display the available commands  
at each step.  
When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an  
expanded list of commands can be used after  
pushing the TALK  
switch. Under this  
mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands  
is not available on the display. Please review the  
expanded command list, available when this  
mode is active, as some Standard Mode com-  
mands are replaced. Please see examples of  
Alternate Command Mode screens.  
LSU0023  
LSU0024  
5. Say “011811112223333”.  
6. Say “Dial”.  
7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-  
222-3333.  
NOTE:  
Please note that in this mode the recognition  
success rate may be affected as the number of  
available commands and ways of speaking each  
command are increased. You can turn this mode  
ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the  
Voice Recognition Settings will change to show  
more options.  
Any digit input format is available in the  
International Number input process, as  
well as the special characters such as star  
(*), pound (#), and plus (+).  
4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHA1125  
LSU0026  
LSU0027  
4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”  
key and press the ENTER button.  
6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and  
the setting menu is expanded to include the  
Alternate Command Mode options. See  
“Settings menu” later in this section for an  
explanation of the options.  
Activating Alternate Command Mode  
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
5. The confirmation message is displayed on  
the screen. Select the “OK” key and press  
the ENTER button to activate the Alternate  
Command Mode.  
2. Highlight the “Others”key on the display and  
then press the ENTER button.  
Displaying the command list  
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and  
then press the ENTER button.  
If you are controlling the system by voice com-  
mands for the first time or do not know the  
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-  
ing procedure for displaying the voice command  
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).  
Press the  
switch, listen for the tone and  
say, “Help”. The system will respond by display-  
ing the command list main menu.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA1126  
LSU0028  
WHA1126  
Only manual controls such as the touch screen  
can navigate the command list menu.  
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument  
panel.  
5. Highlight a category using the NISSAN con-  
troller and press the ENTER button. The  
command list for the category selected is  
shown.  
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,  
you may access the command list using the fol-  
lowing steps:  
6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the  
NISSAN controller to view the entire list.  
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using  
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
7. Press the BACK button to return to the  
previous screen.  
NOTE:  
You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say “Help”.  
4. Highlight the “Command List” key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alternate Command Mode command list  
Navigation Command:  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
Home  
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.  
Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.  
Address Book  
Previous Destinations  
Previous Start Point  
Address  
Sets a route to a previous destination.  
Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.  
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).  
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.  
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.  
Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.  
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.  
Recalculates a route to the current destination.  
Places  
Fastest Route  
Minimize Freeway  
Shortest Route  
Recalculate  
Route Information  
Cancel Route  
Detour  
Displays the Route Information Menu.  
Cancels the current route.  
Displays a list of distances to detour from the current route.  
Displays the current location on the Map view.  
Show Current Location  
Planview Map  
Birdview Map  
Planview Split Map  
Birdview Split Map  
Heading Up  
Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.  
Changes the Map display to Birdview.  
Changes the Map display to show two 2-dimensional maps using a split screen.  
Changes the Map display to show a 2-dimensional map and Birdview map using a split screen.  
Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.  
Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.  
North Up  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
Zoom In  
Changes the map scale to a smaller number.  
Changes the map scale to a larger number.  
Shows or hides the points of interests on the displays.  
Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.  
Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.  
Stores the current location to the Address Book.  
Zoom Out  
Landmark Icons  
Guidance Voice  
Guide Voice Repeat  
Store Location  
Phone Command:  
COMMAND  
Redial  
ACTION  
Makes a call to the last dialed number.  
Dial Number  
Phonebook  
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.  
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.  
Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.  
Outgoing Calls  
Incoming Calls  
International Call  
Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.  
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).  
4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Command:  
COMMAND  
Radio  
ACTION  
Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.  
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.  
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.  
Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.  
Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.  
Starts to play a CD.  
Radio AM  
Radio FM  
Satellite Radio  
Music Box  
CD  
Vehicle Information Command:  
COMMAND  
Traffic Info  
ACTION  
Turns the traffic information system on and off.  
Displays Fuel Economy information.  
Displays Trip information.  
Fuel Economy  
Trip Computer  
Maintenance  
Tire Pressure  
Display Maintenance information.  
Displays the Tire Pressure screen.  
Climate Control Command:  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
Climate Control  
Climate Control Off  
Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.  
Turns the climate control system off.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
LSU0031  
LSU0084  
5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN control-  
ler and press the ENTER button.  
Displaying user guide  
You can confirm how to use voice commands by  
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-  
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several  
voice commands.  
Available items:  
●
Getting Started  
Describes the basics of how to operate the  
Voice Recognition system.  
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument  
panel.  
●
●
Using the Address Book  
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the  
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
Tutorial for using the Address Book.  
Finding a Street Address  
Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.  
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using  
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER  
button.  
4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Placing Calls  
Before starting  
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice  
command operation.  
To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice  
Recognition, observe the following:  
Help on Speaking  
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as  
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the  
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration  
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system  
from recognizing the voice commands cor-  
rectly.  
Displays useful tips for how to correctly  
speak commands in order for them to be  
properly recognized by the system.  
●
●
Voice Recognition Settings  
●
When the climate control is in the AUTO  
mode, the fan speed decreases automati-  
cally for easy recognition.  
Describes the available Voice Recognition  
settings.  
Adapting the System to Your Voice  
WHA1109  
●
●
Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a  
command.  
Tutorial for adapting the system to your  
voice.  
Giving voice commands  
Speak in a natural voice without pausing  
between words.  
1. Press and release the  
on the steering wheel.  
switch located  
USING THE SYSTEM  
Initialization  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,  
which takes a few seconds. When completed,  
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If  
the  
switch is pressed before the initializa-  
tion completes the display will show the mes-  
sage: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”  
or a beep sounds.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating tips  
How to speak numbers  
●
Say a command after the tone. Voice com-  
mands cannot be accepted when the icon  
is  
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to  
speak numbers when giving voice commands.  
Refer to the following examples.  
.
●
If the command is not recognized, the sys-  
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the  
command in a clear voice.  
General rule:  
●
●
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.  
When saying the phone number 800-662-  
6200, the system will accept “eight-  
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or  
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also  
supported.  
●
●
Press the  
switch on the steering  
wheel to return to the previous screen.  
If you want to cancel the command, press  
and hold the  
switch. The message,  
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.  
LSU0033  
Examples:  
1-800-662-6200  
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-  
tem feedback, push the volume control  
switch on the steering wheel or use the  
audio system volume knob while the system  
is making an announcement.  
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,  
and the system announces, “Please say a  
command from the displayed list or say Help  
to show all commands.”  
●
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two  
zero zero”  
– “One eight hundred six six two six two  
zero zero”  
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the  
To minimize the amount of prompts spoken  
by the system in Alternate Command Mode,  
use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.  
To access the Minimize Voice Feedback  
function press the SETTING button, then  
select the “Others” key using the NISSAN  
controller and press the ENTER button.  
Then select the “Voice Recognition” key us-  
ing the NISSAN controller and press the  
ENTER button.  
screen changes from  
a command.  
to  
, speak  
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:  
4. Once a command is recognized, the system  
will announce the recognized command and  
perform the requested action.  
You can improve the recognition of phone num-  
bers by saying the phone number in three groups  
of numbers. For example, when you try to call  
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and  
the system will then ask you for the next three  
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,  
the system will then ask for the last four digits.  
If the command is not recognized, the sys-  
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the  
command in a clear voice after the tone.  
4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of  
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-  
mance.  
Speaker Adaptation:  
Starts a system training procedure to learn the  
specific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-  
aptation function” later in this section.  
NOTE:  
Alternate Command Mode:  
When speaking a house number, speak the  
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter  
“O” is included in the house number, it will  
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak  
“oh” instead of “zero”.  
For advanced operation, an Alternate Command  
Mode is provided. This setting enables control of  
the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-  
tion to additional commands for the Phone and  
Navigation systems. With this setting active, the  
system does not announce or display the avail-  
able commands at each step. When this mode is  
activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will  
change to show more options.  
Settings menu  
The content of the Settings Menu differs when  
the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.  
LSU0080  
Command List:  
SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION  
Minimize Voice Feedback:  
Displays the command list for Alternate Com-  
mand Mode.  
The Voice Recognition system has a function to  
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition  
performance. The system can memorize the  
voices of up to three persons.  
Reduces the amount of the information spoken  
for each voice instruction.  
User Guide:  
The user guide provides basic instructions for  
using Voice Recognition and accessing some  
voice commands.  
Having the system learn the user’s voice  
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-  
ment panel, highlight the “Others”key on the  
display and then press the ENTER button.  
NOTE:  
The user guide can also be accessed from  
within the INFO menu after pressing the  
INFO button.  
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and  
then press the ENTER button.  
3. Highlight the “Speaker Adaptation” key and  
then press the ENTER button.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LSU0034  
LSU0082  
LSU0036  
4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-  
rized by the system and press the ENTER  
button.  
5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-  
tem from the following list and then press the  
ENTER button.  
7. The system requests that you repeat a com-  
mand after a tone. This command is also  
displayed on the screen.  
● Navigation  
● Audio  
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the  
screen changes from  
to  
, speak  
the command that the system requested.  
● Phone  
● Vehicle Info.  
● Others  
9. When the system has recognized the voice  
command, the voice of the user is learned.  
The voice commands in the category are  
displayed.  
Press the  
return to the previous screen.  
switch or the BACK button to  
6. Select a voice command to train and then  
press the ENTER button.  
If the system has learned the command correctly,  
the voice command indicator on the screen turns  
on.  
The Voice Recognition system starts.  
4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continuous Learning:  
When this item is turned to ON, you can have the  
system learn the voice commands in succession,  
without selecting commands one by one.  
LSU0037  
Speaker Adaptation function settings  
Edit Name:  
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on  
the screen.  
Store Result:  
When this item is turned to ON, the Voice Rec-  
ognition system can easily recognize the user’s  
voice that it has learned.  
Reset Result:  
Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-  
tion system has learned.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
The system should respond correctly to all voice  
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-  
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide  
for the appropriate error.  
Where the solutions are listed by number, try  
each solution in turn, starting with number one,  
until the problem is resolved.  
Symptom/error message  
Solution  
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-  
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret  
the command correctly.  
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” earlier in this  
section.  
2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.  
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.  
NOTE:  
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.  
The system consistently selects the  
wrong voicetag in the phonebook.  
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation  
System (if so equipped)” earlier in this section.  
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.  
4-142 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Starting and driving  
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18  
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18  
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19  
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21  
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
On-pavement and off-road driving  
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Ignition switch positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13  
Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13  
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14  
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17  
Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21  
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30  
Rear sonar system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31  
Front sonar system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32  
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33  
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33  
Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33  
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33  
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34  
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34  
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING  
AND DRIVING  
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are  
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-  
dows fully open, and have the vehicle  
inspected immediately.  
a. The vehicle is raised for service.  
WARNING  
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are  
● Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the assistance  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should also not be left alone. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or  
others through inadvertent operation of  
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,  
temperatures in a closed vehicle could  
quickly become high enough to cause  
severe or possibly fatal injuries to  
people or animals.  
entering  
into  
the  
passenger  
compartment.  
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces  
such as a garage.  
c. You notice a change in the sound of  
the exhaust system.  
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine  
running for any extended length of time.  
d. You have had an accident involving  
damage to the exhaust system, un-  
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.  
● Keep the lift gate and rear vent windows  
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust  
gases could be drawn into the passen-  
ger compartment. If you must drive with  
the lift gate or rear vent windows open,  
follow these precautions:  
THREE-WAY CATALYST  
The three-way catalyst is an emission control  
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust  
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at  
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.  
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or  
straps to help prevent it from sliding or  
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than  
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-  
lision, unsecured cargo could cause  
personal injury.  
1. Open all the windows.  
2. Set the  
air recirculation but-  
WARNING  
ton to off and the fan control dial to  
high to circulate the air.  
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-  
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals  
or flammable materials away from the  
exhaust system components.  
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)  
● If electrical wiring or other cable con-  
nections must pass to a trailer through  
the seal on the lift gate or the body,  
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-  
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-  
try into the vehicle.  
WARNING  
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they  
contain colorless and odorless carbon  
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-  
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or  
death.  
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over  
flammable materials such as dry grass,  
waste paper or rags. They may ignite  
and cause a fire.  
● The exhaust system and body should be  
inspected by  
whenever:  
a
qualified mechanic  
5-2 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD  
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING  
SYSTEM (TPMS)  
CAUTION  
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits  
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-  
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to  
help reduce exhaust pollutants.  
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher  
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),  
should be checked monthly when cold and in-  
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by  
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard  
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has  
tires of a different size than the size indicated on  
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,  
you should determine the proper tire inflation  
pressure for those tires.)  
They have higher ground clearance than passen-  
ger cars to make them capable of performing in a  
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.  
This gives them a higher center of gravity than  
ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground  
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing  
you to anticipate problems. However, they are not  
designed for cornering at the same speeds as  
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more  
than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-  
form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at  
all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As  
with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate  
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control  
or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted  
person is significantly more likely to die than a  
person wearing a seat belt.  
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-  
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or  
electrical systems can cause overrich  
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,  
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-  
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-  
able loss of performance or other un-  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been  
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale  
when one or more of your tires is significantly  
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire  
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and  
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate  
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-  
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-  
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation  
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and  
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping  
ability.  
usual  
operating  
conditions  
are  
detected. Have the vehicle inspected  
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.  
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel  
level. Running out of fuel could cause  
the engine to misfire, damaging the  
three-way catalyst.  
● Do not race the engine while warming it  
up.  
Be sure to read the driving safety precautions  
later in this section.  
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start  
the engine.  
Starting and driving 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for  
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s  
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,  
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to  
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure  
telltale.  
Additional information:  
●
●
The Tire and Loading Information label (also  
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire  
inflation pressure label) is located in the  
driver’s door opening.  
●
The TPMS does not monitor the tire  
pressure of the spare tire.  
●
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle  
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25  
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a  
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a  
flat tire while driving).  
You can also check the pressure of all tires  
(except the spare tire) on the display screen.  
The order of the tire pressure figures dis-  
played on the screen does not correspond  
with the actual order of the tire position. See  
“Tire pressure information” in the “Monitor,  
climate, audio, phone, and voice recognition  
systems” section.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a  
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the  
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-  
function indicator is combined with the low tire  
pressure telltale. When the system detects a  
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-  
mately one minute and then remain continuously  
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon  
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-  
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is  
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect  
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS  
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,  
including the installation of replacement or alter-  
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent  
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always  
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-  
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to  
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and  
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function  
properly.  
●
The low tire pressure warning light does not  
automatically turn off when the tire pressure  
is adjusted in all 4 tires. After the tire is  
inflated to the recommended pressure, the  
vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16  
MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and  
turn off the low tire pressure warning light.  
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire  
pressure.  
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure  
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”  
section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.  
●
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on  
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation  
and the outside temperature. Low outside  
temperature can lower the temperature of  
the air inside the tire which can cause a  
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause  
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-  
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low  
ambient temperature, check the tire pres-  
sure for all 4 tires.  
5-4 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Some examples are:  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, tire pressure will not be  
indicated, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
WARNING  
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio  
frequencies are near the vehicle.  
● If the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden  
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,  
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road  
to a safe location and stop the vehicle  
as soon as possible. Driving with under-  
inflated tires may permanently damage  
the tires and increase the likelihood of  
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage  
could occur and may lead to an acci-  
dent and could result in serious per-  
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for  
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to  
the recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label to turn the low tire pressure  
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,  
replace it with a spare tire as soon as  
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case  
of emergency” section for changing a  
flat tire.)  
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is  
being used in or near the vehicle.  
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a  
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the  
vehicle.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
FCC Notice:  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol  
tire sealant into the tires, as this may  
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada.  
CAUTION  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation of the device.  
Do not place metalized film or any metal  
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This  
may cause poor reception of the signals  
from the tire pressure sensors, and the  
TPMS will not function properly.  
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily  
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and  
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-  
minate.  
Starting and driving 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
If you decide that it is not safe to return the  
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,  
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the  
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.  
AVOIDING COLLISION AND  
ROLLOVER  
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY  
While driving, the right side or left side wheels  
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this  
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-  
ing the procedure below. Please note that this  
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle  
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-  
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.  
WARNING  
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS  
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe  
and prudent manner may result in loss of  
control or an accident.  
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur  
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to  
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss  
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated  
tires.  
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey  
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,  
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-  
neuvers, because these driving practices could  
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with  
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a  
collision with other vehicles or objects or  
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if  
the loss of control causes the vehicle to  
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and  
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under  
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-  
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may  
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as  
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system” section of this  
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.  
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.  
2. Do not apply the brakes.  
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling  
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway  
speeds.  
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel  
with both hands and try to hold a straight  
course.  
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-  
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect  
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and  
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air  
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain  
control of the vehicle by following the procedure  
below. Please note that this procedure is only a  
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as  
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-  
hicle, road and traffic.  
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-  
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.  
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-  
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed  
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-  
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle  
speed is reduced.  
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the  
steering wheel until both tires return to the  
road surface. When all tires are on the road  
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-  
propriate driving lane.  
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions  
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted  
or improperly belted person is significantly  
more likely to be injured or killed than a  
person properly wearing a seat belt.  
5-6 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND  
DRIVING  
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
WARNING  
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and  
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-  
ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for  
leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-  
hicle.  
The following actions can increase the  
chance of losing control of the vehicle if  
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.  
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a  
collision and result in personal injury.  
WARNING  
Never drive under the influence of alcohol  
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-  
duces coordination, delays reaction time  
and impairs judgement. Driving after  
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood  
of being involved in an accident injuring  
yourself and others. Additionally, if you  
are injured in an accident, alcohol can  
increase the severity of the injury.  
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in  
the direction of the flat tire.  
Remember that two-wheel drive models are less  
capable than four-wheel drive models for rough  
road driving and extrication when stuck in deep  
snow or mud, or the like.  
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.  
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator  
pedal.  
Please observe the following precautions:  
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.  
WARNING  
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,  
you must choose not to drive under the influence  
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are  
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-  
though the local laws vary on what is considered  
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol  
affects all people differently and most people  
underestimate the effects of alcohol.  
1. Remain calm and do not over react.  
● Drive carefully when off the road and  
avoid dangerous areas. Every person  
who drives or rides in this vehicle  
should be seated with their seat belt  
fastened. This will keep you and your  
passengers in position when driving  
over rough terrain.  
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel  
with both hands and try to hold a straight  
course.  
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-  
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.  
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location  
off the road and away from traffic if possible.  
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And  
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-  
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your  
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-  
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.  
● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-  
stead drive either straight up or straight  
down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can  
tip over sideways much more easily  
than they can forward or backward.  
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually  
stop the vehicle.  
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and  
either contact a roadside emergency service  
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat  
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of  
this manual.  
Starting and driving 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.  
If you drive up them, you may stall. If  
you drive down them, you may not be  
able to control your speed. If you drive  
across them, you may roll over.  
● To avoid raising the center of gravity  
excessively, do not exceed the rated  
capacity of the roof rack and evenly  
distribute the load. Secure heavy loads  
in the cargo area as far forward and as  
low as possible. Do not equip the ve-  
hicle with tires larger than specified in  
this manual. This could cause your ve-  
hicle to roll over.  
● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-  
tempt to raise two wheels off the  
ground and shift the transmission to  
any drive or reverse position with the  
engine running. Doing so may result in  
drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-  
hicle movement which could result in  
serious vehicle damage or personal  
injury.  
● Do not shift gears while driving on  
downhill grades as this could cause  
loss of control of the vehicle.  
● Stay alert when driving to the top of a  
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off  
or other hazard that could cause an  
accident.  
● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the  
steering wheel when driving off-road.  
The steering wheel could move sud-  
denly and injure your hands. Instead  
drive with your fingers and thumbs on  
the outside of the rim.  
● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped  
vehicle on  
a
2-wheel dynamometer  
(such as the dynamometers used by  
some states for emissions testing), or  
similar equipment even if the other two  
wheels are raised off the ground. Make  
sure you inform test facility personnel  
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD  
before it is placed on a dynamometer.  
Using the wrong test equipment may  
result in drivetrain damage or unex-  
pected vehicle movement which could  
result in serious vehicle damage or per-  
sonal injury.  
● If your engine stalls or you cannot make  
it to the top of a steep hill, never at-  
tempt to turn around. Your vehicle  
could tip or roll over. Always back  
straight down in R (Reverse) gear and  
apply brakes to control your speed.  
● Before operating the vehicle, ensure  
that the driver and all passengers have  
their seat belts fastened.  
● Lower your speed when encountering  
strong crosswinds. With a higher center  
of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-  
fected by strong side winds. Slower  
speeds ensure better vehicle control.  
● Heavy braking going down a hill could  
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,  
resulting in loss of control and an acci-  
dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low  
gear to control your speed.  
● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering  
maneuvers or sudden braking may  
cause loss of control.  
● Do not drive beyond the performance  
capability of the tires, even with 4WD  
engaged.  
● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around  
when driving over rough terrain. Prop-  
erly secure all cargo so it will not be  
thrown forward and cause injury to you  
or your passengers.  
5-8 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IGNITION SWITCH  
● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning  
maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.  
Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle  
has a higher center of gravity than a  
passenger car. The vehicle is not de-  
signed for cornering at the same  
speeds as passenger cars.  
WARNING  
● Never remove or turn the key to the  
LOCK position while driving. The steer-  
ing wheel will lock. This may cause the  
driver to lose control of the vehicle and  
could result in serious vehicle damage  
or personal injury.  
● Always use tires of the same type, size,  
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,  
or radial), and tread pattern on all four  
wheels. Install tire chains on the rear  
wheels when driving on slippery roads  
and drive carefully.  
● Never turn the ignition switch to the  
LOCK position while driving. The steer-  
ing wheel will lock. This may cause the  
driver to lose control of the vehicle and  
could result in serious vehicle damage  
or personal injury.  
LSD0171  
● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-  
ately after driving in mud or water. See  
“Brake system” later in this section for  
“Wet brakes”.  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so  
equipped)  
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition  
switch cannot be turned to LOCK until the shift  
selector is moved to the P (Park) position.  
● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep  
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it  
rolls forward, backward or sideways,  
you could be injured.  
When turning the ignition switch, make sure the  
shift selector is in the P (Park) position.  
● Whenever you drive off-road through  
sand, mud or water as deep as the  
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance  
may be required. See “Periodic mainte-  
nance” in the “NISSAN Service and  
Maintenance Guide.”  
If the shift selector is not returned to the P (Park)  
position, the ignition switch cannot be moved  
toward LOCK.  
Starting and driving 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the ignition switch cannot be turned to-  
ward the LOCK position when the Intelligent Key  
is in range, proceed as follows:  
the LOCK position, even using the me-  
chanical key.  
The ignition switch cannot be turned back to the  
LOCK position unless the shift selector is in the P  
B
(Park) position. (It can be turned only to the  
᭺
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS  
position.)  
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)  
position.  
B
Push in the ignition switch to the  
when you turn it.  
position  
᭺
CAUTION  
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON  
direction.  
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition  
switch in ACC or ON positions when the  
engine is not running for an extended pe-  
riod. This can discharge the battery.  
A
LOCK (Normal parking position)  
:
᭺
The ignition switch can only be locked in the  
LOCK position.  
3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.  
The shift selector can be moved from the P  
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in  
the ON position and the foot brake pedal is  
depressed.  
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is  
C
pushed in, and turned to the ACC position  
᭺
while carrying the Intelligent Key.  
There is an OFF position in between LOCK and  
ACC, although it does not show on the lock  
cylinder. When the ignition switch is OFF, the  
steering wheel is not locked.  
C
ACC (Accessories)  
:
᭺
This position activates electrical accessories  
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.  
D
ON (Normal operating position)  
:
᭺
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it  
must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock-  
wise from the straight up position.  
This position turns on the ignition system and the  
electrical accessories.  
To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition  
switch to the LOCK position. To unlock the  
steering wheel, push the ignition switch in  
and turn it gently while rotating the steer-  
ing wheel slightly right and left.  
E
START  
:
᭺
This position starts the engine. As soon as the  
engine has started, release the ignition switch  
immediately. It will automatically return to the ON  
position.  
If the battery of the vehicle equipped with  
the Intelligent Key system is discharged,  
the ignition switch cannot be turned from  
5-10 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove the key from the ignition switch:  
There is an OFF position between the  
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position  
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.  
When the ignition switch is in the OFF  
position, the steering wheel is not locked.  
1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) position  
with the ignition switch in the ON position.  
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it  
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise  
from the straight up position.  
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch.  
If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park)  
position after the ignition switch is turned to the  
OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot  
be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as  
follows to remove the key.  
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to  
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To  
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key  
and turn it gently while rotating the steer-  
ing wheel slightly right and left.  
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)  
position.  
WSD0041  
If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-  
tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or  
right while turning the key to unlock the  
key cylinder.  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION  
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly toward the  
ON position.  
The ignition lock is designed so the ignition  
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position  
and the key cannot be removed until the shift  
selector is moved to the P (Park) position.  
3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
KEY POSITIONS  
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)  
OFF: (Not used) (1)  
4. Remove the key.  
When removing the key from the ignition switch,  
make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)  
position.  
The shift selector is designed so it cannot moved  
out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear  
positions if the ignition switch is turned to the  
OFF position or if the key is removed from the  
switch.  
ACC: (Accessories) (2)  
If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park)  
position, the ignition switch cannot be moved to  
the LOCK position.  
This position activates electrical accessories  
such as the radio when the engine is not running.  
ON: Normal operating position (3)  
The shift selector can be moved if the igni-  
tion switch is in the ON position and the  
foot brake pedal is depressed.  
This position turns on the ignition system and the  
electrical accessories.  
Starting and driving 5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE  
STARTING THE ENGINE  
START: (4)  
●
●
Make sure the area around the vehicle is  
clear.  
1. Apply the parking brake.  
2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N  
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.  
This position starts the engine. As soon as the  
engine has started, release the key. It automati-  
cally returns to the ON position.  
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-  
ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as  
frequently as possible, or at least whenever  
you refuel.  
The shift selector cannot be moved out  
of P (Park) and into any of the other  
gear positions if the ignition key is  
turned to the OFF position or if the key  
is removed from the ignition switch.  
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER  
SYSTEM  
●
●
Check that all windows and lights are clean.  
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not  
allow the engine to start without the use of the  
registered key.  
Visually inspect tires for their appearance  
and condition. Also check tires for proper  
inflation.  
The starter is designed not to operate if  
the shift selector is in any of the driving  
positions.  
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for  
example, when interference is caused by another  
registered key, an automated toll road device or  
automatic payment device on the key ring), restart  
the engine using the following procedure:  
●
●
●
●
Check that all doors are closed.  
Position seat and adjust head restraint.  
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.  
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the  
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition  
key to START. Release the key when the  
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to  
run, repeat the above procedure.  
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to  
do likewise.  
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position  
for approximately 5 seconds.  
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-  
tremely cold weather or when restarting,  
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-  
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it  
and then crank the engine. Release the  
key and the accelerator pedal when the  
engine starts.  
●
Check the operation of warning lights when  
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or  
LOCK position, and wait approximately 10  
seconds.  
D
the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
᭺
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and  
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and  
controls” section of this manual.  
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.  
4. Restart the engine while holding the device  
(which may have caused the interference)  
separate from the registered key.  
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recom-  
mends placing the registered key on a separate key  
ring to avoid interference from other devices.  
5-12 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRIVING THE VEHICLE  
● If the engine is very hard to start because  
it is flooded, depress the accelerator  
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.  
Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After  
cranking the engine, release the accel-  
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your  
foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-  
ing the ignition key to START. Release the  
key when the engine starts. If the engine  
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above  
procedure.  
If:  
1. The engine coolant temperature is not re-  
ENGINE PROTECTION MODE  
The engine has an engine protection mode to  
reduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem-  
perature becomes too high (for example, when  
climbing steep grades in high temperature with  
heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).  
When the engine temperature reaches a certain  
level:  
duced.  
2. The air conditioning cooling function does  
not turn back ON.  
3. The engine oil pressure low/engine coolant  
temperature high warning light  
illumi-  
nates, this may indicate a malfunction. Move  
the vehicle off the road in a safe area and  
allow the engine to cool. If after checking the  
●
The engine coolant temperature gauge will  
move toward the H position.  
●
●
Engine power may be reduced.  
CAUTION  
oil and coolant, the  
remains on, do not  
The air conditioning cooling function may be  
automatically turned OFF for a short time  
(the blower will continue to operate).  
continue to drive and call a NISSAN dealer.  
Do not operate the starter for more than  
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does  
not start, turn the key off and wait 10  
seconds before cranking again, otherwise  
the starter could be damaged.  
The malfunction indicator light (MIL) may also  
come ON. If only it remains on, you do not need  
to have your vehicle towed, but have it inspected  
soon by a NISSAN dealer. See “Malfunction in-  
dicator light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-  
trols ” section of this manual.  
Engine power and, under some conditions, ve-  
hicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be  
controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the  
vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed.  
The transmission will downshift or upshift as it  
reaches prescribed shift points. You can also  
shift manually.  
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-  
onds after starting. Do not race the engine  
while warming it up. Drive at moderate  
speed for a short distance first, especially in  
cold weather.  
As driving conditions change and engine coolant  
temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be  
increased using the accelerator pedal, and air  
conditioning cooling function will automatically  
be turned back ON.  
In cold weather, keep the engine running for  
a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it  
off. Starting and stopping the engine over a  
short period of time may make the vehicle  
more difficult to start.  
Starting and driving 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is  
electronically controlled to produce maximum  
power and smooth operation.  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION  
WARNING  
Overheating can result in reduced engine  
power and vehicle speed. The reduced  
speed may be lower than other traffic,  
which could increase the chance of a col-  
lision. Be especially careful when driving.  
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-  
ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a  
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and  
return to normal operation. See “If your  
vehicle overheats”in the “In case of emer-  
gency” section of this manual.  
WARNING  
The recommended operating procedures for this  
transmission are shown on the following pages.  
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle  
performance and driving enjoyment.  
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal  
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-  
tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Always  
depress the brake pedal until shifting is  
completed. Failure to do so could cause  
you to lose control and have an  
accident.  
Starting the vehicle  
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the  
foot brake pedal before moving the shift  
selector out of the P (Park) position.  
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use  
caution when shifting into a forward or  
reverse gear before the engine has  
warmed up.  
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and  
move the shift selector into a driving gear.  
CAUTION  
Running the engine with the engine oil  
pressure warning light on could cause se-  
rious damage to the engine almost imme-  
diately. Such damage is not covered by  
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it  
is safe to do so.  
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)  
while the vehicle is moving. This could  
cause an accident.  
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start  
the vehicle in motion.  
The automatic transmission is designed so  
the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed  
before shifting from P (Park) to any drive  
position while the ignition switch is in the  
ON position.  
CAUTION  
● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill  
grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-  
pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot  
brake should be used for this purpose.  
The shift selector cannot be moved out of P  
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-  
tions if the ignition switch is placed in the  
LOCK, OFF or ACC position.  
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery  
roads. This may cause a loss of control.  
5-14 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
R (Reverse):  
WARNING  
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-  
tor is in any position while the engine is  
not running. Failure to do so could cause  
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll  
away and result in serious personal injury  
or property damage.  
CAUTION  
To prevent transmission damage, use the  
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when  
the vehicle is completely stopped.  
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make  
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before  
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake  
pedal must be depressed to move the shift  
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any  
drive position to R (Reverse).  
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC  
position for any reason while the vehicle is in N  
(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition  
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position.  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position,  
then the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK.  
N (Neutral):  
WSD0187  
P (Park):  
To move the shift selector:  
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The  
engine can be started in this position. You may  
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine  
while the vehicle is moving.  
: Shift while depressing the brake pedal  
: Shift without depressing brake pedal  
CAUTION  
To prevent transmission damage, use the  
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when  
the vehicle is completely stopped.  
D (Drive):  
Shifting  
Use this position for all normal forward driving.  
4 (Fourth gear):  
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake  
pedal and move the shift selector out of the P  
(Park) position.  
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the  
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.  
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.  
The brake pedal should be depressed to  
move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or  
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the  
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the  
parking brake first, then move the shift selector  
into the P (Park) position.  
Use this position for driving up and down long  
slopes where engine braking would be advanta-  
geous.  
Do not downshift into the 4 position at speeds  
over the following and do not exceed the follow-  
ing speeds in the 4 position.  
Starting and driving 5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4H:  
27 MPH (44 km/h) w/tow mode  
1 (Low gear):  
62 MPH (100 km/h)  
4LO:  
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly  
or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,  
or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill  
grades.  
31 MPH (50 km/h)  
3 (Third gear):  
Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds  
over the following and do not exceed the follow-  
ing speeds in the 1 position.  
Use this position for driving up and down long  
slopes where engine braking would be advanta-  
geous.  
2WD and AUTO:  
2 (Second gear):  
43 MPH (70 km/h) w/o tow mode  
37 MPH (60 km/h) w/tow mode  
4H:  
Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-  
ing on downhill grades.  
LSD0090  
Shift lock release  
Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds  
over the following and do not exceed the follow-  
ing speeds in the 2 position.  
43 MPH (70 km/h) w/o tow mode  
37 MPH (60 km/h) w/tow mode  
4LO:  
If the battery is discharged, the shift selector may  
not be moved from the P (Park) position even with  
the brake pedal depressed.  
2WD and AUTO:  
To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.  
The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).  
However, the steering wheel will be locked un-  
less the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-  
tion. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the  
battery is discharged.  
71 MPH (115 km/h) w/o tow mode  
62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode  
4H:  
19 MPH (30 km/h) w/o tow mode  
16 MPH (27 km/h) w/tow mode  
71 MPH (115 km/h) w/o tow mode  
62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode  
4LO:  
31 MPH (50 km/h) w/o tow mode  
5-16 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARKING BRAKE  
To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-  
lowing procedure:  
Accelerator downshift  
— in D position —  
WARNING  
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-  
leased before driving. Failure to do so  
can cause brake failure and lead to an  
accident.  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-  
tion and remove the key  
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-  
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-  
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the  
vehicle speed.  
2. Apply the parking brake.  
● Do not release the parking brake from  
outside the vehicle.  
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as  
shown.  
Fail-safe  
● Do not use the shift selector in place of  
the parking brake. When parking, be  
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.  
When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note  
that the transmission will be locked in any of the  
forward gears according to the condition.  
4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock  
release slot and push down.  
5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)  
position while holding down the shift lock  
release.  
● Do not leave children unattended in a  
vehicle. They could release the parking  
brake and cause an accident.  
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-  
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning  
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe  
system may be activated. This will occur  
even if all electrical circuits are functioning  
properly. In this case, turn the ignition  
switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then  
turn the ignition switch back to the ON  
position. The vehicle should return to its  
normal operating condition. If it does not  
return to its normal operating condition,  
have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-  
sion and repair it if necessary.  
6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to  
unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle  
may be moved to the desired location.  
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P  
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-  
matic transmission system as soon as possible.  
WARNING  
If the shift selector cannot be moved from  
the P (Park) position while the engine is  
running and the brake pedal is depressed,  
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-  
ing stop lights could cause an accident  
injuring yourself and others.  
Starting and driving 5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CRUISE CONTROL  
●
●
If the SET indicator light blinks, push the  
cruise control ON·OFF switch off and have  
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
The SET indicator light may blink when the  
cruise control ON·OFF switch is pushed ON  
while  
pushing  
the  
ACCEL/RES,  
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop-  
erly set the cruise control system, use the  
following procedures.  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control when driving  
under the following conditions:  
LSD0158  
LSD0159  
● When it is not possible to keep the  
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.  
1. ACCEL/RES switch  
2. COAST/SET switch  
3. CANCEL switch  
4. ON·OFF switch  
vehicle at a set speed.  
To release:  
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in  
speed.  
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.  
● On winding or hilly roads.  
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).  
● In very windy areas.  
2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion.  
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE  
CONTROL  
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it  
will release.  
●
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it  
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle  
control and result in an accident.  
cancels automatically. The SET indicator  
light in the vehicle information display then  
blinks to warn the driver, see “Vehicle infor-  
mation display” in the “Instruments and con-  
trols” section.  
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning  
light goes out.  
5-18 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the  
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator  
light in the vehicle information display go out.  
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one  
of the following three methods.  
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS  
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-  
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without  
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.  
●
●
●
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-  
hicle attains the desired speed, push the  
COAST/SET switch and release it.  
The cruise control is automatically canceled and  
the SET light in the vehicle information display  
goes out if:  
To turn on the cruise control, push the  
ON·OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in  
the vehicle information display will illuminate.  
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-  
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to  
the desired speed.  
●
you depress the brake pedal while pushing  
the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.  
The preset speed is deleted from memory.  
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to  
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch  
and release it. The SET indicator light in the  
vehicle information display will illuminate. Take  
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle  
maintains the set speed.  
Push and release the COAST/SET switch.  
Each time you do this, the set speed de-  
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).  
●
●
the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH  
(13 km/h) below the set speed.  
you move the shift selector to N (Neutral).  
To resume the preset speed, push and re-  
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-  
turns to the last set cruising speed when the  
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).  
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one  
of the following three methods.  
●
To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-  
celerator pedal. When you release the  
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously  
set speed.  
●
●
●
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the  
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and  
release the COAST/SET switch.  
●
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed  
when going up or down steep hills. If this  
happens, drive without the cruise control.  
Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.  
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-  
sire, release the switch.  
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the  
following three methods.  
Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.  
Each time you do this, the set speed in-  
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).  
●
Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator  
light in the vehicle information display goes  
out.  
●
Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light  
goes out.  
Starting and driving 5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE  
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY  
●
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain  
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator  
position.  
●
●
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more  
economical to use the air conditioner and  
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.  
CAUTION  
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),  
follow these recommendations to obtain  
maximum engine performance and en-  
sure the future reliability and economy of  
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these  
recommendations may result in short-  
ened engine life and reduced engine  
performance.  
●
●
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.  
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.  
For vehicles equipped with  
, use 4H  
or 4L position only when necessary. Four-  
wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.  
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.  
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-  
hicles.  
●
Use a proper gear range which suits road  
conditions. On level roads, shift into high  
gear as soon as possible.  
●
Avoid driving for long periods at constant  
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the  
engine over 4,000 rpm.  
●
●
●
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.  
Keep your engine tuned up.  
●
●
●
●
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.  
Avoid quick starts.  
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-  
nance schedule.  
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.  
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles  
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts  
could be damaged.  
●
●
●
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-  
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear  
and lowers fuel economy.  
Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.  
Improper alignment increases tire wear and  
lowers fuel economy.  
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel  
economy. Use the air conditioner only when  
necessary.  
5-20 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE  
WARNING  
(4WD)  
TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING  
PROCEDURES  
CAUTION  
● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-  
tempt to raise two wheels off the  
ground and shift the transmission to  
any drive or reverse position with the  
engine running. Doing so may result in  
drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-  
hicle movement which could result in  
serious vehicle damage or personal  
injury.  
● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO  
position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-  
ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO  
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear  
and increased fuel consumption.  
All mode 4WD system provides 4 positions  
(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select  
the desired drive mode according to the driving  
conditions.  
If the 4WD warning light turns on when  
you are driving on dry hard surface  
roads:  
2WD or 4WD shift procedure:  
–
in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift  
switch to 2WD.  
● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped  
vehicle on  
a
2-wheel dynamometer  
(such as the dynamometers used by  
some states, provinces or territories for  
emissions testing), or similar equip-  
ment even if the other two wheels are  
raised off the ground. Make sure you  
inform test facility personnel that your  
vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it  
is placed on a dynamometer. Using the  
wrong test equipment may result in  
drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-  
hicle movement which could result in  
serious vehicle damage or personal  
injury.  
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,  
move the shift selector to the N posi-  
tion with the brake pedal depressed,  
and shift the 4WD shift switch to  
2WD.  
● If the warning light is still on after the  
above operation, have your vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible.  
● The transfer case may be damaged if  
you continue driving with the warning  
light blinking.  
Starting and driving 5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Indicator Light  
Transfer 4LO position  
4WD Shift  
Switch Position  
Wheels Driven  
Use Conditions  
4WD Shift Procedure  
4WD shift  
Move the 4WD switch.  
2WD <—> AUTO <—> 4H  
4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift po-  
sition engaged.  
Rear wheels or 4  
wheels  
For driving on paved or slippery  
roads  
AUTO  
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT SE-  
LECTOR TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OPERATION.  
PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING  
STRAIGHT.  
For driving on dry, paved roads  
(Economy drive) or state dyna-  
mometer I/M testing  
Rear wheels  
2WD  
4H  
For driving on rocky, sandy or  
snow-covered roads  
4 wheels  
Neutral  
Neutral disengages the auto-  
matic transmission mechanical  
parking lock, which will allow  
the vehicle to roll. Do not leave  
the transfer shift position in  
Neutral.*2  
For use when maximum power  
and traction is required (for  
example: on steep grades or  
rocky, sandy, muddy roads)  
1. Stop the vehicle.  
2. Move the shift selector to the N position.  
3. Push the 4WD shift switch and move it to 4LO or  
4H with the brake pedal depressed.  
*1  
May blink  
YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFT  
SWITCH BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H)  
UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE,  
DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE  
SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3  
4 wheels  
4LO  
Illuminated  
*1: The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the shift selector has been moved to the  
N position. If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while. Then  
the light will turn on or off.  
• Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.  
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator  
lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.  
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The  
also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control system” later in this section.  
indicator light (if so equipped) will  
5-22 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to  
select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the  
driving conditions. There are four types of drive  
modes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.  
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch  
(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with the  
rear wheels spinning.  
CAUTION  
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-  
tween 4LO and 4H while driving.  
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads  
in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry  
hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause  
unnecessary noise and tire wear.  
NISSAN recommends driving in the  
2WD or AUTO position under these  
conditions.  
● The 4H position provides greater trac-  
tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will  
cause increased fuel consumption and  
higher oil temperatures, and could  
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the  
transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to  
move between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and  
4LO.  
damage  
drivetrain  
components,  
You must push the switch in to select 4LO,  
and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the  
shift selector in the N position when chang-  
ing into or out of 4LO.  
Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is  
not recommended.  
● The 4WD transfer case may not be  
shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-  
bient temperatures and the transfer  
4LO position indicator light may blink  
even when the 4WD shift switch is  
shifted. After driving for a while you can  
change the 4WD transfer case between  
4H and 4LO.  
● The 4LO position provides maximum  
power and traction. Avoid raising ve-  
hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-  
mum speed is approximately 31 MPH  
(50 km/h).  
WARNING  
When parking, apply the parking brake  
before stopping the engine and make sure  
that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and  
the ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise,  
the vehicle could unexpectedly move even  
if the automatic transmission is in the P  
position.  
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD  
shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H  
position. Do not move the 4WD shift  
switch when making a turn or reversing.  
When driving on rough roads,  
●
Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or  
4LO.  
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-  
tween 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while driving  
on steep downhill grades. Use the en-  
gine brake and low automatic transmis-  
sion gears (D1 or D2) for engine  
braking.  
●
Drive carefully according to the road surface  
conditions.  
Starting and driving 5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the vehicle is stuck,  
●
When the vehicle is stopped after mak-  
ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt  
after the shift selector is shifted to N or  
P. This occurs because the transfer  
clutch is released and not because of a  
malfunction.  
●
●
Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.  
If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat  
forward and backward movement to in-  
crease the movement.  
●
If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place  
stones or wooden blocks under the tires.  
Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire  
chains may be effective.  
CAUTION  
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD  
shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H  
position. Do not move the 4WD shift  
switch when making a turn or reversing.  
CAUTION  
● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires  
will sink deep into the mud, making it  
difficult to free the vehicle.  
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while  
driving on steep downhill grades. Use  
the engine brake and low automatic  
transmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-  
gine braking.  
LSD0144  
●
●
Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the  
2WD, AUTO, 4H or 4LO position, depend-  
ing on driving conditions.  
With the switch set to the AUTO position,  
distribution of torque to the front and rear  
wheels changes automatically, depending  
on road conditions encountered [ratio; 0 :  
100 (2WD) → 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This results  
in improved driving stability.  
● Avoid shifting gears with the engine  
running at high speeds as this may  
cause malfunction.  
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch  
with the rear wheels spinning.  
4WD shift switch operations  
● Before placing the 4WD shift switch in  
the 4H position from 2WD or AUTO,  
ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62  
MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so can  
damage the 4WD system.  
●
If the 4WD shift switch is operated  
while making a turn, accelerating or  
decelerating or if the ignition switch is  
turned off while in the AUTO, 4H or  
4LO, you may feel a jolt. This is not  
abnormal.  
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-  
tween 4LO and 4H while driving.  
5-24 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or  
decelerate or move the vehicle in re-  
verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.  
● Engine idling speed is high while warm-  
ing up the engine. Be especially careful  
when starting or driving on slippery sur-  
faces with the 4WD shift switch set in  
AUTO.  
●
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the  
4WD indicator light goes out.  
4WD shift indicator light  
CAUTION  
● When the 4WD shift switch is turned to  
the AUTO position at low ambient tem-  
peratures, the 4WD shift indicator light  
may show 4H. If this happens, all four  
wheels are driven as torque distribution  
is in the 4H position. Be careful as the  
vehicle may become difficult to turn.  
When the vehicle is driven, the 4WD  
shift indicator light should change to  
AUTO.  
LSD0147  
The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the  
vehicle information display.  
The light should turn off within 1 second after  
turning the ignition switch to the ON position.  
● If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-  
tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD  
shift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4H  
position at low ambient temperatures,  
the 2WD mode may be being engaged  
due to malfunctioning drive system. If  
the indicator does not return to normal  
and the 4WD warning light comes on,  
have the system checked by the nearest  
NISSAN dealer.  
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-  
cator light will illuminate the position selected by  
the 4WD shift switch.  
●
The 4WD shift indicator light may blink  
while shifting from one drive mode to  
the other. When the shifting is com-  
pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light  
will come on. If the indicator light does  
not come on immediately, make sure  
the area around the vehicle is safe, and  
Starting and driving 5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High-temperature transfer case oil makes the  
warning light blink rapidly (about twice per sec-  
ond). If the warning light blinks rapidly during  
operation, stop the vehicle in a safe place imme-  
diately. Then if the light goes off after a while, you  
can continue driving.  
4WD warning light  
● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO  
position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-  
ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO  
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear  
and increased fuel consumption.  
Comes on or blinks  
when:  
Warning light  
If the 4WD warning light turns on when  
you are driving on dry hard surface  
roads:  
There is a malfunc-  
tion in the 4–wheel  
drive system  
A large difference between the diameters of front  
and rear wheels will make the warning light blink  
slowly (about once per two seconds). Change  
the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive  
fast.  
Comes on  
–
in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the  
4WD shift switch to 2WD.  
The transfer case  
oil temperature is  
abnormally high  
Blinks rapidly  
Blinks slowly  
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,  
move the shift selector to the N posi-  
tion with the brake pedal depressed,  
and shift the 4WD shift switch to  
2WD.  
CAUTION  
● If the warning light comes on or blinks  
slowly during operation or rapidly after  
stopping the vehicle for a while, have  
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN  
dealer as soon as possible.  
The difference in  
wheel rotation is  
large  
● If the warning light is still on after the  
above operation, have your vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible.  
The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.  
● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not  
recommended when the 4WD warning  
light turns on.  
The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-  
tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after  
the engine is started.  
● The transfer case may be damaged if  
you continue driving with the warning  
light blinking.  
● When the warning light comes on, the  
2WD mode may be engaged even if the  
4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be  
especially careful when driving. If corre-  
sponding parts are malfunctioning, the  
4WD mode will not be engaged even if  
the 4WD shift switch is shifted.  
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system  
when the ignition switch is ON, the warning light  
will either remain illuminated or blink.  
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD  
shift indicator light goes out.  
5-26 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS  
A
●
●
●
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:  
᭺
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the  
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel  
gently touches the curb.  
B
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:  
᭺
Turn the wheels away from the curb and  
move the vehicle back until the curb side  
wheel gently touches the curb.  
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO  
C
CURB:  
᭺
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road  
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-  
ter of the road if it moves.  
WSD0050  
● Never leave the engine running while  
WARNING  
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
the vehicle is unattended.  
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over  
flammable materials such as dry grass,  
waste paper or rags. They may ignite  
and cause a fire.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
●
Safe parking procedures require that  
both the parking brake be set and the  
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-  
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to  
move unexpectedly or roll away and re-  
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift  
selector has been pushed as far forward  
as it can go and cannot be moved without  
depressing the foot brake pedal  
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.  
2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)  
position.  
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into  
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good  
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.  
Starting and driving 5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POWER STEERING  
BRAKE SYSTEM  
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic  
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.  
The brake system has two separate hydraulic  
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still  
have braking at 2 wheels.  
WARNING  
● While driving on a slippery surface, be  
careful when braking, accelerating or  
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-  
erating could cause the wheels to skid  
and result in an accident.  
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you  
will still have control of the vehicle. However,  
much greater steering effort is needed, especially  
in sharp turns and at low speeds.  
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS  
Vacuum assisted brakes  
The brake booster aids braking by using engine  
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the  
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,  
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be  
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-  
tance will be longer.  
● If the engine is not running or is turned  
off while driving, the power assist for  
the brakes will not work. Braking will be  
harder.  
WARNING  
If the engine is not running or is turned off  
while driving, the power assist for the  
steering will not work. Steering will be  
harder to operate.  
Wet brakes  
When the vehicle is washed or driven through  
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your  
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle  
may pull to one side during braking.  
Using the brakes  
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while  
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the  
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.  
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe  
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to  
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return  
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high  
speeds until the brakes function correctly.  
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the  
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and  
downshift to a lower gear before going down a  
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may  
reduce braking performance and could result in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Parking brake break-in  
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the  
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened  
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or  
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the  
best brake performance.  
5-28 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This procedure is described in the vehicle service  
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
– When installing a spare tire, make  
sure that it is the proper size and type  
as specified on the Tire and Loading  
Information label. See “Tire and  
Loading Information label” in the  
“Technical and consumer informa-  
tion” section of this manual.  
WARNING  
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so  
may result in increased stopping  
distances.  
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM  
(ABS)  
Normal operation  
WARNING  
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5  
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road  
conditions.  
– For detailed information, see  
“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section of  
this manual.  
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a  
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-  
vent accidents resulting from careless  
or dangerous driving techniques. It can  
help maintain vehicle control during  
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-  
ber that stopping distances on slippery  
surfaces will be longer than on normal  
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-  
tances may also be longer on rough,  
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you  
are using tire chains. Always maintain a  
safe distance from the vehicle in front  
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-  
sible for safety.  
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are  
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies  
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is  
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You  
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a  
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from  
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal  
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.  
However, the pulsation may indicate that road  
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-  
quired while driving.  
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the  
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard  
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.  
The system detects the rotation speed at each  
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-  
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By  
preventing each wheel from locking, the system  
helps the driver maintain steering control and  
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-  
pery surfaces.  
Self-test feature  
Using the system  
● Tire type and condition may also affect  
braking effectiveness.  
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric  
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The  
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that  
tests the system each time you start the engine  
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or  
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear  
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake  
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-  
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,  
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-  
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer  
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.  
– When replacing tires, install the  
specified size of tires on all four  
wheels.  
Starting and driving 5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)  
SYSTEM  
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a  
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-  
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the  
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The  
brake system then operates normally, but without  
anti-lock assistance.  
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses  
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-  
hicle motion. Under certain situations, the system  
will control braking and engine output to help  
keep the vehicle on its steered path.  
If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system off using the VDC OFF  
switch, most VDC functions will be turned off.  
The SLIP indicator light will flash if wheel spin is  
detected. The ABS will still operate with the VDC  
system off.  
●
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)  
system is operating, the slip indicator in the  
instrument panel blinks.  
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the  
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
When the VDC and Traction Control System  
(TCS) system is operating, you may feel a pulsa-  
tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibra-  
tion from under the hood. This is normal and  
indicates that the VDC system is working prop-  
erly.  
●
If the slip indicator blinks, the road condi-  
tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your  
speed and driving to these conditions. See  
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic  
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-  
struments and controls” section.  
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature  
that tests the system each time you start the  
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse  
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you  
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in  
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an  
indication of a malfunction.  
●
Indicator light  
– If a malfunction occurs in the system, the  
SLIP and  
indicator lights come on  
in the instrument panel.  
– If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into  
4LO the  
indicator light will come  
on and the VDC system will be turned off.  
See “Transfer case shifting procedures”  
earlier in this section.  
– As long as these indicator lights are on,  
the traction control function is canceled.  
5-30 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REAR SONAR SYSTEM  
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-  
faces such as higher banked corners,  
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system  
may not operate properly and the VDC  
OFF indicator light may come on. Do  
not drive on these types of roads.  
WARNING  
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
designed to help improve driving stabil-  
ity but does not prevent accidents due  
to abrupt steering operation at high  
speeds or by careless or dangerous  
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle  
speed and be especially careful when  
driving and cornering on slippery sur-  
faces and always drive carefully.  
● When driving on an unstable surface  
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or  
ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control off  
indicator light may illuminate. This is  
not a malfunction. Restart the engine  
after driving onto a stable surface.  
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.  
If suspension parts such as shock ab-  
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,  
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN  
approved for your vehicle or are ex-  
tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system may not operate  
properly. This could adversely affect ve-  
hicle handling performance, and the  
VDC OFF indicator light may come on.  
● If wheels or tires other than the recom-  
mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system may not operate  
properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-  
trol off indicator light may come on.  
LSD0095  
WARNING  
● Always turn and look back before back-  
ing up. The RSS is not a substitute for  
proper backing procedures.  
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
not a substitute for winter tires or tire  
chains on a snow covered road.  
● Read and understand the limitations of  
the rear sonar system as contained in  
this section. Inclement weather may af-  
fect the function of the RSS; this may  
include reduced performance or a false  
activation.  
● If brake related parts such as brake  
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-  
dard equipment or are extremely dete-  
riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control  
system (VDC) may not operate properly  
and the VDC off indicator light may  
come on.  
● This system is not designed to prevent  
contact with small or moving objects.  
Starting and driving 5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FRONT SONAR SYSTEM (if so  
equipped)  
sound for only 3 seconds. Once the system de-  
tects an object approaching, the tone will sound  
again.  
● The system is designed as an aid to the  
driver in detecting large stationary ob-  
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-  
hicle. The system will not detect small  
objects below the bumper, and may not  
detect objects close to the bumper or  
on the ground.  
The RSS automatically turns on when the shift  
selector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition  
switch is ON. The front and rear sonar system off  
switch on the instrument panel allows the driver  
to turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off,  
the ignition switch must be ON, and the shift  
selector in R (Reverse). An indicator light on the  
switch will illuminate when the system is turned  
off. If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS  
is not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in  
the RSS.  
● If your vehicle sustains damage to the  
rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-  
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may  
be altered causing inaccurate measure-  
ment of obstacles or false alarms.  
The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone to  
warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper  
when the shift selector is in R (Reverse). The  
system may not detect objects at speeds above 3  
mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular  
or moving objects.  
LSD0202  
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear  
bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large  
accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors  
with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it  
will affect the accuracy of the RSS.  
WARNING  
● Always look around before proceeding.  
The FSS is not a substitute for proper  
driving procedures.  
The RSS detects obstacles up to 3 ft (1.0 m)  
from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage  
area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to  
the illustration for approximate zone coverage  
areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the  
rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is  
less than 12 in (30.0 cm) away, the tone will  
sound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-  
ary or receding object further than 12 in (30.0  
cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone will  
● Read and understand the limitations of  
the front sonar system as contained in  
this section. Inclement weather may af-  
fect the function of the FSS, this may  
include reduced performance or a false  
activation.  
● This system is not designed to prevent  
contact with small or moving objects.  
5-32 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COLD WEATHER DRIVING  
3 seconds. Once the system detects an object  
approaching, the tone will sound again.  
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK  
● The system is designed as an aid to the  
driver in detecting large stationary ob-  
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-  
hicle. The system will not detect small  
objects below the bumper, and may not  
detect objects close to the bumper or  
on the ground.  
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-  
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes  
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key  
hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob.  
The FSS automatically turns on when the shift  
selector is placed in a forward gear and the  
ignition switch is ON. The front and rear sonar  
system off switch on the instrument panel allows  
the driver to turn the FSS on and off. To turn the  
FSS off, the ignition switch must be ON, and the  
shift selector in D (Drive). An indicator light on the  
switch will illuminate when the system is turned  
off. If the indicator light illuminates when the FSS  
is not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in  
the FSS.  
ANTI-FREEZE  
● If your vehicle sustains damage to the  
front bumper fascia, leaving it mis-  
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may  
be altered causing inaccurate measure-  
ment of obstacles or false alarms.  
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-  
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the  
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.  
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
The Front Sonar System (FSS) sounds a tone to  
warn the driver of obstacles near the front  
bumper when the shift selector is in a forward  
gear. The system may not detect objects at  
speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect  
certain angular or moving objects.  
Keep the FSS sensors (located on the front  
bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large  
accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors  
with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it  
will affect the accuracy of the FSS.  
BATTERY  
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely  
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may  
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-  
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked  
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
The FSS detects obstacles up to 3 ft (1.0 m) from  
the front bumper with a decreased coverage area  
at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the  
illustration for approximate zone coverage areas).  
As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the  
tone increases. When the obstacle is less than  
12 in (30.0 cm) away, the tone will sound con-  
tinuously. If the FSS detects a stationary or re-  
ceding object further than 12 in (30.0 cm) from  
the side of the vehicle, the tone will sound for only  
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER  
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-  
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the  
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.  
Starting and driving 5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT  
● Allow more stopping distance under  
these conditions. Braking should be  
started sooner than on dry pavement.  
It is recommended that the following items be  
carried in the vehicle during winter:  
TIRE EQUIPMENT  
● Allow greater following distances on  
slippery roads.  
●
●
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove  
ice and snow from the windows and wiper  
blades.  
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to  
provide superior performance on dry pave-  
ment. However, the performance of these  
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy  
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-  
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-  
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL  
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please  
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,  
size, speed rating and availability informa-  
tion.  
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).  
These may appear on an otherwise  
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of  
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-  
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,  
and avoid any sudden steering  
maneuvers.  
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the  
jack to give it firm support.  
●
●
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.  
Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-  
voir tank.  
● Do not use the cruise control on slip-  
pery roads.  
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE  
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust  
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow  
clear of the exhaust pipe and from  
around your vehicle.  
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded  
tires may be used. However, some U.S.  
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their  
use. Check local, state and provincial laws  
before installing studded tires.  
WARNING  
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),  
very cold snow or ice can be slick and  
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will  
have much less traction or “grip” under  
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on  
wet ice until the road is salted or  
sanded.  
Skid and traction capabilities of studded  
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be  
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.  
3. Tire chains may be used. For details see  
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section of this manual.  
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-  
tion. Accelerate and slow down with  
care. If accelerating or downshifting too  
fast, the drive wheels will lose even  
more traction.  
5-34 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6 In case of emergency  
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11  
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12  
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . .6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FLAT TIRE  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING  
SYSTEM (TPMS)  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
WARNING  
● If the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden  
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,  
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road  
to a safe location and stop the vehicle  
as soon as possible. Driving with under-  
inflated tires may permanently damage  
the tires and increase the likelihood of  
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage  
could occur and may lead to an acci-  
dent and could result in serious per-  
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for  
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to  
the recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label to turn the low tire pressure  
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,  
replace it with a spare tire as soon as  
possible.  
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-  
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low  
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of  
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If  
equipped, the system also displays pressure of  
all tires (except the spare tire) on the display  
screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is  
installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being  
driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-  
vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure  
warning light. This system will activate only when  
the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH  
(25 km/h). For more details, refer to  
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”  
in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire  
pressure information” in the “Monitor, climate,  
audio, phone and voice recognition systems”  
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.  
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol  
tire sealant into the tires, as this may  
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE  
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-  
low:  
Stopping the vehicle  
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and  
away from traffic.  
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking  
brake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, tire pressure will not be  
indicated, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
4. Turn off the engine.  
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to  
signal professional road assistance person-  
nel that you need assistance.  
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle  
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic  
and clear of the vehicle.  
6-2 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
● Make sure the parking brake is securely  
applied and the automatic transmission  
is shifted into P (Park).  
● Never change tires when the vehicle is  
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is  
hazardous.  
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is  
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-  
sional road assistance.  
WCE0044  
LCE0158  
1. Lift the luggage board in the cargo area and  
Blocking wheels  
A
remove the jack tool kit  
area. See “Cargo area storage bin” in the  
“Instruments and controls” section.  
from the storage  
᭺
1
Place suitable blocks  
at both the front and  
᭺
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire  
2
to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is  
᭺
2. Remove the cargo area storage bin cover.  
See “Cargo area storage bin” in the “Instru-  
ments and controls” section.  
jacked up.  
WARNING  
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle  
may move and result in personal injury.  
Getting the spare tire and tools  
In case of emergency 6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WCE0192  
LCE0084  
LCE0085  
A
3. Unscrew the rotating mechanism  
coun-  
᭺
4. Assemble the two straight pieces of the jack  
rod. Find the oval-shaped opening above  
the middle of the license plate. Pass the  
T-shaped end of the jack rod through the  
opening and direct it toward the spare tire  
winch, located directly above the spare tire.  
5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the  
square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form  
a handle.  
terclockwise until loosened on cradle. Re-  
move the jack.  
6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into  
the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-  
ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in  
the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod  
counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.  
CAUTION  
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is  
designed to be inserted at an angle as  
shown.  
7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,  
reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer  
chain, and carefully slide the tire from under  
the rear of the vehicle.  
6-4 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE:  
● Do not start or run the engine while  
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the  
vehicle to move. This is especially true  
CAUTION  
Before jacking up the vehicle, make sure  
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position. If the vehicle is lifted up with the  
ignition switch placed in the ON position  
the auto-leveling suspension will become  
disabled after 60 seconds. To reset the  
auto-leveling suspension, cycle the igni-  
tion switch ON/OFF one time.  
Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-  
ing plate on the wheel and then lift the  
spare tire.  
for  
vehicles  
with  
limited  
slip  
differentials.  
Jacking up vehicle and removing the  
damaged tire  
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the  
vehicle while it is on the jack.  
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off  
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to  
move.  
WARNING  
● Never get under the vehicle while it is  
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-  
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-  
port it with safety stands.  
Always refer to the illustration for the correct  
placement and jack-up points for your specific  
vehicle model and jack type.  
● Use only the jack provided with your  
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the  
jack provided with your vehicle on other  
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting  
only your vehicle during a tire change.  
Carefully read the caution label attached to  
the jack body and the following instruc-  
tions.  
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by  
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut  
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts  
until the tire is off the ground.  
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never  
use any other part of the vehicle for jack  
support.  
● Never jack up the vehicle more than  
necessary.  
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.  
In case of emergency 6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WCE0139  
LCE0087  
The jack should be used on firm and  
level ground.  
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack  
as shown.  
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever  
and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the  
tire clears the ground.  
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up  
point as illustrated so the top of the jack  
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The  
jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-  
rows on the side of the frame.  
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the  
tire.  
6-6 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire  
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel  
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely  
in the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-  
hicle completely.  
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.  
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been  
parked for three hours or more or driven  
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire  
and Loading Information label affixed to  
the driver side center pillar.  
WARNING  
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly  
tightened wheel nuts can cause the  
wheel to become loose or come off.  
This could cause an accident.  
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD  
tire pressure, the display of the tire pres-  
sure information may show higher pres-  
sure than the COLD tire pressure after the  
vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile  
(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressure  
increases as the tire temperature rises.  
This does not indicate a system malfunc-  
tion.  
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel  
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts  
to become loose.  
WCE0063  
Installing the spare tire  
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-  
hicle has been driven for 600 miles  
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,  
etc.).  
The spare tire is designed for emergency  
use. See specific instructions under the  
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-  
ment in the vehicle.  
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts  
to the specified torque with  
wrench.  
a
torque  
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-  
tween the wheel and hub.  
Wheel nut tightening torque:  
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)  
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten  
the wheel nuts finger tight.  
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to  
specification at all times. It is recom-  
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to  
specifications at each lubrication interval.  
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel  
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until  
they are tight.  
In case of emergency 6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JUMP STARTING  
To start your engine with a booster battery, the  
instructions and precautions below must be fol-  
lowed.  
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into  
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or  
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-  
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can  
cause severe burns. If the fluid should  
come into contact with anything, imme-  
diately flush the contacted area with  
water.  
WARNING  
● Always make sure that the spare tire  
and jacking equipment are properly se-  
cured after use. Such items can become  
dangerous projectiles in an accident or  
sudden stop.  
If the battery of a vehicle equipped with the  
NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ is discharged, the  
ignition switch cannot be moved from the  
LOCK position, even when using the me-  
chanical key or the valet key. Connect the  
jumper cables to another vehicle, as in the  
case of a discharged battery, and then the  
ignition switch can be moved from the  
LOCK position. Then, jump start the ve-  
hicle.  
● The spare tire is designed for emer-  
gency use. See specific instructions un-  
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in  
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section of this manual.  
● Keep battery out of the reach of  
children.  
● The booster battery must be rated at 12  
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery  
can damage your vehicle.  
● Whenever working on or near a battery,  
always wear suitable eye protectors (for  
example, goggles or industrial safety  
spectacles) and remove rings, metal  
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean  
over the battery when jump starting.  
WARNING  
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can  
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in  
severe injury or death. It could also  
damage your vehicle.  
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always  
present in the vicinity of the battery.  
Keep all sparks and flames away from  
the battery.  
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen  
battery. It could explode and cause se-  
rious injury.  
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine  
cooling fan. It could come on at any  
time. Keep hands and other objects  
away from it.  
6-8 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Make sure the jumper cables do not  
touch moving parts in the engine com-  
partment and that the cable clamps do  
not contact any other metal.  
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and  
let it run for a few minutes.  
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-  
hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-  
gine of the vehicle being jump started.  
CAUTION  
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for  
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does  
not start right away, place the ignition  
switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4  
seconds before trying again.  
WCE0054  
3. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so  
equipped). Cover the battery with an old  
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.  
WARNING  
Always follow the instructions below.  
Failure to do so could result in damage to  
the charging system and cause personal  
injury.  
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-  
nect the negative cable and then the positive  
cable.  
4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence  
A
B
C
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺  
D
illustrated (  
,
,
,
).  
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,  
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-  
teries near each other.  
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be  
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover  
the vent holes as it may be contaminated  
with corrosive acid.  
CAUTION  
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive  
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for  
example, strut mounting bolt, engine  
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.  
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.  
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-  
lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary  
electrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-  
tioner, etc.).  
In case of emergency 6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PUSH STARTING  
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS  
WARNING  
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for  
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator  
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-  
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not  
open the hood further until no steam or  
coolant can be seen.  
WARNING  
Do not push start this vehicle. The three-  
way catalyst may be damaged.  
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle  
overheats. Doing so could cause engine  
damage or a vehicle fire.  
CAUTION  
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,  
never remove the radiator or coolant  
reservoir cap while the engine is still  
hot. When the radiator or coolant reser-  
voir cap is removed, pressurized hot  
water will spurt out, possibly causing  
serious injury.  
4. Open the engine hood.  
Automatic transmission models cannot  
be push-started or tow-started. Attempt-  
ing to do so may cause transmission  
damage.  
WARNING  
If steam or water is coming from the en-  
gine, stand clear to prevent getting  
burned.  
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-  
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or  
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is  
running. The radiator hoses and radiator  
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,  
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or  
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-  
gine.  
ing out.  
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an  
extremely high temperature gauge reading and  
the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine  
coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you  
feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal  
noise, etc. take the following steps.  
WARNING  
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply  
the parking brake and move the shift selector  
to P (Park).  
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,  
jewelry or clothing to come into contact  
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the  
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling  
fan can start at any time.  
Do not stop the engine.  
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the  
windows, move the heater or air conditioner  
temperature control to maximum hot and fan  
control to high speed.  
6-10 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE  
For information about towing your vehicle behind  
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”  
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-  
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank  
with the engine running. Add coolant to the  
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.  
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN  
dealer.  
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in  
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be  
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-  
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-  
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-  
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws  
and procedures for towing. To assure proper  
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your  
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service  
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have  
the service operator carefully read the following  
precautions:  
WARNING  
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being  
towed.  
● Never get under your vehicle after it has  
been lifted by a tow truck.  
CAUTION  
● When towing, make sure that the trans-  
mission, axles, steering system and  
powertrain are in working condition. If  
any of these conditions apply, dollies or  
a flatbed tow truck must be used.  
● Always attach safety chains before  
towing.  
In case of emergency 6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the speed or distance must necessarily be  
greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing  
to prevent damage to the transmission.  
Two-wheel drive models  
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed  
with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or  
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.  
CAUTION  
● Never tow automatic transmission  
models with the rear wheels on the  
ground or four wheels on the ground  
(forward or backward), as this may  
cause serious and expensive damage to  
the transmission. If it is necessary to  
tow the vehicle with the front wheels  
raised always use towing dollies under  
the rear wheels.  
● When towing automatic transmission  
models with the front wheels on the  
ground or on towing dollies:  
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position and secure the steering  
wheel in a straight-ahead position  
with a rope or similar device. Never  
secure the steering wheel by placing  
the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion. This may cause damage to the  
lock mechanism.  
ACE1037  
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY  
NISSAN  
6-12 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WCE0162  
LCE0083  
Four-wheel drive models  
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck  
vehicle)  
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be  
used when towing your vehicle or place the ve-  
hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.  
Pulling a stuck vehicle  
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,  
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-  
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the re-  
covery device manufacturer’s instructions.  
CAUTION  
Never tow 4WD models with any of the  
wheels on the ground as this may cause  
serious and expensive damage to the  
transfer case and transmission.  
Attach the tow strap to the towing hook.  
In case of emergency 6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55  
km/h).  
● Pulling devices should be routed so  
they do not touch any part of the sus-  
pension, steering, brake or cooling  
systems.  
WARNING  
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.  
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few  
tries, contact a professional towing service  
to remove the vehicle.  
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.  
This could cause them to explode and  
result in serious injury. Parts of your  
vehicle could also overheat and be  
damaged.  
● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas  
straps are not recommended for use in  
vehicle towing or recovery.  
Rocking a stuck vehicle  
CAUTION  
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,  
use the following procedure:  
● Tow chains or cables must be attached  
only to the main structural members of  
the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so  
equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body  
will be damaged.  
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System  
(VDC).  
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the  
vehicle is clear of obstructions.  
● Use the towing hook (if so equipped)  
only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,  
snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle  
for a long distance using only the tow-  
ing hook.  
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear  
an area around the front tires.  
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-  
ward.  
● The towing hook is under tremendous  
force when used to free a stuck vehicle.  
Never pull the hook at an angle.  
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)  
and D (Drive).  
● Always pull the cable straight out from  
the front or rear of the vehicle.  
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible  
to maintain the rocking motion.  
● Release the accelerator pedal before  
shifting between R and D.  
6-14 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Appearance and care  
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Tire dressings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Most common factors contributing to vehicle  
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Environmental factors influence the rate of  
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEANING EXTERIOR  
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-  
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.  
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas  
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the  
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are  
open. Spray water under the body and in the  
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away  
road salt.  
CAUTION  
● Do not use car washes that use acid in  
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-  
cially brushless ones, use some acid for  
cleaning. The acid may react with some  
plastic vehicle components, causing  
them to crack. This could affect their  
appearance, and also could cause them  
not to function properly. Always check  
with your car wash to confirm that acid  
is not used.  
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your  
vehicle as soon as you can:  
●
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage  
from acid rain.  
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to  
avoid water spots.  
●
●
after driving on coastal roads.  
WAXING  
when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-  
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get  
on the paint surface.  
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and  
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is  
recommended to remove built-up wax residue  
and to avoid a weathered appearance before  
re-applying wax.  
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong  
household soap, strong chemical deter-  
gents, gasoline or solvents.  
●
when dust or mud builds up on the surface.  
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle  
inside a garage or in a covered area.  
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-  
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as  
the surface may become water-spotted.  
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the  
proper product.  
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a  
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body  
cover.  
●
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-  
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the  
wax.  
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough  
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care  
must be taken when removing  
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-  
stances so the paint surface is not  
scratched or damaged.  
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface  
when putting on or removing the body  
cover.  
●
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,  
cutting compounds or cleaners that may  
damage the vehicle finish.  
WASHING  
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing  
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the  
finish or leave swirl marks.  
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean  
water.  
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of  
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild  
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose  
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm  
(never hot) water.  
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,  
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to  
7-2 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHROME PARTS  
REMOVING SPOTS  
CAUTION  
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-  
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.  
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,  
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the  
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or  
staining. Special cleaning products are available  
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory  
store.  
When cleaning the inside of the windows,  
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive  
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant  
cleaners. They could damage the electri-  
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or  
rear window defroster elements.  
TIRE DRESSINGS  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire  
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to  
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-  
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may  
react with the coating and form a compound. This  
compound may come off the tire while driving and  
stain the vehicle paint.  
UNDERBODY  
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS  
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is  
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in  
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and  
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-  
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-  
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must  
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.  
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-  
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during  
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If  
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.  
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the  
following precautions:  
CAUTION  
●
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-  
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than  
with an oil-based tire dressing.  
Follow the directions below to avoid  
staining or discoloring the wheels:  
GLASS  
●
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help  
prevent it from entering the tire  
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to  
remove).  
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong  
acid or alkali contents to clean the  
wheels.  
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film  
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to  
become coated with a film after the vehicle is  
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft  
cloth will easily remove this film.  
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the  
wheels when they are hot. The wheel  
temperature should be the same as am-  
bient temperature.  
●
●
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry  
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-  
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.  
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove  
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the  
cleaner is applied.  
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-  
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.  
Appearance and care 7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEANING INTERIOR  
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior  
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum  
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and  
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-  
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a  
dry, soft cloth.  
●
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on  
the vents. These products can cause imme-  
diate damage and discoloration when  
spilled on interior surfaces.  
CAUTION  
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-  
lar material.  
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and  
damaging to leather surfaces and  
should be removed promptly. Do not  
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,  
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-  
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as  
they may damage the leather’s natural  
finish.  
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-  
structions before using the air fresheners.  
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to  
maintain the appearance of the leather.  
FLOOR MATS  
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-  
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it  
easier to clean the interior. No matter what  
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for  
your vehicle and are properly positioned in  
the footwell to prevent interference with  
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained  
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-  
come excessively worn.  
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-  
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-  
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or  
bleach the seat material.  
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-  
ommended by the manufacturer.  
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean  
the meter and gauge lens.  
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on  
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-  
age the lens cover.  
WARNING  
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot  
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can  
damage the seat or occupant classifica-  
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-  
tion of the air bag system and result in  
serious personal injury.  
AIR FRESHENERS  
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect  
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,  
take the following precautions:  
●
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-  
manent discoloration when they contact ve-  
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-  
ener in a location that allows it to hang free  
and not contact an interior surface.  
7-4 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CORROSION PROTECTION  
SEAT BELTS  
MOST COMMON FACTORS  
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE  
CORROSION  
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them  
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.  
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade  
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”  
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-  
tal restraint system” section of this manual.  
●
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt  
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,  
and other areas.  
●
Damage to paint and other protective coat-  
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or  
minor traffic accidents.  
WARNING  
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the  
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or  
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,  
since these materials may severely  
weaken the seat belt webbing.  
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS  
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF  
CORROSION  
LAI0009  
Floor mat positioning aid  
Moisture  
This vehicle includes two driver’s side front floor  
mat brackets and one passenger’s side front floor  
mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place.  
NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed  
for your vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat  
has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the  
passenger’s side has one grommet hole. Position  
each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook  
through the floor mat grommet holes while cen-  
tering the mat in the footwell.  
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-  
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.  
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside  
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to  
avoid floor panel corrosion.  
Relative humidity  
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high  
relative humidity, especially those areas where  
the temperatures stay above freezing and where  
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is  
used.  
Periodically check to make certain the mats are  
properly positioned.  
Appearance and care 7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Temperature  
CAUTION  
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-  
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.  
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-  
bris from the passenger compartment  
by washing it out with a hose. Remove  
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.  
Air pollution  
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air  
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-  
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-  
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.  
● Never allow water or other liquids to  
come in contact with electronic compo-  
nents inside the vehicle as this may  
damage them.  
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE  
FROM CORROSION  
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are  
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion  
and deterioration of underbody components  
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,  
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.  
●
●
●
●
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the  
vehicle clean.  
Always check for minor damage to the paint  
and repair it as soon as possible.  
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned  
periodically.  
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors  
open to avoid water accumulation.  
For additional protection against rust and corro-  
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-  
sult a NISSAN dealer.  
Check the underbody for accumulation of  
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water  
as soon as possible.  
7-6 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10  
5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16  
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16  
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16  
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
In-cabin microfilter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23  
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24  
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25  
Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . .8-27  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Fog lights (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29  
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38  
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40  
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41  
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS  
GENERAL MAINTENANCE  
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-  
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-  
vice intervals to save you both time and money.  
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-  
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s  
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-  
sions and engine performance.  
Performing general maintenance checks requires  
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general  
automotive tools.  
During the normal day-to-day operation of the  
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-  
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If  
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or  
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a  
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you  
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that  
repairs are required.  
These checks or inspections can be done by you,  
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Where to go for service  
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that  
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general  
maintenance, is performed.  
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle  
appears to malfunction, have the systems  
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.  
When performing any checks or maintenance  
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-  
tions” later in this section.  
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who  
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper  
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-  
nance chain.  
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists  
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service  
information through technical bulletins, service  
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They  
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-  
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather  
than after they have worked on it.  
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL  
MAINTENANCE ITEMS  
Additional information on the following  
items with “ * ”is found later in this section.  
Scheduled maintenance  
For your convenience, both required and optional  
scheduled maintenance items are described and  
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance  
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure  
that necessary maintenance is performed on your  
NISSAN at regular intervals.  
Outside the vehicle  
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s  
service department performs the best job to meet  
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —  
in a reliable and economical way.  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
performed from time to time, unless otherwise  
specified.  
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors  
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure  
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,  
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.  
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the  
hood from opening when the primary latch is  
released.  
General maintenance  
General maintenance includes those items which  
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-  
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-  
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these  
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.  
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When driving in areas using road salt or other  
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.  
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at  
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be  
needed.  
Automatic transmission P (Park) position  
mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your  
vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in  
the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.  
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.  
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail  
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all  
operating properly and installed securely. Also  
check headlight aim.  
●
For additional information regarding tires,  
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”  
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in  
the Warranty Information Booklet.  
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-  
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-  
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the  
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a  
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat  
away from the pedal.  
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking  
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,  
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if  
necessary.  
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular  
basis. Check the windshield at least every six  
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-  
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair  
facility.  
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the  
vehicle to one side when applied.  
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every  
7,500 miles (12,000 km).  
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or  
wear if they do not wipe properly.  
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-  
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held  
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake  
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,  
see a NISSAN dealer.  
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often  
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-  
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the  
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully  
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.  
Inside the vehicle  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-  
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-  
hicle, etc.  
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat  
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they  
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in  
every position. Check that the head restraints  
move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so  
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
transmitter components Replace the TPMS  
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap  
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.  
Additional information on the following  
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-  
tion.  
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle  
should pull to either side while driving on a  
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or  
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel  
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt  
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters  
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,  
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-  
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.  
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth  
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind  
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away  
from the pedal.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-  
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard  
steering or strange noises.  
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts  
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.  
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the  
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,  
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the  
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose  
connections.  
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking  
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.  
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain  
back into the oil pan.  
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all  
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.  
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-  
posed to corrosive substances such as those  
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very  
important to remove these substances from the  
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor  
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the  
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-  
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas  
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See  
the “Appearance and care” section of this  
manual.  
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that  
the wipers and washer operate properly and that  
the wipers do not streak.  
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose  
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the  
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of  
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust  
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the  
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and  
driving” section of this manual.  
Windshield defroster Check that the air  
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in  
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or  
air conditioner.  
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,  
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has  
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the  
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should  
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,  
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-  
diately.  
Under the hood and vehicle  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
checked periodically (for example, each time you  
check the engine oil or refuel).  
Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is  
adequate fluid in the reservoir.  
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It  
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-  
hicles operated in high temperatures or under  
severe conditions require frequent checks of the  
battery fluid level.  
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check  
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine  
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,  
cracks, etc.  
Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid  
level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the  
reservoir.  
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level  
when the engine is cold.  
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS  
When performing any inspection or maintenance  
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent  
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to  
the vehicle. The following are general precau-  
tions which should be closely observed.  
●
Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-  
matic engine cooling fan. It may come on  
at any time without warning, even if the  
ignition switch is in the OFF position and  
the engine is not running. To avoid injury,  
always disconnect the negative battery  
cable before working near the fan.  
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and  
coolant. Improperly disposed engine  
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle  
fluids can damage the environment. Al-  
ways conform to local regulations for  
disposal of vehicle fluid.  
WARNING  
● Never leave the engine or automatic  
transmission related component har-  
nesses disconnected while the ignition  
switch is in the ON position.  
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-  
ply the parking brake securely and  
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle  
from moving. Move the shift selector to  
P (Park).  
● If you must run the engine in an en-  
closed space such as a garage, be sure  
there is proper ventilation for exhaust  
gases to escape.  
● Never connect or disconnect the battery  
or any transistorized component while  
the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
● Never get under the vehicle while it is  
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-  
sary to work under the vehicle, support  
it with safety stands.  
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF  
or LOCK position when performing any  
parts replacement or repairs.  
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-  
matic engine cooling fan. It may come  
on at any time without warning, even if  
the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position and the engine is not running.  
To avoid injury, always disconnect the  
negative battery cable before working  
near the fan.  
● If you must work with the engine run-  
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair  
and tools away from moving fans, belts  
and any other moving parts.  
● Keep smoking materials, flame and  
sparks away from the fuel tank and  
battery.  
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel  
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by  
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines  
are under high pressure even when the  
engine is off.  
● It is advisable to secure or remove any  
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,  
such as rings, watches, etc. before  
working on your vehicle.  
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section  
gives instructions regarding only those items  
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.  
● Always wear eye protection whenever  
you work on your vehicle.  
You should be aware that incomplete or improper  
servicing may result in operating difficulties or  
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty  
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,  
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
● Do not work under the hood while the  
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and  
wait until it cools down.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK  
LOCATIONS  
1. Battery  
2. Fuse/fusible link box  
3. Transmission dipstick  
4. Engine oil filler cap  
5. Brake fluid reservoir  
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
7. Air cleaner  
8. Drive belt location  
9. Radiator cap  
10. Power steering fluid reservoir  
11. Engine oil dipstick  
12. Engine coolant reservoir  
NOTE:  
Engine cover removed for clarity.  
WDI0630  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
 
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM  
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory  
CAUTION  
with  
Genuine  
NISSAN  
Long  
Life  
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure  
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life  
Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent  
with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-  
freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled  
water. The use of other types of coolant  
solutions or coolant colors, such as or-  
ange, may damage the engine cooling  
system.  
Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-  
freeze and coolant protection.The anti-freeze so-  
lution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Ad-  
ditional engine cooling system additives are not  
necessary.  
WARNING  
● Never remove the radiator or coolant  
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.  
Wait until the engine and radiator cool  
down. Serious burns could be caused  
by high pressure fluid escaping from  
the radiator. See precautions in “If your  
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case  
of emergency” section of this manual.  
Outside temperature  
down to  
Genuine  
NISSAN  
Long Life  
Antifreeze/  
Coolant or  
equivalent  
Demineral-  
ized or dis-  
tilled water  
LDI0369  
°C  
°F  
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT  
LEVEL  
-35  
-30  
50%  
50%  
● The radiator is equipped with a pres-  
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when  
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below  
the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the  
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the  
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is  
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator  
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add  
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.  
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-  
gine damage, use only  
NISSAN radiator cap.  
a
genuine  
The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-  
ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten  
it until a clicking sound is heard.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE OIL  
If the cooling system frequently requires  
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.  
Check your local regulations.  
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT  
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.  
The service procedure can be found in the  
NISSAN Service Manual.  
Improper servicing can result in reduced  
heater performance and engine overheat-  
ing.  
WARNING  
LDI0370  
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,  
never change the coolant when the en-  
gine is hot.  
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
● Never remove the radiator or engine  
coolant reservoir cap when the engine  
is hot. Serious burns could be caused  
by high pressure fluid escaping from  
the radiator.  
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches  
operating temperature.  
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10  
minutes for the oil to drain back into  
the oil pan.  
● Avoid direct skin contact with used  
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash  
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner  
as soon as possible.  
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-  
insert it all the way.  
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-  
dren and pets.  
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-  
erating the engine with an insufficient  
amount of oil can damage the engine, and  
such damage is not covered by warranty.  
LDI0371  
WDI0504  
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil  
CHANGING ENGINE OIL  
level. It should be between the H (High) and  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
B
L (Low) marks  
. This is the normal oper-  
᭺
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below  
A
the L (Low) mark , remove the oil filler cap  
᭺
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches  
operating temperature, then turn it off.  
and pour recommended oil through the  
C
opening. Do not overfill  
.
᭺
A
3. Remove the oil filler cap  
counterclockwise.  
by turning it  
᭺
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.  
It is normal to add some oil between oil  
maintenance intervals or during the  
break-in period, depending on the severity  
of operating conditions.  
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug  
B
.
᭺
B
5. Remove the drain plug  
with a wrench by  
᭺
turning it counterclockwise and completely  
drain the oil.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and  
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine  
oil filter” later in this section.  
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through  
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler  
cap securely.  
See “Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-  
sumer information”section of this manual for  
drain and refill capacity.  
●
●
Waste oil must be disposed of prop-  
erly.  
Check your local regulations.  
The drain and refill capacity depends on the  
oil temperature and drain time. Use these  
specifications for reference only. Always use  
the dipstick to determine when the proper  
amount of oil is in the engine.  
WARNING  
● Prolonged and repeated contact with  
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.  
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with  
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash  
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner  
as soon as possible.  
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around  
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-  
quired.  
WDI0505  
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER  
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of  
children.  
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10  
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.  
Add engine oil if necessary.  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
2. Turn the engine off.  
CAUTION  
A
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine  
oil may be hot.  
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter  
.
᭺
A
4. Loosen the oil filter  
with an oil filter  
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then  
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.  
᭺
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new  
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with  
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.  
CAUTION  
Drain plug tightening torque:  
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)  
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine  
oil may be hot.  
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5-SPEED AUTOMATIC  
TRANSMISSION FLUID  
POWER STEERING FLUID  
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with  
a clean rag.  
When checking or replacement is required, we  
recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Be sure to remove any old gasket material  
remaining on the sealing surface of the  
engine. Failure to do so could lead to an  
oil leak and engine damage.  
● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If  
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not  
available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF  
may also be used.  
● Using automatic transmission fluid  
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S  
ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-  
tion in driveability and automatic trans-  
mission durability, and may damage the  
automatic transmission, which is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-  
ited warranty.  
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean  
engine oil.  
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance  
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.  
8. Start the engine and check for leakage  
around the oil filter. Correct as required.  
WDI0256  
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT  
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir  
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -  
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the  
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-  
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).  
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10  
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if  
necessary.  
The specified automatic transmission fluid is also  
described on caution labels located in the engine  
compartment.  
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-  
ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX  
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove  
the cap and fill through the opening.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BRAKE FLUID  
For further brake fluid specification information,  
refer to “Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer  
information” section of this manual.  
CAUTION  
● DO NOT OVERFILL.  
● Recommended fluid  
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.  
is  
Genuine  
WARNING  
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-  
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated  
fluid may damage the brake system.  
The use of improper fluids can damage  
the brake system and affect the vehi-  
cle’s stopping ability.  
● Clean the filler cap before removing.  
LDI0374  
● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be  
stored carefully in marked containers  
out of reach of children.  
BRAKE FLUID  
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the  
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake  
warning light comes on, add DOT 3 brake fluid up  
to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently,  
the system should be checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
CAUTION  
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-  
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is  
spilled, immediately wash the surface  
with water.  
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDOW WASHER FLUID  
BATTERY  
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving  
conditions require an increased amount of win-  
dow washer fluid.  
●
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.  
Clean the battery with a solution of baking  
soda and water.  
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-  
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-  
freeze or equivalent.  
●
●
Make certain the terminal connections are  
clean and securely tightened.  
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or  
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery  
terminal cable to prevent discharge.  
CAUTION  
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze  
coolant for window washer solution.  
This may result in damage to the paint.  
WARNING  
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an  
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-  
gen gas generated by the battery is ex-  
plosive. Explosive gases can cause  
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery  
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics  
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can  
cause blindness or injury. After touch-  
ing a battery or battery cap, do not  
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly  
wash your hands. If the acid contacts  
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately  
flush with water for at least 15 minutes  
and seek medical attention.  
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir  
tank with washer fluid concentrates at  
full strength. Some methyl alcohol  
based washer fluid concentrates may  
permanently stain the grille if spilled  
while filling the window washer reser-  
voir tank.  
LDI0375  
WINDOW WASHER FLUID  
RESERVOIR  
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.  
Add window washer fluid when the low window  
washer fluid warning light comes on.  
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with  
water to the manufacturer’s recom-  
mended levels before pouring the fluid  
into the window washer reservoir tank.  
Do not use the window washer reservoir  
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-  
trate and water.  
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the  
cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window  
washer fluid into the tank opening.  
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better  
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield  
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-  
structions for the mixture ratio.  
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent  
caps tight and the battery level.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in  
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can  
cause a higher load on the battery  
which can generate heat, reduce bat-  
tery life, and in some cases lead to an  
explosion.  
● When working on or near a battery, al-  
ways wear suitable eye protection and  
remove all jewelry.  
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-  
cessories contain lead and lead com-  
pounds. Wash hands after handling.  
● Keep battery out of the reach of  
children.  
WDI0224  
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as  
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery  
case.  
LDI0302  
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is  
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled  
water to bring the level up to the bottom of  
the filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstall  
the vent caps.  
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL  
SYSTEM  
A
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under  
severe conditions require frequent checks of the  
battery fluid level.  
The current sensor  
is located near the battery  
᭺
along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-  
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to  
ground them to a suitable body ground such as  
the frame or engine block area.  
JUMP STARTING  
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”  
in the “In case of emergency” section of this  
manual. If the engine does not start by jump  
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.  
Contact a NISSAN dealer.  
LDI0706  
CAUTION  
● Do not ground accessories directly to  
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-  
pass the variable voltage control sys-  
tem and the vehicle battery may not  
charge completely.  
● Use electrical accessories with the en-  
gine running to avoid discharging the  
vehicle battery.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage  
control system. This system measures the  
amount of electrical discharge from the battery  
and controls voltage generated by the generator.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRIVE BELT  
SPARK PLUGS  
WARNING  
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or  
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.  
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.  
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual  
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is  
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced  
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.  
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-  
tion and tension in accordance with the  
maintenance schedule found in the  
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.  
WDI0661  
SDI1895  
1. Power steering fluid pump  
2. Automatic belt tensioner  
3. Water pump  
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS  
Iridium-tipped spark plugs  
4. Cooling fan  
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped  
᭺
5. Air conditioner compressor  
6. Crankshaft pulley  
7. Generator  
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type  
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-  
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN  
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service  
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-  
ping.  
●
Always replace spark plugs with rec-  
ommended or equivalent ones.  
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AIR CLEANER  
NOTE:  
WARNING  
After installing a new air cleaner, make  
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the  
housing and the screw is tightened.  
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are  
off and that the parking brake is engaged  
securely.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
● Operating the engine with the air  
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-  
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not  
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if  
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and  
the engine backfires, you could be  
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner  
removed, and be careful when working  
on the engine with the air cleaner  
removed.  
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-  
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket  
can damage the spark plugs.  
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN  
dealer for assistance.  
LDI0376  
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and  
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance  
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-  
nance Guide.”When replacing the filter, wipe the  
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the  
cover with a damp cloth.  
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or  
attempt to start the engine with the air  
cleaner removed. Doing so could result  
in serious injury.  
To remove the air cleaner filter:  
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER  
1
Loosen the screw.  
᭺
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-  
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces  
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is  
located behind the glove box. Refer to the  
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for  
change intervals.  
2
Disconnect the electrical connector.  
᭺
3
Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleaner  
cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.  
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To replace the filter, perform the following proce-  
dure:  
WDI0622  
WDI0623  
1. Remove the 2 lower glove box screws.  
2. Open the glove box, then remove the three  
upper glove box screws. Remove the glove  
box assembly from the instrument panel to  
access the in-cabin microfilter cover.  
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES  
CLEANING  
If your windshield is not clear after using the  
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters  
when running, wax or other material may be on  
the blade or windshield.  
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer  
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is  
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear  
water.  
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked  
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then  
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-  
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades  
and using the wiper, replace the blades.  
LDI0387  
LDI0404  
3. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the  
filter cover.  
NOTE:  
CAUTION  
The filters are marked with air flow arrows.  
The end of the filter with the arrow should  
face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows  
should face downward.  
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-  
age the windshield and impair driver  
vision.  
4. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide  
it over to the right. Insert the second filter  
into the housing.  
5. Replace the filter cover.  
6. Install the glove box assembly.  
7. Fill out the date information on the small  
replacement label and attach it to the glove  
box lid.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Return the wiper to its original position and  
release it until it has made contact with the  
windshield.  
CAUTION  
● After wiper blade replacement, return  
the wiper arm to its original position;  
otherwise it may be damaged when the  
hood is opened.  
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the  
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-  
aged from wind pressure.  
WDI0408  
REPLACING  
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.  
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.  
2
Push the release tab, then move the wiper  
blade down the wiper arm to remove.  
᭺
3
Remove the wiper blade.  
WDI0629  
᭺
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not  
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper  
arm until it clicks into place.  
A
to let wax get into the washer nozzle . This may  
᭺
cause clogging or improper windshield washer  
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the  
groove.  
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it  
B
with a needle or small pin  
.
᭺
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LDI0379  
Rear window wiper blade  
1
Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-  
dow.  
᭺
2
Push the wiper blade in and pivot until the  
blade becomes free.  
᭺
3
Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm and  
snap into place.  
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BRAKES  
FUSES  
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the  
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
Proper brake inspection intervals should  
be followed. For more information regarding  
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-  
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-  
vice and Maintenance Guide”.  
Self-adjusting brakes  
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting  
brakes.  
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust  
every time the brake pedal is applied.  
WARNING  
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system  
check if the brake pedal height does not  
return to normal.  
LDI0455  
A
Two types of fuses are used. Type  
is used in  
Brake pad wear indicators  
᭺
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type  
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible  
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-  
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-  
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in  
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the  
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes  
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator  
sound is heard.  
B
is used in the passenger compartment fuse  
᭺
box.  
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They  
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse  
box.  
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-  
partment and passenger compartment fuse  
boxes.  
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-  
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may  
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to  
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the  
function or performance of the brake system.  
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the  
tab and lifting the cover up.  
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The  
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse  
block in the passenger compartment.  
LDI0457  
LDI0380  
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,  
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse  
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not  
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the  
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.  
ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
CAUTION  
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower  
amperage rating than specified on the  
fuse box cover. This could damage the  
electrical system or cause a fire.  
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-  
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the  
underhood fuse boxes.  
If any electrical equipment does not come on,  
check for an open fuse.  
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are OFF.  
2. Open the engine hood.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.  
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.  
WDI0452  
LDI0618  
A
5. If the fuse is open  
, replace it with a new  
᭺
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT  
B
fuse  
.
᭺
CAUTION  
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical  
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower  
amperage rating than specified on the  
fuse box cover. This could damage the  
electrical system or cause a fire.  
Fusible links  
If the electrical equipment does not operate and  
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible  
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,  
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.  
If any electrical equipment does not operate,  
check for an open fuse.  
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are OFF.  
2. Open the glove box to access the fuse box  
cover.  
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BATTERY REPLACEMENT  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to allow children to swallow  
the battery or removed parts.  
WDI0452  
LDI0456  
Type A  
A
Type B  
5. If the fuse is open  
, replace it with an  
.
᭺
B
equivalent good fuse  
᭺
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.  
7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical  
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
Do not touch the internal circuit and electric  
terminals as it could cause a malfunction.  
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.  
4
Close the lid securely.  
᭺
5. Press the  
button, then the  
button two or three times to check the key-  
fob operation.  
If the battery is removed for any reason  
other than replacement, perform step 5.  
●
●
●
An improperly disposed battery can  
hurt the environment. Always confirm  
local regulations for battery disposal.  
The keyfob is water-resistant; how-  
ever, if it does get wet, immediately  
wipe completely dry.  
The operational range of the keyfob  
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)  
from the vehicle. This range may vary  
with conditions.  
LDI0484  
3
C
Install a new battery  
down.  
with the “+” facing  
FCC Notice:  
᭺
᭺
KEYFOB (if so equipped)  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:  
●
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the  
battery across the contact points will seri-  
ously deplete the storage capacity.  
1
A
Open the lid using a coin  
.
᭺
᭺
2
B
Remove the battery  
.
᭺
᭺
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada.  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so  
equipped)  
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-  
lows:  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation of the device.  
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-  
gent Key.  
A
B
2. Insert a small screwdriver  
into the slit  
᭺
᭺
of the corner and twist it to separate the  
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to  
protect the casing.  
3. Replace the battery with a new one.  
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-  
lent.  
● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-  
tric terminals as doing so could cause a  
malfunction.  
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding  
the battery across the contact points will  
seriously deplete the storage capacity.  
● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-  
tom of the case.  
WDI0620  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIGHTS  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation of the device.  
HEADLIGHTS  
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb  
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which  
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-  
cause the headlight assembly must be removed  
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your  
NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed  
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may  
break if the glass envelope is scratched  
or the bulb is dropped.  
WDI0621  
● When handling the bulb, do not touch  
the glass envelope.  
C
᭺ ᭺  
D
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated  
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.  
● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE  
HANDS.  
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for  
replacement.  
● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-  
light reflector for a long period of time  
as dust, moisture and smoke may enter  
the headlight body and affect the per-  
formance of the headlight.  
FCC Notice:  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing  
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is  
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada.  
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
To adjust the fog light vertical aim: Access  
the aiming screw from underneath the front  
bumper. The aiming screw is located on the  
bottom of the fog light housing. Turn the  
screw clockwise to raise the pattern. Turn  
the screw counterclockwise to lower the  
pattern.  
Use the same number and wattage as  
shown in the chart  
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the  
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A  
temperature difference between the inside and  
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not  
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect  
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)  
Replacing the fog light bulb  
LDI0382  
CAUTION  
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.  
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed  
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may  
break if the glass envelope is scratched  
or the bulb is dropped.  
2. The fog light is accessible in front of the  
front tire and behind the bumper.  
1
3. Disconnect the bulb connector  
.
᭺
● When handling the bulb, do not touch  
the glass envelope.  
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re-  
move.  
●
Use the same number and wattage as  
originally installed as shown in the chart.  
5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog  
light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the  
bulb when removing it. Do not touch the  
glass envelope.  
● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light  
for a long period of time as dust, mois-  
ture and smoke may enter the fog light  
body and affect the performance of the  
fog light.  
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS  
Item  
Wattage (W)  
Bulb No.  
Headlight assembly*  
High  
60/65  
51/55  
8/27  
3.8  
(LED)  
27  
HB3/9005  
HB4/9006  
3457K  
194  
Low  
Park/Turn  
Sidemarker  
Side turn signal light* (if so equipped)  
Front fog light  
Puddle lamp  
—
881  
13  
906  
Room/map lights  
Personal lights  
Footwell*  
8
–
6
WXW52  
158  
3.4  
3.4  
1.8  
3.8  
8
Glove box light*  
Vanity mirror light  
Step light  
158  
–
194  
Cargo light  
AL67  
—
High-mounted stop light*  
Rear combination light  
Tail/Stop  
—
7/27  
16  
27  
5
3157K  
921LF  
3156K  
168  
Backup (reversing)  
Turn  
License plate light  
* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.  
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.  
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Room/map light  
2. Front personal lights  
3. Step light  
4. Puddle lamp/Side turn signal light (if so  
equipped)  
5. High-mount stoplight  
6. Cargo light  
7. License plate light  
8. Rear combination light  
9. Headlight assembly  
10. Fog light  
WDI0263  
Replacement procedures  
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When  
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp  
and/or cover.  
Indicates bulb removal  
LDI0383  
Indicates bulb installation  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LDI0364  
LDI0385  
Personal lights  
Vanity mirror  
1
1
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
᭺
᭺
LDI0389  
Room/map lights  
1
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
᭺
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LDI0341  
LDI0388  
WDI0233  
Cargo light  
Step light  
Puddle light  
1
1
1
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
᭺
᭺
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHEELS AND TIRES  
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the  
“In case of emergency” section of this  
manual.  
TIRE PRESSURE  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS)  
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It  
monitors tire pressure of all tires except  
the spare. When the low tire pressure  
warning light is lit, one or more of your  
tires is significantly under-inflated. If  
equipped, the system also displays pres-  
sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on  
the display screen by sending a signal  
from a sensor that is installed in each  
wheel.  
LDI0384  
License plate light  
The TPMS will activate only when the  
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH  
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-  
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for  
example a flat tire while driving).  
WDI0403  
Rear combination light  
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-  
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and  
controls” section, “Tire pressure informa-  
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
tion”in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone The tire pressures should be checked  
and voice recognition systems” section, when the tires are cold. The tires are  
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System considered COLD after the vehicle has  
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sec- been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven  
tion, and “Flat tire”in the “In case of emer- less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate  
tire failure, or unfavorable han-  
dling characteristics and could  
also lead to a serious accident.  
Loading beyond the specified ca-  
pacity may also result in failure of  
other vehicle components.  
gency” section.  
speeds.  
● Before taking a long trip, or  
whenever you heavily load your  
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge  
to ensure that the tire pressures  
are at the specified level.  
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-  
der inflation, may adversely affect  
tire life and vehicle handling.  
Tire inflation pressure  
Check the tire pressures (including the  
spare) often and always prior to long dis-  
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-  
sure specifications are shown on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label  
or the Tire and Loading Information label  
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.  
The Tire and Loading Information label is  
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire  
pressures should be checked regularly  
because:  
WARNING  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
● Improperly inflated tires can fail  
suddenly and cause an accident.  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating  
(GVWR) is located on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-  
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-  
pacity is indicated on the Tire and  
Loading Information label (if so  
equipped). Do not load your ve-  
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-  
loading your vehicle may result in  
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-  
ing conditions due to premature  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.  
● Tires can lose air suddenly when  
driven over potholes or other objects  
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while  
parking.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
᭺
Spare tire size or compact spare tire  
size (if so equipped).  
LDI0485  
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to  
this pressure when the tires are cold.  
Tires are considered COLD after the  
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more  
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6  
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-  
mended cold tire inflation is set by the  
manufacturer to provide the best bal-  
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,  
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the  
vehicle’s GVWR.  
Tire and loading information label  
᭺
1
᭺
Seating capacity: The maximum num-  
ber of occupants that can be seated  
in the vehicle.  
2
᭺
Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-  
mation in the “Technical and con-  
sumer information” section.  
3
᭺
Original tire size: The size of the tires  
originally installed on the vehicle at  
the factory.  
5
᭺
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later  
in this section.  
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge  
stem and compare to the specifica-  
tion shown on the Tire and Loading  
Information label.  
Size  
Cold Tire Inflation  
Pressure  
Front Original Tire:  
P265/70R18  
P275/60R20  
240 kPa, 35 PSI  
240 kPa, 35 PSI  
240 kPa, 35 PSI  
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too  
much air is added, press the core of  
the valve stem briefly with the tip of  
the gauge stem to release pressure.  
Recheck the pressure and add or  
release air as needed.  
Rear Original Tire:  
P265/70R18  
P275/60R20  
Spare Tire:  
P265/70R18  
P275/60R20  
6. Install the valve stem cap.  
LDI0393  
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,  
including the spare.  
Checking tire pressure  
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the  
tire.  
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely  
onto the valve stem. Do not press too  
hard or force the valve stem side-  
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing  
sound of air escaping from the tire is  
heard while checking the pressure,  
reposition the gauge to eliminate this  
leakage.  
3. Remove the gauge.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WDI0394  
WDI0395  
Example  
Example  
1
᭺
TIRE LABELING  
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.  
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)  
5. Two-digit number (15): This number  
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.  
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the  
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-  
tifies and describes the fundamental  
characteristics of the tire and also pro-  
vides the tire identification number (TIN)  
for safety standard certification. The TIN  
can be used to identify the tire in case of a  
recall.  
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-  
signed for passenger vehicles (not all  
tires have this information).  
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This  
number is the tire’s load index. It is a  
measurement of how much weight  
each tire can support. You may not  
find this information on all tires be-  
cause it is not required by law.  
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not  
drive the vehicle faster than the tire  
speed rating.  
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-  
ber gives the width in millimeters of  
the tire from sidewall edge to side-  
wall edge.  
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,  
known as the aspect ratio, gives the  
tire’s ratio of height to width.  
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
᭺
Tire ply composition and material  
The number of layers or plies of rubber-  
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-  
ers also must indicate the materials in the  
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,  
and others.  
4
sure  
Maximum permissible inflation pres-  
᭺
This number is the greatest amount of air  
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do  
not exceed the maximum permissible in-  
flation pressure.  
WDI0396  
Example  
5
᭺
Maximum load rating  
2
᭺
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code  
(Optional).  
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a  
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX  
XXXX)  
This number indicates the maximum load  
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-  
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires  
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has  
the same load rating as the factory in-  
stalled tire.  
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-  
ture.  
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-  
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol  
can be placed above, below or to the  
left or right of the Tire Identification  
Number.  
6. Four numbers represent the week  
and year the tire was built. For ex-  
ample, the numbers 3103 means the  
31st week of 2003. If these numbers  
are missing, then look on the other  
sidewall of the tire.  
6
᭺
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”  
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-  
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).  
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s  
identification mark.  
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
᭺
The word “radial”  
TYPES OF TIRES  
All season tires  
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-  
els to provide good performance all year, includ-  
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season  
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S  
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow  
traction than All Season tires and may be more  
appropriate in some areas.  
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has  
radial structure.  
WARNING  
● When changing or replacing tires, be  
sure all four tires are of the same type  
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and  
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be  
able to help you with information about  
tire type, size, speed rating and  
availability.  
8
᭺
Manufacturer or brand name  
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.  
Other Tire-related Terminology  
Summer tires  
In addition to the many terms that are  
defined throughout this section, Intended  
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that  
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering  
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or  
model name molding that is higher or  
deeper than the same molding on the  
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-  
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical  
tire that has a particular side that must  
always face outward when mounted on a  
vehicle.  
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models  
to provide superior performance on dry roads.  
Summer tire performance is substantially re-  
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have  
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.  
● Replacement tires may have a lower  
speed rating than the factory equipped  
tires, and may not match the potential  
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed  
the maximum speed rating of the tire.  
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy  
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of  
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four  
wheels.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the low tire pres-  
sure warning system.  
● For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-  
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-  
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-  
tion Booklet.  
Snow tires  
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select  
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the  
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can  
adversely affect the safety and handling of your  
vehicle.  
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings  
than factory equipped tires and may not match  
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-  
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.  
vehicle and are installed according to the chain  
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE  
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on  
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.  
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-  
signed to meet the minimum clearances between  
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or  
body component required to accommodate the  
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or  
cables). The minimum clearances are determined  
using the factory equipped tire size. Other types  
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners  
when recommended by the tire chain manufac-  
turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the  
tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent  
the possibility of whipping action damage to the  
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-  
ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-  
tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your  
vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling  
and performance may be adversely affected.  
If you install snow tires, they must be the same  
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all  
four wheels.  
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires  
may be used. However, some U.S. states and  
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check  
local, state and provincial laws before installing  
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of  
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be  
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.  
WDI0258  
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES  
TIRE CHAINS  
Tire rotation  
CAUTION  
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires  
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).  
Tire chains/cables should not be installed  
on P275/60R20 size tires. Installation of  
the tire chains/cables on P275/60R20 size  
tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If  
you plan to use tire chains/cables, you  
should install P265/70R18 size tires on  
your vehicle.  
Tire chains must be installed only on the  
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.  
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-  
gency” section in this manual for tire re-  
placing procedures.  
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with  
chains in such conditions can cause damage to  
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to  
some overstress.  
As soon as possible, tighten the  
wheel nuts to the specified torque  
with a torque wrench.  
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to  
location. Check the local laws before installing  
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure  
they are the proper size for the tires on your  
Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear  
paved roads.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wheel nut tightening torque:  
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)  
● The original tires have built-in  
tread wear indicators. When the  
wear indicators are visible, the  
tire(s) should be replaced.  
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-  
ened to specifications at all times. It  
is recommended that wheel nuts be  
tightened to specification at each  
tire rotation interval.  
● Tires degrade with age and use.  
Have tires, including the spare,  
over 6 years old checked by a  
qualified technician because  
some tire damage may not be ob-  
vious. Replace the tires as neces-  
sary to prevent tire failure and  
possible personal injury.  
WARNING  
● After rotating the tires, check and  
adjust the tire pressure.  
WDI0259  
● Improper service of the spare tire  
may result in serious personal in-  
jury. If it is necessary to repair the  
spare tire, contact a NISSAN  
dealer.  
● Retighten the wheel nuts when  
the vehicle has been driven for  
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in  
cases of a flat tire, etc.).  
1. Wear indicator  
2. Location mark  
Tire wear and damage  
● Do not include the spare tire in  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
WARNING  
the tire rotation.  
● Tires should be periodically in-  
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-  
ing or objects caught in the tread.  
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging  
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)  
should be replaced.  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing wheels and tires  
● If the wheels are changed for any rea-  
son, always replace with wheels which  
have the same off-set dimension.  
Wheels of a different off-set could  
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-  
hicle handling characteristics, affect  
the VDC system and/or interference  
with the brake discs/drums. Such inter-  
ference can lead to decreased braking  
efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe  
wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the  
“Technical and consumer information”  
section of this manual for wheel off-set  
dimensions.  
● Do not install a damaged or deformed  
wheel or tire even if it has been re-  
paired. Such wheels or tires could have  
structural damage and could fail with-  
out warning.  
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread  
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity  
as originally equipped. Recommended types and  
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the  
“Technical and consumer information” section of  
this manual.  
● The use of retread tires is not  
recommended.  
● For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-  
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-  
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-  
tion Booklet.  
WARNING  
● The use of tires other than those recom-  
mended or the mixed use of tires of  
different brands, construction (bias,  
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns  
can adversely affect the ride, braking,  
handling, VDC system, ground clear-  
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain  
clearance, speedometer calibration,  
headlight aim and bumper height.  
Some of these effects may lead to acci-  
dents and could result in serious per-  
sonal injury.  
Four-wheel drive models  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, tire pressure will not be  
indicated, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
CAUTION  
Always use tires of the same type, size,  
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or  
radial), and tread pattern on all four  
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a  
circumference difference between tires  
on the front and rear axles which will  
cause excessive tire wear and may dam-  
age the transmission, transfer case and  
differential gears.  
● If your vehicle was originally equipped  
with 4 tires that were the same size and  
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,  
install the new tires on the rear axle.  
Placing new tires on the front axle may  
cause loss of vehicle control in some  
driving conditions and cause an acci-  
dent and personal injury.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended  
that all four tires be replaced with tires of the  
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.  
The tire pressure and wheel alignment should  
also be checked and corrected as necessary.  
Contact a NISSAN dealer.  
●
●
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing  
the wheels.  
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or  
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of  
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.  
●
NISSAN recommends waxing the road  
wheels to protect against road salt in areas  
where it is used during winter.  
Wheel balance  
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling  
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get  
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-  
anced as required.  
Wheel balance service should be per-  
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.  
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle  
could lead to mechanical damage.  
●
For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety  
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-  
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-  
formation Booklet.  
Care of wheels  
●
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle  
to maintain their appearance.  
●
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the  
wheel is changed or the underside of the  
vehicle is washed.  
8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Technical and consumer information  
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Fuel recommendation  
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15  
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17  
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17  
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20  
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21  
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28  
Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29  
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29  
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31  
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . .9-31  
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32  
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-33  
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33  
(without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel  
recommendation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil  
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
When traveling or registering your vehicle in  
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Vehicle identification number  
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED  
FUEL/LUBRICANTS  
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure  
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.  
Capacity (Approximate)  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  
US measure  
28 gal  
Imp measure  
23-1/4 gal  
Liter  
105.8  
Fuel  
See “ Fuel recommendations” later in this section.*1  
Engine oil *8  
Drain and Refill  
With oil filter change  
6-7/8 qt  
6-1/2 qt  
5-3/4 qt  
5-1/2 qt  
6.5  
6.2  
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2  
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *2  
Without oil filter change  
Cooling system  
With reservoir  
3-3/4 gal  
3-1/8 gal  
14.4  
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent  
50% Demineralized or distilled water  
Automatic transmission fluid  
Power steering fluid (PSF)  
Brake fluid  
Multi-purpose grease  
Air conditioning system refrigerant  
Air conditioning system oil  
Transfer fluid  
Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.  
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *3  
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4  
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3  
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)  
HFC-134a (R-134a) *6  
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6  
Genuine NISSAN Matic D Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) recommended *7  
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hyponoid Super GL-5 80W- 90 or API GL-5  
Viscosity SAE 80W-90 *9  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3-1/8 qt  
3-3/8 pt  
2-5/8 qt  
2-7/8 pt  
3.0  
1.6  
Front differential gear oil  
Rear differential gear oil  
Windshield washer fluid (shared between  
front and rear wipers)  
3-3/4 pt  
1-1/4 gal  
3-1/8 pt  
1 gal  
1.75  
4.5  
API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-90 gear oil or equivalent *10  
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or  
equivalent  
*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”  
*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”  
*3: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF  
will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.  
*4: DEXTRON™ VI type ATF or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid may also be used.  
*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.  
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”  
*7: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer case durability, and may damage the transfer case, which is  
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.  
*8: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”  
*9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).  
*10: See your NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.  
9-2 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gasoline specifications  
●
●
The fuel should be unleaded and have  
an octane rating no lower than that  
recommended for unleaded gasoline.  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION (without  
Flexible Fuel Vehicle option)  
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets  
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-  
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-  
bile manufacturers developed this specification  
to improve emission control system and vehicle  
performance. Ask your service station manager if  
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.  
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane  
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-  
ber (Research octane number 91).  
If an oxygenate-blend other than  
methanol blend is used, it should con-  
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.  
(MTBE may, however, be added up to  
15%.)  
CAUTION  
● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door  
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system  
or other damage can occur if E-85 is  
used in vehicles that are not designed  
to run on E-85.  
Reformulated gasoline  
●
If a methanol blend is used, it should  
contain no more than 5% methanol  
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It  
should also contain a suitable amount  
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-  
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-  
lated with appropriate cosolvents and  
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol  
blends may cause fuel system damage  
and/or vehicle performance problems.  
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-  
able to ensure that all methanol blends  
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-  
hicles.  
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-  
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially  
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN  
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-  
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when  
available.  
● Using a fuel other than that specified  
could adversely affect the emission  
control system, and may also affect the  
warranty coverage.  
Gasoline containing oxygenates  
● Under no circumstances should  
a
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-  
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol  
with or without advertising their presence.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of  
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-  
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-  
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station  
manager.  
leaded gasoline be used, because this  
will damage the three-way catalyst.  
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage  
the fuel system components and is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-  
ited warranty.  
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-  
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after  
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately  
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a  
low blend of MTBE.  
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take  
the following precautions as the usage of such  
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems  
and/or fuel system damage.  
Technical and consumer information 9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-  
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can  
cause paint damage.  
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even  
when using gasoline of the stated octane  
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock  
while holding a steady speed on level  
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the  
condition. Failure to correct the condition  
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN  
is not responsible.  
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%  
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded  
gasoline.  
E–85 fuel  
● U.S. government regulations require  
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-  
fied by a small, square, orange and  
black label with the common abbrevia-  
tion or the appropriate percentage for  
that region.  
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel  
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can  
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do  
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government  
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing  
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange  
and black label with the common abbreviation or  
the appropriate percentage for that region.  
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark  
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may  
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine  
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-  
countered, have your vehicle checked at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUEL  
RECOMMENDATION (if so equipped)  
Your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel Etha-  
nol, “Regular” unleaded regular gasoline or any  
percentage of the two fuels combined.  
Aftermarket fuel additives  
However, now and then you may notice  
light spark knock for a short time while  
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a  
cause for concern, because you get the  
greatest fuel benefit when there is light  
spark knock for a short time under heavy  
engine load.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any  
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-  
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit  
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.  
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish  
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or  
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel  
system and engine.  
U.S. government regulations require Fuel  
Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a small,  
square, orange and black label with the  
common abbreviation or the appropriate  
percentage for that region.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Octane rating tips  
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle  
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel  
can damage fuel system components  
and is not covered by the NISSAN new  
vehicle limited warranty.  
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol  
may cause powertrain damage or a loss of  
vehicle performance.  
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane  
rating lower than recommended can cause  
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark  
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-  
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you  
9-4 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General information  
Fuel requirements  
Fuel consumption  
This information is for Flexible Fuel vehicles (FFV)  
only. FFV vehicles can be identified by the fuel  
filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or  
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only cov-  
ers those subjects that are unique to Flexible Fuel  
vehicles.  
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gal-  
lon than gasoline, you will experience an increase  
in fuel consumption. You can expect your fuel  
mileage to decrease by about 30% compared to  
gasoline operation.  
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded regular  
gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI  
(Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane num-  
ber 91), or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two.  
For the best starting and vehicle driveability re-  
sults, do not continually switch between E-85  
and unleaded regular gasoline. If you must switch  
fuels, NISSAN recommends the following:  
Replacement parts  
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle  
(FFV) are designed to be compatible with etha-  
nol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced  
with correct ethanol compatible parts.  
CAUTION  
Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door la-  
bel can operate on E-85. Fuel system or  
other damage can occur if E-85 is used in  
vehicles that are not designed to run on  
E-85.  
●
do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates  
less than 1/4 full  
●
●
add more than 5 gallons of fuel  
operate the vehicle immediately after refuel-  
ing for a period of at least 5 minutes  
CAUTION  
Replacing fuel system components with  
non-ethanol compatible components can  
damage your vehicle and may also affect  
the warranty coverage.  
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)  
NOTE:  
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel etha-  
nol and 15% unleaded gasoline.  
When the ambient temperature is above  
90°F (32°C), you may experience hard start-  
ing and rough idle following start up even if  
the above recommendations are followed.  
Maintenance  
WARNING  
If you operate your vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow  
the correct maintenance log shown in the  
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.  
● Ethanol vapors are extremely flam-  
mable and could cause serious per-  
sonal injury.  
Starting  
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuit-  
able for use when ambient temperatures fall be-  
low 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to  
32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in  
the time it takes for you engine to start, and a  
deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesita-  
tions) until the engine is fully warmed up.  
CAUTION  
● Never have any smoking materials lit in  
or near the vehicle when removing the  
fuel filler cap or filling the tank.  
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than  
85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty  
in cold starting and may affect drivability.  
● Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and  
never use it near an open flame.  
Technical and consumer information 9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil viscosity  
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes  
with temperature. Because of this, it is important  
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the  
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-  
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil  
viscosity other than that recommended could  
cause serious engine damage.  
Selecting the correct oil filter  
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a  
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-  
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its  
equivalent for the reason described in “Change  
intervals.”  
WTI0183  
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-  
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-  
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which  
do not have the specified quality label should not  
be used as they could cause engine damage.  
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER  
RECOMMENDATIONS  
Change intervals  
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your  
engine are based on the use of the specified  
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters  
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding  
recommended oil and filter change intervals could  
reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused  
by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil  
and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by  
the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.  
Selecting the correct oil  
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality  
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives  
engine life and performance. See “Capacities  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil  
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this  
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an  
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel  
economy.  
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-  
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-  
tenance intervals are followed.  
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been  
previously used should not be used.  
Select only engine oils that meet the American  
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-  
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval  
9-6 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine  
oil when it was built. You do not have to change  
the oil before the first recommended change  
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend  
upon how you use your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will  
cause severe damage to the air condition-  
ing system and will require the replace-  
ment of all air conditioner system  
components.  
Operation under the following conditions may  
require more frequent oil and filter changes:  
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your  
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone  
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the  
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-  
tions require the recovery and recycling of any  
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-  
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained  
technicians and equipment needed to recover  
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-  
ant.  
●
repeated short distance driving at cold out-  
side temperatures  
●
●
●
●
driving in dusty conditions  
extensive idling  
towing a trailer  
stop and go commuting  
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance  
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.  
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air  
conditioner system.  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
REFRIGERANT AND OIL  
RECOMMENDATIONS  
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN  
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-  
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN  
A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-  
lents.  
Technical and consumer information 9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIFICATIONS  
ENGINE  
Model  
VK56DE  
Type  
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC  
8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°  
in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)  
cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552)  
1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2  
Cylinder arrangement  
Bore x Stroke  
Displacement  
Firing order  
Idle speed  
A/T (in “N” position)  
No adjustment is necessary.  
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle  
speed)  
CO % at idle  
Standard Model  
DILFR5A-11  
FFV Model  
Spark plug  
DILFR5A-11D  
Spark plug gap (Nominal)  
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)  
Timing chain  
Camshaft operation  
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.  
9-8 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHEELS AND TIRES  
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS  
Wheels  
Overall length  
Overall width  
Overall height  
2wd with roof rack  
4wd with roof rack  
Front Track  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
207.7 (5,275)  
79.5 (2,020)  
18 x 8.0JJ  
20 x 8.0JJ  
Tires  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
77.5 (1,967)  
78.3 (1,988)  
P265/70R18  
P275/60R20  
Full size  
Spare tire  
18 inch tire  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
67.9 (1,725)  
68.1 (1,729)  
20 inch tire  
Rear Track  
18 inch tire  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
67.9 (1,725)  
68.1 (1,729)  
123.2 (3,130)  
20 inch tire  
Wheelbase  
Gross vehicle weight rating  
lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.  
V.S.S. certification label”  
Gross axle weight rating  
on the center pillar be-  
tween the driver’s side  
Front  
Rear  
lb (kg)  
lb (kg)  
front and side doors.  
Technical and consumer information 9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING  
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER  
COUNTRY  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION  
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-  
hicle in another country, you should first find  
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-  
cle’s engine.  
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low  
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles  
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-  
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where  
appropriate fuel is not available.  
When transferring the registration of your  
vehicle to another country, state, province  
or district, it may be necessary to modify the  
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.  
LTI0085  
LTI0086  
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-  
sion control and safety standards vary according  
to the country, state, province or district; there-  
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
(VIN) PLATE  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
(chassis number)  
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is  
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-  
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle  
registration.  
The vehicle identification number is located as  
shown.  
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-  
other country, state, province or district  
and registered, its modifications, transpor-  
tation, and registration are the responsibil-  
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible  
for any inconvenience that may result.  
9-10 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WTI0095  
WTI0099  
WTI0189  
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
CERTIFICATION LABEL  
EMISSION CONTROL  
INFORMATION LABEL  
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.  
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-  
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-  
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle  
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review  
it carefully.  
The emission control information label is at-  
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.  
Technical and consumer information 9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE  
WTI0100  
WTI0220  
LTI0093  
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION  
LABEL  
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION  
LABEL  
Use the following steps to mount the front license  
plate:  
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. The label is located as  
shown.  
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to  
the underside of the hood as shown.  
1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the  
location mark (small dimple) using a 0.20 in  
(5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.  
Install the license plate holder using the two  
screws provided with the holder.  
2. Mount the license plate using two M6-  
14mm bolts.  
License plate bolt tightening torque:  
3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)  
9-12 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION  
WARNING  
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb  
weight plus the combined weight of  
passengers and cargo.  
hicle. This is the maximum combined  
weight of occupants and cargo that  
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the  
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the  
trailer tongue weight must be in-  
cluded as part of the cargo load. This  
information is located on the Tire and  
Loading Information label (if so  
equipped).  
● It is extremely dangerous to ride  
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In  
a collision, people riding in these  
areas are more likely to be seri-  
ously injured or killed.  
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-  
ing)  
-
maximum total combined  
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-  
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer  
tongue load and any other optional  
equipment. This information is lo-  
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
certification label.  
● Do not allow people to ride in any  
area of your vehicle that is not  
equipped with seats and seat  
belts.  
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight  
of cargo, the subtracted weight of  
occupants from the load limit.  
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle  
is in a seat and using a seat belt  
properly.  
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -  
maximum weight (load) limit specified  
for the front or rear axle. This informa-  
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY  
TERMS  
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-  
hicle shown as “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. Do not exceed  
the number of occupants shown as  
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-  
ing Information label.  
tion  
is  
located  
on  
the  
It is important to familiarize yourself with  
the following terms before loading your  
vehicle:  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label.  
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight  
rating) - The maximum total weight  
rating of the vehicle, passengers,  
cargo, and trailer.  
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your  
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:  
standard and optional equipment, flu-  
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire  
assembly. This weight does not in-  
clude passengers and cargo.  
To get “the combined weight of occu-  
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all  
occupants, then add the total luggage  
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-  
ing illustration.  
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,  
Total load capacity - maximum total  
weight limit specified of the load  
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-  
Technical and consumer information 9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo  
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX  
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of  
the driver and passengers that will be  
riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers from XXX kg  
or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-  
able amount of cargo and luggage  
load capacity. For example, if the  
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and  
there will be five 150 lb. passengers  
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-  
able cargo and luggage load capac-  
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)  
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =  
300 kg.)  
LTI0152  
Example  
9-14 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Determine the combined weight of  
luggage and cargo being loaded on  
the vehicle. That weight may not  
safely exceed the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity calculated in  
Step 4.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,  
load from your trailer will be trans-  
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this  
manual to determine how this re-  
duces the available cargo and lug-  
gage load capacity of your vehicle.  
LTI0089  
LTI0090  
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm  
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.  
See “Measurement of Weights” later in  
this section.  
Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooks  
Cargo area floor tie-down hooks  
SECURING THE LOAD  
WARNING  
There are tie down hooks located in the cargo  
area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used  
to secure cargo with ropes or other types of  
straps.  
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or  
straps to help prevent it from sliding or  
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than  
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-  
lision, unsecured cargo could cause  
personal injury.  
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-  
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label.  
Do not apply a total load of more than 55  
A
lbs. (245 N) to a single  
lbs. (196 N) to a single  
when securing cargo.  
plastic hook or 44  
᭺
B
plastic hook  
᭺
● The child restraint top tether strap may  
be damaged by contact with items in  
the cargo area. Secure any items in the  
cargo area. Your child could be seri-  
ously injured or killed in a collision if  
the top tether strap is damaged.  
Do not apply a total load of more than 110  
lbs. (490 N) to a single metal floor tie-down  
hook when securing cargo.  
Technical and consumer information 9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS  
● Do not load your vehicle any heavier  
than the GVWR or the maximum front  
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your  
vehicle can break, tire damage could  
occur, or it can change the way your  
vehicle handles. This could result in  
loss of control and cause personal  
injury.  
● Do not load your vehicle any  
heavier than the GVWR or the  
maximum front and rear GAWRs.  
If you do, parts of your vehicle  
can break, tire damage could oc-  
cur, or it can change the way your  
vehicle handles. This could result  
in loss of control and cause per-  
sonal injury.  
Secure loose items to prevent weight  
shifts that could affect the balance of your  
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive  
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear  
wheels separately to determine axle  
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-  
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-  
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads  
should not exceed the gross vehicle  
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are  
given on the vehicle certification label. If  
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-  
move items to bring all weights below the  
ratings.  
LOADING TIPS  
● Overloading not only can shorten  
the life of your vehicle and the  
tire, but can also cause unsafe  
vehicle handling and longer brak-  
ing distances. This may cause a  
premature tire failure which  
could result in a serious accident  
and personal injury. Failures  
caused by overloading are not  
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR  
or GAWR as specified on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label.  
● Do not load the front and rear axle to  
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the  
GVWR.  
covered  
warranty.  
by  
the  
vehicle’s  
WARNING  
● Properly secure all cargo with  
ropes or straps to help prevent it  
from sliding or shifting. Do not  
place cargo higher than the seat-  
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-  
sion, unsecured cargo could  
cause personal injury.  
9-16 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOWING A TRAILER  
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS  
Maximum trailer loads  
WARNING  
Overloading or improper loading of a  
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect  
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-  
mance and may lead to accidents.  
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the  
value  
specified  
in  
the  
“Towing  
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-  
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight  
plus its cargo weight.  
CAUTION  
●
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.  
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake  
system MUST be used.  
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load  
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your  
engine, axle or other parts could be  
damaged.  
The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating  
(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified  
in the following “Towing Load/Specification”  
chart.  
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you  
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph  
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full  
throttle. This helps the engine and other  
parts of your vehicle wear in at the  
heavier loads.  
LTI0162  
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the  
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)  
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater  
than these or using improper towing equipment  
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking  
and performance.  
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-  
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember  
that towing a trailer places additional loads on  
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-  
ing and other systems.  
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not  
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also  
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-  
priate for level highway driving may have to be  
reduced for low traction situations (for example,  
on slippery boat ramps).  
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available  
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This  
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-  
pability and the special equipment required for  
proper towing.  
Technical and consumer information 9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.  
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside  
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine  
performance and cause overheating. The engine  
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance  
of engine damage, could activate and automati-  
cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may  
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully  
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather  
and road conditions.  
WARNING  
Overheating can result in reduced engine  
power and vehicle speed. The reduced  
speed may be lower than other traffic,  
which could increase the chance of a col-  
lision. Be especially careful when driving.  
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-  
ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a  
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and  
return to normal operation. See “If your  
vehicle overheats”in the “In case of emer-  
gency” section of this manual.  
WTI0160  
ATI1025  
Tongue load  
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight  
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight  
When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-  
uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - (GAW)  
15 percent of the total trailer load or use the  
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed  
trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu-  
facturer. The tongue load must be within the  
maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-  
ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the  
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo  
to allow for proper tongue load.  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)  
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of  
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,  
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional  
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must  
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating  
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
certification label.  
CAUTION  
Vehicle damage resulting from improper  
towing procedures is not covered by  
NISSAN warranties.  
9-18 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a  
base vehicle with driver and any options required  
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,  
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the  
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and  
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity  
and trailer tongue load.  
To determine the available towing capacity, use  
the following procedure.  
●
●
●
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -  
7,250 lb. (3289 kg).  
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the  
ЉTowing Load/SpecificationЉ chart found  
later in this section.  
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)  
from “Towing Load/SpecificationЉ chart -  
15,100 lb. (6849 kg).  
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the  
GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-  
able maximum towing capacity.  
Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-  
ing Load/SpecificationЉ chart - 9,100 lb.  
(4128 kg).  
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to  
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front  
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight  
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.  
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh  
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and  
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is  
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not  
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown  
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated  
available maximum towing capacity.  
7,250 lb. (3289 kg)  
GVWR  
GVW  
– 6,350 lb. (2880 kg)  
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured  
using platform type scales commonly found at  
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building  
supply centers or salvage yards.  
= 900 lb. (409 kg)  
Available for tongue  
weight  
To determine the available payload capacity for  
tongue/king pin load, use the following proce-  
dure.  
15,100 lb. (6849 kg)  
– 6,350 lb. (2880 kg)  
GCWR  
GVW  
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to  
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear  
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front  
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight  
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.  
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to  
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-  
ings.  
= 9,123 lb. (4138 kg) Capacity available for  
towing  
1. Locate  
the  
GVWR  
on  
the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.  
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of  
the passengers and cargo that are normally  
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.  
900 lb. (409 kg) Available tongue weight  
/ 8,750 lb. (3969 kg)  
=
Available capacity  
Example:  
10 % tongue weight  
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the  
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-  
able maximum tongue/king pin load.  
●
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed  
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and  
hitch - 6,350 lb. (2880 kg).  
Technical and consumer information 9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The available towing capacity may be less than  
the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-  
ger and cargo load in the vehicle.  
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION  
US  
US  
CAN  
4WD  
2WD  
4WD  
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-  
tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the  
trailer tongue load specification recommended  
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load  
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-  
tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the  
maximum tongue weight specification shown in  
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the  
calculated available tongue weight is greater  
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less  
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to  
match the available tongue weight.  
6,500 lb.  
6,500 lb.  
(2,948 kg)  
6,500 lb.  
(2,948 kg)  
w/o tow package  
with tow package  
w/o tow package  
with tow package  
w/o tow package  
with tow package  
(2,948 kg)  
Maximum Towing Ca-  
pacity*1 *2  
9,100 lb.  
(4,128 kg)  
9,000 lb.  
(4,082 kg)  
9,000 lb.  
(4,082 kg)  
650 lb.  
650 lb.  
650 lb.  
(295 kg)  
(295 kg)  
(413 kg)  
(295 kg)  
(408 kg)  
Maximum Tongue  
Load  
910 lb.  
900 lb.  
900 lb.  
(408 kg)  
12,800 lb.  
(5,806 kg)  
13,000 lb.  
(5,897 kg)  
13,000 lb.  
(5,897 kg)  
Maximum Gross  
Combined Weight  
Rating  
15,100 lb.  
(6,849 kg)  
15,100 lb.  
(6,849 kg)  
15,100 lb.  
(6,849 kg)  
Always verify that available capacities are within  
the required ratings.  
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve  
the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi-  
cle’s maximum towing capacity.  
*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.  
9-20 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be  
long enough to be properly secured to the  
ball mount. There should be at least 2  
threads showing beyond the lock washer  
and nut.  
TOWING SAFETY  
Trailer hitch  
WARNING  
Trailer hitch components have specific  
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-  
pable of towing a trailer heavier than the  
weight rating of the hitch components.  
Never exceed the weight rating of the  
hitch components. Doing so can cause  
serious personal injury or property  
damage.  
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional  
trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-  
cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This  
hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of  
this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is  
used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball  
that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine  
NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available  
from your NISSAN dealer.  
Ball mount  
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and  
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.  
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the  
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should  
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the  
ground.  
Hitch ball  
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight  
rating for your trailer:  
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional  
trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of  
your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame  
mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your  
vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer  
hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make  
sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the  
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property  
damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,  
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.  
Weight carrying hitches  
●
The required hitch ball size is stamped on  
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also  
have the size printed on the top of the ball.  
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is  
one that is designed to carry the whole amount of  
tongue weight and gross weight directly on the  
ball mount and on the receiver.  
●
●
Choose the proper class hitch ball based on  
the trailer weight.  
Weight distribution hitch  
The diameter of the threaded shank of the  
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount  
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should  
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole  
in the ball mount.  
This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or  
“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball  
mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue  
weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-  
hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given  
trailer, and need some of the tongue weight  
transferred through the frame and pushing down  
on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow  
vehicle.  
Technical and consumer information 9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is  
recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a  
maximum weight over 5,000 lbs. Check with the  
trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to  
determine if they recommend the use of a weight-  
distributing hitch system.  
height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of  
the reference height measured in step 2. The  
rear bumper should be no higher than the  
reference height measured in step 2.  
Class I hitch  
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball  
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers  
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).  
WARNING  
Class II hitch  
Properly adjust the weight distributing  
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no  
higher than the measured reference  
height when the trailer is attached. If the  
rear bumper is higher than the measured  
reference height when loaded, the vehicle  
may handle unpredictably which could  
cause a loss of vehicle control and cause  
serious personal injury or property  
damage.  
NOTE:  
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball  
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers  
of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).  
A weight-distributing hitch system may af-  
fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If  
you are considering use of  
a
weight-  
surge  
Class III hitch  
distributing hitch system with  
a
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball  
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers  
of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).  
brake-equipped trailer, check with the  
surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer  
to determine if and how this can be done.  
Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-  
turer for installing and using the weight-  
distributing hitch system.  
Class IV hitch  
Sway control device  
Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball  
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers  
of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,545 kg). A  
weight distributing hitch should be used to tow  
trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).  
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting  
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-  
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help  
control these affects. If you choose to use one,  
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make  
sure the sway control device will work with the  
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-  
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the  
manufacturer for installing and using the sway  
control device.  
General set-up instructions are as follows:  
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.  
With the ignition on and the doors closed,  
allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes  
so that it can level.  
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV  
trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb  
(4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve-  
hicle is only capable of towing the maximum  
trailer weights shown in the “Towing  
Load/Specification” chart earlier in this section.  
2. Measure the height of a reference point on  
the front and rear bumpers at the center of  
the vehicle.  
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust  
the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper  
9-22 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire pressures  
Trailer lights  
CAUTION  
● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-  
hicle tires to the recommended cold  
tire pressure indicated on the tire  
placard.  
● Special hitches which include frame re-  
inforcements are required for towing  
above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-  
ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and  
hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport  
CAUTION  
When splicing into the vehicle electrical  
system, a commercially available power-  
type module/converter must be used to  
provide power for all trailer lighting. This  
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct  
power source for all trailer lights while  
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and  
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The  
module/converter must draw no more  
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail  
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter  
that exceeds these power requirements  
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-  
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-  
tain the proper equipment and to have it  
installed.  
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating  
and proper inflation pressure should  
be in accordance with the trailer and  
tire manufacturer’s specifications.  
utility vehicles are available at  
NISSAN dealer.  
a
● The hitch should not be attached to or  
affect the operation of the impact-  
absorbing bumper.  
Safety chains  
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.  
Always use suitable safety chains between your  
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should  
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,  
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety  
chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch  
ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave  
enough slack in the chains to permit turning  
corners.  
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-  
tem, brake system, etc. to install a  
trailer hitch.  
● To reduce the possibility of additional  
damage if your vehicle is struck from  
the rear, where practical, remove the  
receiver when not in use.  
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or  
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up  
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-  
table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the  
optional trailer tow package are equipped with a  
7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is  
equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter  
will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the  
vehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN deal-  
ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail-  
ers.  
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch  
mounting bolts are securely mounted.  
● When towing with the hitch ball  
mounted to the rear bumper, do not  
make sharp turns. The trailer may con-  
tact the bumper and cause damage to  
the bumper or trailer.  
Technical and consumer information 9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trailer brakes  
WARNING  
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.  
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake  
system MUST be used. However, most states  
require a separate braking system on trailers with  
a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make  
sure the trailer meets the local regulations and  
the regulations where you plan to tow.  
Never connect a trailer brake system di-  
rectly to the vehicle brake system.  
Several types of braking systems are available.  
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is  
mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line  
running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are  
activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch  
ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic  
surge brakes are common on rental trailers and  
some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is  
no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-  
eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.  
LTI0117  
example  
Electric trailer brake controller  
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re-  
quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer  
brake controller.  
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-  
tems are activated by an electronic signal sent  
from a trailer brake controller (special brake-  
sensing module). If electric trailer brakes are  
used, see ЉElectric trailer brake controllerЉ in this  
section.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and  
jumper harness that is specifically designed to be  
used when installing an aftermarket brake con-  
troller.  
To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper  
harness, perform the following procedure:  
Have a professional supplier of towing equip-  
ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly  
installed and demonstrate proper brake function  
testing.  
1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the  
rearmost position.  
9-24 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wire color designation for electric trailer brake  
controller jumper harness.  
WIRE COLOR  
RED/GREEN  
NOTE  
Vehicle stop lamp switch  
to trailer brake controller.  
BLACK  
Brake controller ground  
(-).  
BROWN/WHITE  
RED/BLUE  
RED  
Trailer brake controller  
switched output.  
Trailer brake controller  
illumination.  
Fused trailer brake con-  
troller battery feed (B+).  
LTI0122  
LTI0115  
2. Apply the parking brake to access the  
jumper harness connector.  
3. Locate the jumper harness connector under  
the lower portion of the instrument panel.  
The connector is taped to the wiring harness  
1
as indicated.  
᭺
●
The connector is marked with a white tag  
with “electric brake connector”.  
Technical and consumer information 9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent  
load shift while driving.  
●
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent  
load shift while driving.  
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in  
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity  
low.  
Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or  
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-  
ently becoming unlatched.  
●
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the  
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in  
the back half. Also make sure the load is  
balanced side to side.  
●
●
●
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.  
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.  
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate  
speed.  
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-  
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and  
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a  
trailer to the vehicle.  
●
When backing up, hold the bottom of the  
steering wheel with one hand. Move your  
hand in the direction in which you want the  
trailer to go. Make small corrections and  
back up slowly. If possible, have someone  
guide you when you are backing up.  
LTI0116  
4. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper  
Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to  
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,  
install any mirrors required for towing before  
driving the vehicle.  
2
harness to the connector  
.
᭺
5. Release the parking brake.  
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and  
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not  
recommended; however, if you must do so:  
6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake  
controller according to the manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
Determine the overall height of the vehicle  
and trailer so the required clearance is  
known.  
Pre-towing tips  
CAUTION  
Trailer towing tips  
●
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level  
position when a loaded and/or unloaded  
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it  
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down  
condition; check for improper tongue load,  
overload, worn suspension or other possible  
causes of either condition.  
If you move the shift selector to the P  
(Park) position before blocking the  
wheels and applying the parking brake,  
transmission damage could occur.  
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the  
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,  
stopping and backing up in an area which is free  
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-  
mance will be somewhat different than under  
normal driving conditions.  
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
9-26 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill  
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.  
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are  
clear from the blocks.  
●
●
Have your vehicle serviced more often than  
at intervals specified in the recommended  
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-  
vice and Maintenance Guide”.  
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly  
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-  
sorb the vehicle load.  
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.  
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will  
be closer to the inside of the turn than your  
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,  
make a larger than normal turning radius  
during the turn.  
●
While going downhill, the weight of the  
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-  
crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-  
tain adequate control, reduce your speed  
and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or  
repeated use of the brakes when descend-  
ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness  
and could cause overheating. Shifting to a  
lower gear instead provides “engine brak-  
ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-  
quently.  
4. Apply the parking brake.  
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).  
6. Make sure the  
indicator light (if so  
●
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely  
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-  
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by  
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible  
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-  
hicle handling.  
equipped) indicates the transfer case is in  
4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If  
the  
indicator light is flashing, or the  
ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission  
is in P (Park) (AT) and turn the 4WD switch  
to 2WD or 4H. See “Automatic transmission  
park warning light” in the “Instruments and  
controls” section and “Using four wheel  
drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving”  
section.  
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:  
●
If the engine coolant temperature rises to a  
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle  
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”  
section of this owner’s manual.  
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to  
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as  
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.  
This combination will help stabilize the ve-  
hicle  
7. Turn off the engine.  
●
●
●
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal  
circumstances.  
To drive away:  
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or  
applying the brakes.  
1. Start the vehicle.  
Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first  
500 miles (805 km).  
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
3. Shift the transmission into gear.  
4. Release the parking brake.  
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the  
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a  
safe area.  
For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do  
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).  
Technical and consumer information 9-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-  
anced as described earlier in this section.  
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-  
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50  
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.  
●
●
Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shifts  
when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a  
grade.  
●
Be careful when passing other vehicles.  
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-  
siderably more distance than normal pass-  
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must  
also pass the other vehicle before you can  
safely change lanes.  
When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-  
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or  
rear bumper.  
Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automati-  
cally downshifts when driving down a grade  
with a trailer or heavy load to help control  
vehicle speed.  
Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights  
before backing the trailer into the water or  
the trailer lights may burn out.  
Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no  
trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause  
any damage. However, fuel economy may be  
reduced and the transmission/engine driving  
characteristics may feel unusual.  
●
Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-  
mission to a lower gear for engine braking  
when driving down steep or long hills. This  
will help slow the vehicle without applying  
the brakes.  
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil  
should be replaced and transmission  
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-  
quently. For additional information, see the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section  
earlier in this manual.  
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil  
should be replaced and transmission  
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-  
quently. For additional information, see the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section  
earlier in this manual.  
●
●
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long  
or too frequently. This could cause the  
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced  
braking efficiency.  
Tow mode  
Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a  
heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the  
TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The  
indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi-  
nates when tow mode is selected. Press the  
TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off.  
Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the  
ignition switch is turned OFF.  
Increase your following distance to allow for  
greater stopping distances while towing a  
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.  
FLAT TOWING  
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the  
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This  
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle  
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor  
home.  
●
●
NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-  
trol not be used while towing a trailer.  
Some states or provinces have specific  
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that  
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed  
limits.  
Tow mode includes the following features:  
9-28 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNOW PLOW  
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality  
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to  
federal safety requirements in addition to these  
grades.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
● Failure to follow these guidelines can  
result in severe transmission damage.  
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.  
Installing a snowplow may affect vehicle  
handling. This may cause the driver to lose  
control of the vehicle and could result in  
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.  
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-  
ways tow forward, never backward.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on  
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For example:  
● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-  
sion vehicle with all four wheels on the  
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL  
DAMAGE internal transmission parts  
due to lack of transmission lubrication.  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating  
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-  
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded  
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times  
as well on the government course as a tire graded  
100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,  
and may depart significantly from the norm due to  
variations in driving habits, service practices and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
● For emergency towing procedures refer  
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”  
in the “In case of emergency”section of  
this manual.  
Automatic Transmission  
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic  
transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST  
be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive  
wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s  
recommendations when using their product.  
Traction AA, A, B and C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are  
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the  
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-  
sured under controlled conditions on specified  
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-  
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
Technical and consumer information 9-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
WARRANTY  
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following  
emission warranties:  
WARNING  
WARNING  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is  
based on straight-ahead braking traction  
tests, and does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction  
characteristics.  
The temperature grade for this tire is es-  
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated  
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,  
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-  
ther separately or in combination, can  
cause heat build-up and possible tire  
failure.  
For USA  
1. Emission Defects Warranty  
2. Emissions Performance Warranty  
Details of this warranty may be found with other  
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information  
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.  
If you did not receive a Warranty Information  
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-  
ment by writing to:  
Temperature A, B and C  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,  
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the  
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the  
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-  
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.  
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-  
mance which all passenger car tires must meet  
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.  
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than  
the minimum required by law.  
●
Nissan North America, Inc.  
Consumer Affairs Department  
P.O. Box 685003  
Franklin, TN 37068-5003  
For Canada  
Emission Control System Warranty  
Details of this warranty may be found with other  
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information  
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.  
If you did not receive a Warranty Information  
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-  
ment by writing to:  
●
Nissan Canada Inc.  
5290 Orbitor Drive  
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5  
9-30 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US  
only)  
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/  
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST  
Due to legal requirements in some states and  
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-  
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-  
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of  
the emission control system.  
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-  
fect which could cause a crash or could  
cause injury or death, you should immedi-  
ately inform the National Highway Traffic  
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-  
tion to notifying NISSAN.  
WARNING  
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and  
prudent manner according to traffic con-  
ditions and obey all traffic laws.  
1. Start the engine when the engine coolant  
temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-  
low the engine to idle until the gauge needle  
points between the C and H (normal oper-  
ating temperature).  
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it  
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,  
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary  
usage of the vehicle.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it  
may open an investigation, and if it finds  
that a safety defect exists in a group of  
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-  
come involved in individual problems be-  
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.  
If a powertrain system component is repaired or  
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be  
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the  
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88  
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator  
pedal completely and keep it released for at  
least 10 seconds.  
I/M  
test,  
check  
the  
vehicle’s  
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-  
tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting  
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light  
(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then  
blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is  
“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20  
seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the  
MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” con-  
dition, drive the vehicle through the following  
pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If  
you cannot or do not want to perform the driving  
pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.  
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a  
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of  
53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9  
minutes.  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-  
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-  
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go  
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:  
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh  
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.  
You can also obtain other information  
about motor vehicle safety from  
http://www.safercar.gov.  
4. Stop the vehicle.  
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)  
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.  
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.  
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)  
and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-  
utes.  
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our  
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at  
1-800-NISSAN-1.  
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the shift selector in  
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.  
Technical and consumer information 9-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)  
9. Turn the engine off.  
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-  
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to  
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-  
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a  
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-  
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR  
is designed to record data related to vehicle  
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of  
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this  
vehicle is designed to record such data as:  
the type of personally identifying data routinely  
acquired during a crash investigation.  
10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.  
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-  
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the  
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-  
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such  
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-  
ment, can read the information if they have ac-  
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only  
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle  
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-  
mitted by law.  
If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the  
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-  
able between steps. Do not stop the engine until  
step 7 is completed.  
●
●
●
How various systems in your vehicle were  
operating;  
Whether or not the driver and passenger  
safety belts were buckled/fastened;  
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing  
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,  
●
●
How fast the vehicle was traveling.  
Sounds are not recorded.  
These data can help provide a better understand-  
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and  
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by  
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation  
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under  
normal driving conditions and no personal data  
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are  
recorded. However, other parties, such as law  
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with  
9-32 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE  
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION  
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best  
source of service and repair information for your  
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations  
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-  
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the  
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN  
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN  
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service  
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.  
For Canada  
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage  
caused by a non-genuine part.  
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-  
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact  
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-  
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area  
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-  
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-  
tive will assist you.  
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect  
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-  
tection and maintain the resale value of your  
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using  
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-  
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the  
end of your lease.  
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and  
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.  
For USA  
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to  
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the  
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-  
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such  
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-  
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model  
year and later contact:  
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION  
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely  
event, there is some important information you  
should know.  
1-800-450-9491  
www.nissan-techinfo.com  
Why should you take a chance?  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model  
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:  
Many insurance companies routinely authorize  
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to  
cut costs, among other reasons.  
In over 40 states, the law says you must be ad-  
vised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your  
vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that  
restrict insurance companies from authorizing the  
use of non-genuine collision parts during the new  
vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so  
you can take action to protect yourself.  
1-800-247-5321  
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN  
collision parts!  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year  
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:  
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts  
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-  
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its  
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your  
insurance agent and your repair shop to  
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.  
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,  
1-800-247-5321  
It’s your right!  
If you should need further information visit us at:  
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or  
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).  
Technical and consumer information 9-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
9-34 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Index  
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16  
Audio System  
CompactFlash (CF) player . . . . . . . . .4-60  
Audio system  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16  
Bluetoothா hands-free phone  
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92, 4-107  
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50  
Brake  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-29  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-30  
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14  
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-20, 8-22  
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-17  
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Brightness control  
A
changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55  
Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Air bag  
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-53  
Air bag system  
Audio System  
Music Box hard-disk drive audio  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62  
Audio system  
Front (See supplemental front impact  
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61  
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67  
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-18  
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Air conditioner  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75  
Audio System  
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47, 4-55  
Audio system  
Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-73  
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31  
Automatic  
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12  
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil  
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7  
Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-36  
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-38  
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Alarm system (See vehicle security system) .2-25  
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76  
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-14  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-29  
Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20  
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-50  
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-58  
Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-36  
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-52  
Automatic transmission position  
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-16, 4-32  
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30  
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14  
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-32  
Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Automatic transmission fluid temperature  
gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9  
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53, 4-60  
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . .9-2  
Captain’s chair adjustment (2nd row). . . . . .1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92  
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57  
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13  
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71  
CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-50  
CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-58  
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-37  
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-31, 1-31, 1-32, 1-34  
Precautions on child restraints . . .1-32, 1-40,  
1-45, 1-50  
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-37  
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . .3-7  
Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . .2-20  
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48, 4-56  
(models with navigation system) . .4-11, 4-27  
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-27  
C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33  
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-58  
CompactFlash (CF) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-60  
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 2-46  
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17  
Brightness/contrast button . . . . .4-16, 4-32  
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-17  
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-26  
Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
Without navigation system. . . . . . . . . .4-2  
Controls  
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6  
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5  
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18  
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . .1-65  
Engine  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . . .8-10  
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6  
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-6  
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6  
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8  
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant  
D
Daytime running light system  
(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Defroster switch  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76  
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-33  
Display controls  
(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-17  
Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-21  
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16  
Drive positioner, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . .3-36  
Driving  
temperature high warning light. . . . . . . . .2-15  
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-17  
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32  
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2  
Eyeglass case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33  
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14  
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2  
F
Flashers  
Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-73  
Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-36  
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75  
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-38  
Coolant  
(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-34  
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2  
Floor mat positioning aid. . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5  
Fluid  
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11  
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-30  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capacities and recommended  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Glass hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-12  
Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-11  
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Indicator lights and audible reminders  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11  
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Front air bag system (See supplemental  
restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61  
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Front sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32  
Fuel  
(See warning/indicator lights and audible  
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-32  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2  
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-33  
Intelligent Key system  
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14  
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15  
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3  
Remote keyless entry operation . . . . . .3-17  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . .3-22  
Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55  
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34  
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetoothா . . . .4-92,  
4-107  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-30  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Headphones (See NISSAN mobile  
entertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80  
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Heater  
Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-36  
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37  
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-38  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-58  
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Hook  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7  
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4  
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3  
Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24  
J
G
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8  
Garage door opener, HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58  
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Gauge  
K
Luggage hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2  
Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-25  
Keyless entry  
Automatic transmission fluid temperature  
gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6  
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-8  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
With Intelligent Key system  
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . .3-17  
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyless entry system  
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-7  
Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-62  
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57  
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-19  
Warning/indicator lights and audible  
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-23  
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4  
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-19  
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Manual vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57  
Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-33  
Mirror  
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-32  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32  
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . .3-34  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34  
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31  
Music Box hard-disk drive audio system . . .4-62  
L
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Lights  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57  
Lock  
Labels  
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12  
C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .9-11  
Emission control information label . . . . .9-11  
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-11  
Tire and Loading Information label. . . . .9-12  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . .3-7  
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-24  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-16  
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . .2-24  
Luggage hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47  
Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . .2-49  
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13  
Luggage storage  
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-67  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)  
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34  
License plate  
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Light  
N
(see vehicle loading information). . . . . . . .2-47  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-12  
NISSAN mobile entertainment system  
(MES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76  
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system. . .2-27, 3-4,  
5-12  
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-18  
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-30  
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-13  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-30  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55  
Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16  
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . .2-24  
M
Maintenance  
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-118  
Changing the maintenance  
interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-24  
Displaying the maintenance notice  
reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-24  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3  
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5  
Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Resetting the maintenance interval. .4-8, 4-24  
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-30  
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Oil  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . . .8-10  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-6  
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant  
On-pavement and off-road driving  
Recorders  
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32  
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-7  
Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-10  
Remote controller (See NISSAN mobile  
entertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79  
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-7  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-31  
Resetting the fuel economy. . . . . . . .4-5, 4-21  
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49  
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3  
Precautions on child restraints . . .1-32, 1-40,  
1-45, 1-50  
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-21  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
temperature high warning light. . . . . . .2-15  
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6  
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34  
Overheat  
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-33  
Owner’s manual/service manual order  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53  
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2  
Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . . . .1-66  
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-26  
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
S
R
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33  
Safety  
Radio  
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . .3-7  
Child seat belts . . . .1-32, 1-40, 1-45, 1-50  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-31  
Screen (See NISSAN mobile entertainment  
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79  
Seat adjustment  
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2  
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4  
Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . . .1-6  
Second row captain’s chair . . . . . . . . .1-5  
Third row power folding seats . . . . . . .1-20  
Seat belt  
P
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-92  
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-50  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55  
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75  
Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-73  
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)  
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31  
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75  
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52  
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38  
Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31  
Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Rear window wiper and washer switches. . .2-29  
RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33  
Parking  
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-17  
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57  
Phone, Bluetoothா hands-free system . . . .4-92,  
4-107  
Power  
Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11  
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Power vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52  
Precautions  
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31  
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-31  
Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24  
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32  
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-21  
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24  
Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . .1-66  
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27  
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30  
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-30  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21  
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-29  
Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-24  
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18  
Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Seats  
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-36  
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2  
Second row captain’s chair adjustment. . . . .1-5  
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19  
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer  
system), engine start . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-12  
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-33  
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39  
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-26  
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16  
Shifting  
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . .5-15  
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-29  
Side air bag system (See supplemental side air  
bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems). . .1-65  
Sonar  
Front system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32  
Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31  
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67  
Starting  
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
Steering  
Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . .2-36  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Rear window wiper and washer  
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off  
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11  
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-73  
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Overhead storage compartment . . . . . .2-43  
Storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43, 2-47  
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31  
Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54  
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . .1-67  
Supplemental air bag warning light. . .1-68, 2-18  
Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-61  
Supplemental restraint system  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28  
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Temperature gauge  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6  
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant  
temperature high warning light. . . . . . .2-15  
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),  
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-12  
Third row power folding seats . . . . . . . . .1-20  
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2  
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Tire  
Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-67  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53  
Supplemental restraint system  
(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-53  
Switch  
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2  
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3  
Tire and Loading Information label. . . . .9-12  
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41  
Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41  
Tires of 4-wheel drive. . . . . . . . . . . .8-43  
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40  
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-29  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31  
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-52  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-34  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-30  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9  
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8  
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire pressure  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16  
Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-29  
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .9-10  
Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13, 6-14  
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Vehicle security system  
Warning/indicator lights and audible  
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Washer switch  
Tire pressure display . . . . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-22  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3  
Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . .4-6, 4-22  
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-37  
Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Towing  
2-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-12  
4-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-13  
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28  
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11  
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-20  
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17  
Transceiver  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-58  
Transmission  
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14  
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another  
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Rear window wiper and washer  
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28  
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-9  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
When traveling or registering your vehicle in  
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Windows  
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-51  
Manual vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52  
Power vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-28  
Wiper  
(NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),  
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-12  
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35  
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31  
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-118  
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8  
W
Warning  
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16  
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-18  
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . .2-14  
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-15  
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14  
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant  
Rear window wiper and washer  
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28  
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
U
temperature high warning light. . . . . . .2-15  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-34  
Low fuel warning light . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-24  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16  
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . .2-24  
Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-62  
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-18  
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-67  
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-29  
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31  
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . .8-15  
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-9  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-36  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-30  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GAS STATION INFORMATION  
For additional information, see “Capacities and  
recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical  
and consumer information” section.  
RECOMMENDED FUEL (without  
Flexible Fuel Vehicle option):  
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:  
●
Engine oil with API Certification Mark  
Viscosity SAE 5W-30  
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane  
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-  
ber (Research octane number 91).  
●
FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV)  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if so  
equipped):  
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in  
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
CAUTION  
If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel  
vehicle (FFV) your vehicle is designed to use  
(E-85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded regular  
gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels com-  
bined.  
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:  
● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door  
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system  
or other damage can occur if E-85 is  
used in vehicles that are not designed  
to run on E-85.  
See Tire and Loading Information label.  
The label is typically located on the driver side  
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional  
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
CAUTION  
● Using a fuel other than that specified  
could adversely affect the emission  
control system, and may also affect the  
warranty coverage.  
● Using a fuel other than that specified  
could adversely affect the emission  
control system, and may also affect the  
warranty coverage.  
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE  
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:  
● Under no circumstances should  
leaded gasoline be used, because this  
will damage the three-way catalyst.  
a
● Under no circumstances should  
a
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle  
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the  
“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found in  
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.  
Follow these recommendations for the future re-  
liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure  
to follow these recommendations may result in  
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.  
leaded gasoline be used, because this  
will damage the three-way catalyst.  
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage  
the fuel system components and is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-  
ited warranty.  
For additional information, see “Capacities and  
recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical  
and consumer information” section of this  
manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Door MLT 75 User Manual
MTD Lawn Mower 11 093R000 User Manual
Nikon Photo Scanner FH 869G User Manual
NordicTrack Home Gym 831157180 User Manual
NuTone Whiteboard Accessories HS 93 User Manual
OPTI UPS Surge Protector MG2T MG3T User Manual
Optoma Technology Projector TW762 User Manual
Orion Car Audio Portable Speaker CO570 User Manual
Panasonic Camcorder AG HPX370 User Manual
Paradyne Network Card 8310 MVLt User Manual